JP2023136430A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of performing suitable customer waiting control.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU 120 displays a first background display 004SG081 during a first customer waiting period (first period) after a game in a low-based state is completed (a stop display of a variation display), and displays a demonstration movie during a second customer waiting period (second period) after completion of the first customer waiting period. The performance control CPU 120 reproduces [a first performance sound G] "puff, puff, puff, puff (, powerful)" of a performance sound G that is subjected to a scratch process from speakers 8L, 8R in execution of a story SP development performance during a ready-to-win performance. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 displays a character A having a yellow display color and a character A having an ultraviolet display color in a complementary color contrast in a hue color on an image display device 5 for two times each alternately.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

As a pachinko gaming machine typified by a gaming machine, a normal background display is displayed during the first customer waiting period after the variable symbol display ends, and during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period ends. , there is one that executes control to display a demonstration display (for example, see Patent Document 1). Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a variable preview performance is executed in which the variable display result is highly likely to be a "jackpot". For example, Patent Document 1 describes the three key points of variable display presentations (super hot call notice, group notice, and fruit-patterned eyeball notice) as variable display notices that have a high possibility of becoming a "jackpot." A gaming machine is disclosed in which a catch notice) is executed when a ready-to-win state is established (during a ready-to-win effect) (for example, see Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-22196 JP2018-139865A

However, there was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a display means;
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (story SP development performance) that suggests whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled;
When the specific production (story SP development production) is executed, the specific production sound (scratch-processed production sound G) consisting of specially processed dialogue sounds and sound effects is output to the sound output means (speaker). 8L, 8R) can be output from
During the period in which the specific effect sound is being output, the display means (image display device 5) displays a first display (yellow character A) and a second display (purple character A) different from the first display. Each can be displayed multiple times (alternately twice),
The second display is a display color that is an inversion of the display color of the first display (yellow and purple, which are the display colors of character A, are in a complementary color contrast relationship),
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
When the starting condition is satisfied, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the production identification information before the transmittance of the production identification information reaches the second value. (Figure 25, Figure 54, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the production identification information becomes high, it is possible to notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended. Customer waiting control can be performed.
Furthermore, in the specific production, the first display and the second display color, which is an inverted display color of the first display, are displayed multiple times in accordance with the output of the specific production sound, so that the gaming machine In addition to creating a sense of unity between audio and video, by displaying each inverted display color multiple times, the display colors of the first display and second display can be made to appear even more vividly, so that specific effects can be executed. It can improve the interest when being played.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing aspects of a first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) a second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) a third performance mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 1st production mode. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 22. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern in a 3rd performance mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the time of starting variable display in the first production mode, and (B) in the second and third production modes. It is a figure showing the flow of SP reach effect in a low base state. It is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a high base state. (A) is a diagram showing start and end conditions for displaying a demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of each part during a demo movie. It is a transition diagram of a customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of displaying a demo movie. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the first scene (company name), (B) is a fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) is a display example of the fourth scene (warning 2). It is a figure which compares the display mode of the 1st scene (company name), the 4th scene (warning 1, 2), the number of pending memories, and small symbols. It is a figure showing the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the game state. (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement position of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A). (A1) to (A8) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state is finished. (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing main parts of FIG. 37. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing operational examples of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a high base state. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is cold-started. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is cold started. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a low base state. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is activated with a hot start in a low base state. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is activated with a hot start in a high base state. (A) to (E) are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when displaying a demo movie ends over time in a low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie over time in a high base state. (A) to (E) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation when the demo movie display ends with a winning start in a low base state. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first winning prize in the low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting winning in the low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize winning in the high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize in the high base state. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demonstration movie display is ended by operating the handle in the low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a handle operation. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in the low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a menu operation. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow of displaying a demo movie in a high base state and ending with a menu operation. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation when a ball out error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a priority layer. It is a figure which shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration production started in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration production started in a high base state. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a figure which shows an example of the parent table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the child table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a diagram showing a lamp data table used during non-gaming (only white button blinking and red button blinking are used during gaming). Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal parent table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal child table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal grandchild table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal grandchild table. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table for background time saving. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the background time saving child table. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of background probability variation. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a child table of background probability variation. Ramp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background probability variation. Ramp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background probability variation. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of a parent table for button white lighting. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of button white lighting. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button white lighting. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table for flashing white buttons. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table for button white blinking. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button white flashing. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the flashing red button. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the blinking red button. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the button blinking red. Lamp data table: is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: is a diagram showing the settings of a child table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the error parent table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the error child table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of an error grandchild table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing operation examples of character display and light emission mode in each scene. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the operation in the first scene, (B) is the third scene, and (C) is the fourth scene. It is a comparison table showing character animation display. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining similar colors. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a list of display timings for displaying a demo movie. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F. It is a figure showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart which shows starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type table in the feature section 05TM. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables, and (B1), (B2-1), and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing jackpot type determination tables. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table in normal mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table in rush mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production sound type table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an output mode regarding production sound. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a graph related to the impact of sound. It is an explanatory view showing a performance sound type table. It is an explanatory view showing a performance sound type table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of complementary color contrast. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a movable body. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance determination process at the time of a start winning prize. It is an explanatory view showing a table referred to in the start-up winning performance determination process. It is an explanatory view showing a table referred to in the start-up winning performance determination process. It is an explanatory view showing a table referred to in the start-up winning performance determination process. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a normal change performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a change precursor performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding special change production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding special change production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding special change production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding special change production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a look-ahead preview performance of a change precursor performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance determination process at the time of a fluctuation|variation start. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance determination process at the time of a fluctuation|variation start. It is an explanatory view showing a table referred to in the variation start time effect determination process. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the development flow of SP reach performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding a story SP development production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding a story SP development production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding a story SP development production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode related to CU production. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the first normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the first normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the second normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the second normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the second normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the second normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the third normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the third normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the third normal jackpot notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the third normal jackpot notification performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a revival performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a revival performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a revival performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a round display. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of execution timing of V stock performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance determination processing at the time of a jackpot start. It is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in the performance determination process at the time of jackpot start. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a jackpot type notification performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode when the first V stock performance is not executed in the jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the performance mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot fanfare period. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the performance mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot fanfare period. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the performance mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot fanfare period. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot round period. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot round period. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot round period. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot round period. It is a flowchart showing an example of performance determination processing at the end of jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a production mode when selecting a production mode of rush mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance determination process at the time of waiting for a fluctuation|variation start. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of determining whether or not to execute the second V stock effect at the start of variation. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a production mode when the 2nd V stock production is not performed in a time saving state. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode when a second V stock performance is executed in a time saving state. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a round display after V stock performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a time-saving rush performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a time-saving rush performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a time-saving rush performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding an annihilation SP performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an output mode regarding performance sound in annihilation SP performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the jackpot notification performance when hitting the first right. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a special jackpot notification performance when hitting the first right. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a jackpot notification performance when hitting the second right. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a special jackpot notification performance when hitting the second right. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a jackpot notification performance when hitting the third right. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a special jackpot notification performance when hitting the third right. It is an explanatory diagram showing a playback output period table of performance sound in a jackpot notification performance. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of a series of performances in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of a series of performances in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of a series of performances in this embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a series of presentations in this embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a series of presentations in this embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a series of presentations in this embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a series of presentations in this embodiment.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
Before the display means switches the display from the background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (FIGS. 18 and 19). , Figure 38, Figure 39, Figure 40, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the demonstration display is started, it is possible to draw attention to changes rather than starting everything all at once. , the user can be made aware of the start of the demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
Before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, switching from the normal state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means,
Before the display means switches the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the special state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (Fig. 18, Fig. 19, Fig. 38, Fig. 39, Fig. 40, Fig. 42, Fig. 43, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the display of the demonstration display is started, it is possible to draw attention to changes rather than starting everything all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
The luminance data initially used in the luminance data table for demonstration display has a color different from the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for normal state background display and the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for special state background display. (Figure 80, Figure 84, Figure 88, Figure 92, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the color of the last luminance data during the normal state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during the special state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display. Since the color of the initial brightness data is different, the color of the light emitting means stands out when the demonstration display starts in each state, making it easy to understand that the demonstration display has started, and as a result, it is possible to improve customer waiting. can be controlled.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
In the first period and the second period, the third light emitting means is controlled using one brightness data table different from the background display brightness data table and the demonstration display brightness data table (FIG. 29, 38, Figure 39, Figure 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted, so By adopting this mode, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are activated using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control,
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
a brightness data table different from the normal state background display brightness data table, the special state background display brightness data table, and the demonstration display brightness data table in a first period after the game in the normal state ends; controlling the third light emitting means using
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the third light emitting means using the one brightness data table,
controlling the third light emitting means using the one brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIG. 29, FIG. 38, FIG. 39, Figure 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted. By keeping the mode constant in both the normal state and the special state, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in both the normal state and the special state, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a first scene and a second scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the first scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a first scene brightness data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a second scene brightness data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the first scene in the second period, controlling the third light emitting means using a brightness data table different from the first scene brightness data table and the second scene brightness data table,
In the second scene in the second period, the third light emitting means is controlled using the one luminance data table (FIG. 29, FIG. 38, FIG. 39, FIG. 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted, so By adopting this mode, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first brightness data table is a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for promotion effects used when a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the performance operation means is executed, and the first brightness data table is a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for promotion effects used when a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect operation means is executed. There are fewer changes in brightness than the brightness data that constitutes the brightness data table for promotional effects (Figures 97 to 105, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first brightness data table is composed of brightness data for making the mode less emphasized than when the operation of the production operation means is prompted, so that the operation of the production operation means is prompted. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game is being held, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first brightness data table is characterized in that it is composed of brightness data for turning off the light.
According to this feature, since the first brightness data table is composed of brightness data for turning off the lights, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that they are prompted to operate the effect operation means, and as a result, This allows suitable customer waiting control to be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 5-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first light emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are provided in the game frame (see FIG. 36, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means is provided in the game frame, but it is not managed using the same brightness data table as other light emitting means provided in the game frame, but is managed separately. Therefore, it is possible to suitably design a game machine to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the performance operation means is being prompted, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The display means displays a display indicating that the power is being started after the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is being activated;
The third light emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is being activated (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by emitting light using the brightness data table before the background display, it is possible to confirm whether the light emitting means is normal at the startup stage, and after that, seamless The light emitting mode can be changed to a state where the light is emitted while waiting for a customer, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, a warning display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the attention display scene in the second period using a brightness data table for attention display scenes corresponding to the attention display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for the company name display scene, the brightness data table for the title name display, and the brightness data table for the alert display scene is used. controlling the light emitting means using
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table (see FIG. 29, etc.)
It is characterized by

Note that the company name includes the name of the company involved in the development, manufacture, and sale of the gaming machine.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we can make it stand out from other text displays by emitting a dedicated light for each. This can be emphasized through comparison, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
There is another scene between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a brightness data table different from the first brightness data table is used (Figure 29, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a common brightness data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, suitable light emission can be achieved without increasing the capacity, and as a result, a suitable luminance data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene. Customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
Execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 seconds)>Execution period of the company name display scene (10 seconds), the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene The execution period is such that the execution period (30 sec) is greater than the execution period (5 sec) of the alert display scene,
The character display of the company name and the warning text are characterized in that they may be displayed at times other than during the demonstration display.
According to this feature, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene, which are displayed only during the demonstration display, can be emphasized for a longer period of time, so that suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed in an animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table different from the brightness data table for the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means using the first brightness data table in the second model introduction scene in the second period;
The brightness data table for the company name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to an animation of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine,
The first luminance data table is luminance data that is linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, and the luminance data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene. (Figure 29, Figure 31, Figure 32, Figures 91 to 98, Figure 119)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but in particular, we want to convey information about the company name, so by using brightness data that is linked to the display animation, it is emphasized when compared with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed in an animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table different from the title name display brightness data table. ,
The title name display scene brightness data table includes brightness data that is linked to the animation of the character display of the title name of the gaming machine,
The first luminance data table is luminance data that is linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, and the luminance data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene. (Figure 29, Figure 31, Figure 32, Figures 91 to 98, Figure 119)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to convey information about the model name in particular, by using brightness data that is linked to the display animation, it is emphasized when compared with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the attention display scene in the second period using a brightness data table for attention display scenes corresponding to the attention display scene;
A mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is a mode that is emphasized more than a mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for alerting display scenes. and
An aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for title name display scenes is a mode that is emphasized more than an aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for alerting display scenes. (Figure 28 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we can do so by emitting dedicated light for each piece of information. Among them, by emphasizing the lighting mode of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. I can do it.

The gaming machine of Form 9-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 9-1,
A mode in which the aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is emphasized more than the aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for alerting display scenes. , and an aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the luminance data table for title name display scenes is more emphasized than an aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the luminance data table for alerting display scenes. The mode is one of the following: (1) A mode in which there are many flashes, (2) A mode in which there are many lighting colors, (3) A mode in which a large number of light emitting means are used (Fig. 28, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 9-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 9-1,
The aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is more emphasized than the aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for title name display scenes. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the company name can be emphasized more, it is possible to clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is associated with, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a model introduction scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene,
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means in the model introduction scene in the second period using a model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the model introduction display scene;
The plurality of brightness data constituting the company name display scene brightness data table are brightness data configured such that the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light,
The plurality of brightness data constituting the model introduction scene brightness data table are brightness data configured such that the first light emitting means emits light and the second light emitting means does not emit light (FIG. 29, FIGS. 90 to 90). Figure 98)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by character display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light, and in the model introduction scene, the first light emitting means emit light. By setting the light emitting means to emit light but not emitting light from the second light emitting means, the company name display scene can be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene,
controlling the first light emitting means in the first model introduction scene in the second period using a first model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the first model introduction display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means using a second model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the second model introduction display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, one brightness data table is used to control the second light emitting means.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light in a dedicated light emission mode, and the first model introduction In the scene and the second model introduction scene, the first light emitting means emits light in a dedicated light emitting mode, but the second light emitting means emits light in a common light emitting mode, so that the company name is relatively The displayed scene can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table,
When a specific effect is executed, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table,
The rainbow brightness data table used in the second period and the rainbow brightness data table used when the specific effect is executed are a common brightness data table (FIG. 28, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed during the game. By using the same brightness data table that is used in response to the specific performance, the capacity does not need to be increased, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table when a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed;
A rainbow brightness data table used in a second period after the first period after the game ends in the normal state, and a rainbow brightness data table used in the second period after the first period after the game ends in the special state. The rainbow brightness data table used and the rainbow brightness data table used when the specific effect executable in the normal state and the special effect executable in the special state are executed are a common brightness data table ( Figure 28, Figure 31, Figure 32, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed in the normal state. By sharing the brightness data table with the brightness data table used for possible specific effects and special effects that can be executed in a special state, the capacity can not be increased, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 12-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 12-1,
The specific performance and the special performance are characterized in that they are performances that definitively notify that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
According to this feature, since the brightness data table used for the performance that is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state is also used for the demonstration display, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
The title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part that displays a text display of the main title name of the gaming machine, and a subtitle name display part that displays a text display of the subtitle name of the gaming machine,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a subtitle name display part brightness data table corresponding to the subtitle name display part at a timing when the main title name display part is switched to the subtitle name display part,
The brightness data table for the subtitle name display part is a brightness data table for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emitting manner linked to the animation of the character display of the subtitle name using a plurality of brightness data (see FIG. 29, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in this order, and the title name of the game machine is completed by displaying the subtitle name, so the light emitting means is linked to the display animation of the subtitle name. By emitting light, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The warning display scene is a scene in which a character display warning when playing the gaming machine is displayed as an animation,
The animated display of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine is in a mode that is more emphasized than the animated display of the text display to alert people when playing the gaming machine,
The animation of the character display of the title name of the game machine is more emphasized than the animation of the character display to alert people when playing the game machine (FIG. 120, FIG. 121, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we can emphasize it by displaying each with its own display animation. Among them, by emphasizing the display animation of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved. It can be carried out.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene and an attention-calling display scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The display means is
In the title name display scene, the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in an animation at a specified display position;
After that, the character display of the title name of the game machine is displayed as an animation,
In the caution display scene, a character display warning when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation at a prescribed display position;
Thereafter, a text display warning when playing the game machine is displayed without animation (Fig. 120, Fig. 121, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the title name of the game is displayed with a lingering movement to draw attention to the title, and to call attention, the characters are clearly displayed by avoiding the lingering movement. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes an attention-calling display scene,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The alert display scene includes a first alert display part that displays a text alert for the first event, and a second alert display part that displays a text alert for the second event. ,
The background color of the character display in the first attention display part is different from the background color of the character display in the second attention display part (FIG. 33, FIG. 34, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the background color to call attention to different events, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The background color of the text display in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the text display in the alert display scene (FIG. 33, FIG. 34, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using different background colors for displaying the company name and calling attention to it, it is possible to increase attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
After the second period ends, displaying the background display again;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the background display brightness data table (FIGS. 50 and 51). etc)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a stepwise design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the background display is started, it is possible to prevent the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad aftertaste. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying the normal state background display again;
After the second period in the special state ends, displaying the special state background display again;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the normal state background display brightness data table to control the light emitting means,
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special state background display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the special state background display brightness data table (Fig. 50 to Figure 52, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a stepwise design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the background display is started, it is possible to prevent the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad aftertaste. Furthermore, the state of the lamp can be quickly notified to the player by the light emission mode of the lamp, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, The light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the starting conditions are satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. It can be carried out.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the variable display in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the variable display in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, the display means may switch the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state. before controlling the light emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of performance identification information in the normal state;
If the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the display means may switch the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of performance identification information in the special state. Before that, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of performance identification information in the special state (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first in the normal state and special state, it is possible to quickly notify that the starting conditions are satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means. This allows suitable customer waiting control to be performed.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using the background display brightness data table,
In a second period after the first period after the first special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the second special identification information ends;
If the first starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the display means changes the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of production identification information corresponding to the first special identification information. Before switching, controlling the light emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of production identification information corresponding to the first special identification information,
If the second starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the display means changes the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information. Before switching, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the production identification information corresponding to the second special identification information (FIGS. 53 to 58). etc)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter which starting condition is met, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly confirm that the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the production identification information before the transmittance of the production identification information reaches the second value. (Figure 25, Figure 54, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the production identification information becomes high, it is possible to notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the variable display in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
In the normal state, if the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed, the performance identification in the normal state from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of information,
In the special state, if the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the performance identification in the special state is started from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of information (Figure 25, Figure 54, Figure 124, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in both the normal state and the special state, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display ends. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed, the performance corresponding to the first special identification information is changed from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of identification information,
If the second start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the performance corresponding to the second special identification information is started from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to variable display of identification information (Figure 25, Figure 54, Figure 124, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter which starting condition is met, if the switching from the demonstration display is completed before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, the starting condition is met and the demonstration display is started. It is possible to notify that the process has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a firing operation means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
If the firing operation means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to the background display;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the demonstration display brightness data is displayed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display. Switching from the table to the background display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means (FIG. 59, FIG. 60, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the firing operation means by switching the light emitting means. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Menu operation means,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
If the menu operating means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to a menu display;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
When the menu is displayed, controlling the light emitting means using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display,
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the demonstration display brightness data is displayed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. Switching from the table to the menu display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the menu operation means being operated by switching the light emitting means, and as a result, it is possible to notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operating means. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Menu operation means,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
If the menu operating means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to a menu display;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
When the menu is displayed, controlling the light emitting means using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display,
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, the demonstration display may be performed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. controlling the light emitting means by switching from the display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table;
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the demonstration display is executed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. Switching from the display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by first switching the control of the light emitting means, it is possible to immediately notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operation means by switching the light emitting means. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
After the second period ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the background display;
If an interrupt condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display without displaying the switching display (FIGS. 50 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is done by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of sudden switching, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interrupt condition is done without inserting the switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the normal state background display;
After the second period in the special state ends, displaying the switching display, and then displaying the special state background display,
If an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying the demonstration display in the normal state, the demonstration display is switched to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

If the interruption condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed in the special state, the demonstration display is switched to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (FIG. 50). ~Figure 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and special state, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented by inserting a switching display to prevent it from appearing to have suddenly changed, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interrupt condition is By showing the sudden change without intervening the switching display, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. .

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
If a power failure occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the background display,
Then display the demonstration display and
After that, displaying the background display while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the background display,
If the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization,
After the power is turned on, displaying the background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the background display;
then displaying the demonstration display;
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while displaying the guide display at the display start timing of the background display (FIGS. 44 and 45)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the start-up situation before a gaming parlor opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization). Even at startup, game store staff can check the display by checking the background display, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guidance display after turning on the power, increasing the efficiency of confirmation and further improving the efficiency of the game store. If the background display is displayed when the store is open and players are welcomed, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide clear guidance for performance adjustments from the timing of the start of play, and to provide players with guidance. A suitable gaming environment can be provided, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in the special state;
In the above normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, displaying the normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the normal state background display;
Then display the demonstration display and
After that, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the normal state background display,
In the above special state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, displaying the special state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the special state background display;
then displaying the demonstration display;
Thereafter, the special state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the special state background display (FIGS. 46 to 49, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the start-up status before the game store opens can be considered to be a normal state or a special state, and a guide is displayed so that you can check in the background in which state it has started up. If the background is displayed again after that, there is a high possibility that you have already confirmed the status, so by displaying the guidance display from the timing when the background display starts displaying. , When the background display is displayed when the game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide solid guidance for performance adjustment from the timing of the start of the game, A suitable gaming environment can be provided to the players, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying a demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display ends,
displaying a special state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
Thereafter, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special state background display is displayed while the guidance display is being performed (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the guidance display is not displayed immediately after the end of the variation in both the normal state and the special state, thereby preventing unnecessarily prompting for production adjustment, and once the demonstration display is completed. After the game ends, there is a possibility that the players are away from their seats, so by prompting them to adjust the performance immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to have them play in a suitable gaming environment. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information ends,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying a demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information ends,
displaying the normal state background display without displaying the guide display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guide display;
After that, displaying the demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information ends,
displaying a special state background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying the demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information ends,
displaying the special state background display without displaying the guide display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guide display;
Thereafter, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special state background display is displayed while the guidance display is being performed (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the guidance is displayed immediately after the change of the first special identification information in either the normal state or the special state, even after the change of the second special identification information ends. By not displaying this, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and once the demonstration display has ended, there is a possibility that the player is away from his/her seat, so the background will be removed from the demonstration display. By prompting the player to adjust the performance immediately after switching to the display, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
After the variable display ends,
Displaying a background display without displaying a guidance display related to production adjustment, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the guidance display in a specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display,
Thereafter, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the background display by displaying the specific animation (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not displaying the guidance display immediately after the end of the variation, it is possible to prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustment, and once the demonstration display has ended, the background display changes from the demonstration display to the background display. By prompting the production adjustment immediately after the change, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment.Furthermore, when displaying the guidance display immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, the guidance is provided after the change ends. By displaying the guidance using the same animation as when displaying the information, it is possible to emphasize that the guidance display has been displayed without incurring any cost, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the variable display ends and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and a second specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, displaying the demonstration display;
In the special state, when the power is turned off and the second specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, displaying the demonstration display;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the change ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and the Since the game store clerk, not the player, is present, by setting the length to be short, the game store clerk can check the demonstration display immediately, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the variable display ends and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 45, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and a cold start (initial Since turning on the power (with power on) is the first step that must be performed when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming parlor, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, it is possible for the gaming staff to display the demonstration display. This can be quickly confirmed and the customer can learn more about the installed machine, resulting in better customer waiting control.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and a first specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the power is turned off and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced into a gaming parlor, so the demonstration display will be displayed immediately. By doing so, game store clerks can quickly check the demonstration display and learn more about the introduced machines, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display ends, when a predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again. death,
In the special state, after the variable display ends, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period elapses, and after the demonstration display ends, when the predetermined period elapses, the demonstration display is displayed again. show the display,
In the normal state, after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display is finished, the predetermined period of time is displayed. has passed, display the demonstration display again,
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the second specific period elapses, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display ends, the predetermined When the period has passed, the demonstration display will be displayed again,
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 45, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and a cold start (initial Since turning on the power (with power on) is the first step that must be performed when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming parlor, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, it is possible for the gaming staff to display the demonstration display. It is possible to quickly confirm the following information and to learn more about the installed machine.Furthermore, a demonstration can be displayed once in any situation: after the fluctuation in the normal state, after the fluctuation in the special state, or after a cold start. By setting the period from when is displayed until the demonstration display is displayed again to be the same, the demo movie can be shown stably, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 67, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurs during the game is carried over and executed both during the background display and the demonstration display, thereby stably notifying the specific error. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. (Figures 65 to 68, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurs during the game in both the normal state and the special state is carried over and executed both during the background display and during the demonstration display. As a result, it is possible to perform stable notification of specific errors, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In a first period after the end of variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the background display brightness data table;
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, display a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. controlling the light emitting means using
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is control,
If the specific error occurs during variable display of the first special identification information, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error has not been resolved, the Continue controlling the light emitting means,
If the specific error occurs during variable display of the second special identification information, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, the brightness data table for the specific error is used. Continue controlling the light emitting means (Figures 65 to 68, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the lamp notification of a specific error that occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information is carried over and executed both during the background display and during the demonstration display. By doing so, stable specific error notification can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The brightness data constituting the demonstration display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIGS. 35, 78 to 89, and 110 to 110). 112 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for demonstration display to have different main colors in the luminance data, specific errors can be detected depending on the light emission mode during demonstration display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The brightness data constituting the background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIGS. 35, 78 to 89, and 110 to 110). 112 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display to have different main colors in the brightness data, specific errors can be detected depending on the light emission mode during background display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
The brightness data constituting the normal state background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that occupy a large proportion,
The brightness data constituting the special state background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors (FIGS. 35, 78 to 89, and 110). ~Figure 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, and the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display are configured to have different main colors. By configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different from the brightness data table for the special state background display, it is possible to prevent specific errors from occurring depending on the light emission mode during the background display, regardless of which background is being displayed. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs in the second period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data;
The brightness data for demonstration display and the brightness data for specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display, a specific error may occur depending on the light emission mode during the demonstration display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using background display brightness data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs in the first period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the background display brightness data;
The brightness data for background display and the brightness data for specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, specific errors may occur depending on the light emission mode during background display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state has ended, if no specific error has occurred, the first light emitting means and the first 2. Controlling the light emitting means,
In a first period after the game in the special state has ended, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light emitting means and the controlling the second light emitting means;
If the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the normal state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the normal state background display brightness data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the special state background display brightness data;
The brightness data for the normal state background display and the brightness data for the specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion,
The brightness data for the special state background display and the brightness data for the specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the main color of the brightness data is made different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a normal state background display, and the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a special state background display are made different. By configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different from the brightness data of As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is configured to be different between the brightness data forming the demonstration display brightness data table and the brightness data forming the specific error brightness data table (Fig. 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for demonstration display to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, the light emitting mode during demonstration display can be changed. It can be suggested that a specific error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The luminance data forming the background display luminance data table and the luminance data forming the specific error luminance data table are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (Fig. 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for background display to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, the light emitting mode during background display can be changed. It can be suggested that a specific error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
The luminance data configuring the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data configuring the specific error luminance data table are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different;
The light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is configured to be different between the brightness data forming the special state background display brightness data table and the brightness data forming the specific error brightness data table. (Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display are configured to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, and the brightness data table for specific errors By configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different depending on the brightness data table for the special state background display and the brightness data table for the special state background display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light emitting mode during the background display regardless of which background is being displayed. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs in the second period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data;
The demonstration display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different ( Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light emitting mode during the demonstration display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using background display brightness data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs in the first period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the background display brightness data;
The background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different ( Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a background display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light emitting mode during the background display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state has ended, if no specific error has occurred, the first light emitting means and the first 2. Controlling the light emitting means,
In a first period after the game in the special state has ended, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light emitting means and the controlling the second light emitting means;
If the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the normal state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the normal state background display brightness data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the special state background display brightness data;
The normal state background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different. ,
The special state background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different. (Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player is made different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a normal state background display, and the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a special By configuring the movement of the light emitting means to be shown to the player to be different depending on the brightness data for the status background display, it is possible to identify the state by the light emitting mode during the background display, regardless of whether it is a normal state or a special state. It can be suggested that an error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, gaming media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department, and gaming media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department. In either case, switching from the specific error brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game medium by the detection means, Controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout section, at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is emitted corresponding to the demonstration display. By switching to the mode, the demonstration display can be made to look natural, the processing can be shared, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, gaming media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department, and gaming media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department. In either case, switching from the specific error brightness data table to the background display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game medium by the detection means, Controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter what number of game balls are distributed to the payout section, at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is changed to emit light corresponding to the background display. By switching to this mode, the background display can be made to look natural quickly, and the processing can be standardized, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the second period, if the payout condition for game media is met and the period in which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, a specific error corresponding to the specific error is determined from the demonstration display brightness data table. controlling the light emitting means by switching to an error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detecting means detected the game medium, the specific error brightness data table Control the light emitting means by switching to the demonstration display brightness data table (FIG. 35, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the detection means does not detect a state, there is a possibility of a specific error, but there is also a possibility that the ball is delayed, so the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not changed immediately, and the game ball is When detected, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to the light emitting mode corresponding to the demonstration display, so that the demonstration display can be displayed without any discomfort, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the first period, if the payout condition for game media is met and the period in which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, a specific error corresponding to the specific error is determined from the background display brightness data table. controlling the light emitting means by switching to an error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detecting means detected the game medium, the specific error brightness data table Control the light emitting means by switching to the background display brightness data table (FIG. 35, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the detection means does not detect a state, there is a possibility of a specific error, but there is also a possibility that the ball is delayed, so the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not changed immediately, and the game ball is When detected, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to the light emitting mode corresponding to the background display, so that the background display can be made to look natural, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

Next, a mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of Fig. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear, back) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side are This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "004SGS1," "Normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach," "Super reach" may be "SP reach," etc. It is sometimes abbreviated as.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5, a first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), a second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and a decoration are displayed. A display area 5S for displaying small symbols corresponding to the symbols is provided, and the small symbols are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, a pending display, a small symbol, an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a right-handed action prompting the player to perform a right-handed operation. The notification image 004SG201 (see Fig. 21), the remaining time saving display 004SG202 (see Fig. 21), which shows the remaining number of time saving, etc., are displayed in front (upper layer) of the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While this prevents the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error displays from being reduced due to duplication, decorative symbols are stored on the back side (lower layer) of the production image. By displaying the decorative patterns, it may be possible to prevent the decorative patterns from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the effect image.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect may be performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern momentarily disappears from the screen, or the movable body 32 may be displayed on all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a display is performed that blocks the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Moreover, based on having received the second variable display start command, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5.

In addition, a fourth symbol display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, is provided. The pattern displayed on the device is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U) for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , active display area 5F) are provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this area represents a variable display in which execution of the first special symbol is pending. A first special figure pending memory display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. , may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in FIG. 1, positions above and below the image display device 5), and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. ing. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." Further, these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 36). Further, various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The payout control board 004SG030 includes a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on the reception of the payout signal. The device 004SG031 is connected to a game ball detection sensor 004SG032 provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which game balls put out by the payout device 004SG031 pass, and receives information from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032. It is possible to stop driving the payout device 004SG031 depending on the form of the game ball detection signal.

Further, the payout control board 004SG030 includes a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is holding the ball batting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the firing device 004SG033 that can fire game balls onto the game board 2. In addition, a signal indicating whether or not the touch ring 004SG35 is detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been fired by the firing device 004SG033 are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. .

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Furthermore, since the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers, the images of each of these layers are drawn and displayed in the VRAM area. a layered image drawing area for placement; a display image creation area for further superimposing (synthesizing) the images drawn and placed in each layered image drawing area to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5; is located. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. Three image drawing areas are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area as a displacement target image, This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

The layer 1 image drawing area includes a special figure holding memory display area 5U that specifiably displays the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number at the lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5. At the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, there is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the interface image and a second interface image that includes a small pattern whose display screen is smaller than the decorative pattern and a display of the number of reserved memories. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background display is drawn in order to display the background display in the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (layer 3 images). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decoration pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so it is displayed as a middle layer in the image display device 5. The image (background display) that is displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has been cold started (that the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that cold start refers to the process of initializing the data when the power is turned on, without restoring the data that existed before the power was turned on, and then putting the gaming machine in a state where it can execute various processes. . Command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has been hot started (that the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that hot start refers to putting the gaming machine into a state where various processes can be executed based on backed up data when the power is turned on. Since hot start does not involve initialization, it is also referred to as power-on without initialization. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is set as a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which both time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state). Note that the variable probability state with time saving may be simply referred to as the "variable probability state". The command 96XXH is an error designation command that designates that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and that the error has been canceled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution. Command E100H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies execution of a customer waiting demonstration (demonstration performance). Command F100H is a frame state display designation command that designates the state of each input port (including on/off of touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 3(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "0" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure display result than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). is assigned to. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 6(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 6(B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ``Probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and ``probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a low-probable, high-base state with only time-saving control being executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Uncertain variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The probability variable control and time saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot gaming states of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, the time saving control that is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the non-probable variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until the 100 variable displays are finished, or until the 100 variable displays are finished. It will be terminated on the condition that. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the probability variable control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state passes through the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive home situation that occurs continuously without interruption. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If not, the game state is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 100 times. Therefore, the time saving state is also a gaming state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable strange jackpot A", "probable strange jackpot The allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" are different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is based on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. ing.

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo series), super reach (one pseudo series), and super reach (two pseudo series). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

The super reach variation pattern in this embodiment includes a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot. Variable display results as a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (1 pseudo-run), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a jackpot (PB1-3), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a loss (PA2-3), and a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is changed to PB1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. -1 (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) using the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table B. ), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous effect 2) (times) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 are determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 are determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 70%. .

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is one or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for failure. Using the variation pattern determination table A, change the variation pattern to PA1-1 (variation pattern with no shortening, non-reach error), PA2-1 (normal reach error), and PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)), and PA2-4 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-3 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or variable probability state), select the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss to change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-3 (shortened PA2-1 (non-reach deviation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern) pattern) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern is determined according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of The selection ratio of any of the variable patterns for jackpots (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, depending on the gaming state, regardless of the type of jackpot. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variable pattern suitable for the gaming state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area 004SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 004SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a control timer setting section 004SG153, a game control counter setting section 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 004SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A) is stored in the winning order.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B) is stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and satisfies the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the above are held as pending data. The information is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reservation data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 004SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 004SG151B can be used to execute a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol. This is pending information that indicates that the game is on hold and makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The standard figure reservation storage unit 004SG151C stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 004SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 004SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 004SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 004SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 004SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 004SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has, for example, a performance control data holding area 004SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 004SG190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 004SG191, a performance control timer setting section 004SG192, a performance control counter setting section 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 004SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting section 004SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 004SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The production control counter setting section 004SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various production operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 004SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A as shown in FIG. 10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 004SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 004SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 004SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the starting winning command reception command buffer 004SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then random number circuit setting processing (step S8) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (004SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (004SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (004SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 004SGS102 (004SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 004SGS101 (004SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 004SGS102 (004SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (004SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (004SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 004SGS105 (004SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 004SG155 is set to "2" (004SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 004SGS103 and 004SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "0", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 004SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (004SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (004SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 004SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, transmission settings of a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (004SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 sends information to the effect control board 12 by, for example, storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. Settings are made to send a pending storage number notification command (004SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 004SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 13 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 004SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 004 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by updating the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 004SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 004SGS144), the process moves to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 004SGS145). . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. good. In this way, the process of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 004SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145;N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 004 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 004SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "0" (step 004SGS148), the process moves to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 5 is selected as the table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or "miss". and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result should be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004 SGS150). In addition, in this step 004SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off (low probability low base state in this feature), if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be a "jackpot". ”, and if it is not applicable, it is determined as “miss”.

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 004SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so step 004SGS150 In this process, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine the special pattern display result as a "jackpot" depending on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state when the variable display such as a special pattern game starts. ” By determining whether or not to do so, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 004SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used (step 004 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 004 SGS 154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-certain, high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 004SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3". Note that after the processing in step 004SGS155, the process advances to step 004SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "miss" (step 004SGS150; N), the process in step 004SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) in response to the predetermined result of the jackpot type in the case where the jackpot gaming state is set. , set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special map game using the first special map is "0" at step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 004SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display displayed on the image display device 5 are performed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background display and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first production mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second production mode, and the third background display corresponding to the third production mode One of the background displays 004SG083 is selected and displayed. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the gaming state is the low probability high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the gaming state is the normal state. It can be displayed when the state is in the high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition to the process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, the menu display process includes a process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5, and also a process of displaying a speaker on the speaker in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is being displayed. This includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R, and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start wait timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the production control process process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 17, the production control CPU 120 first starts the pending storage display (first pending display 004SG101 and second pending display 004SG102) in the special figure pending storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process is executed to perform a shift display, which will be described later, to update the display according to the storage contents of the winning command reception command buffer 004SG194A (step S161). After execution of the pending display update process, for example, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed.

In addition, in step S161, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, a determination is made to execute a pre-read preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display color of the pending display, etc.). A prefetch notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Demonstration production control processing)
Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. 18 to 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 of FIG. 16. In the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the demonstration movie display is being executed (step 004SGS501). Whether or not the demo movie display is being executed is determined by whether or not a demo movie execution flag indicating that the demo movie display is being executed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is not being executed, it is determined whether the menu is being displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is being displayed is determined by whether or not a menu displaying flag indicating that the menu is being displayed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not being displayed, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS503). Whether touch ring 004SG035 is on is determined by whether a touch ring on flag indicating that touch ring 004SG035 is on is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the demo movie is waiting to start (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the demo movie is waiting to start is determined by whether or not a demo movie start waiting flag indicating waiting to start the demo movie is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is not waiting to start, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag indicating reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004 SGS505 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received, the timer value corresponds to approximately 120 seconds as the value of the demo movie start waiting timer for measuring the time until the demonstration movie display starts. (60000) (Step 004SGS506), set the demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), and set the value of the guidance display start wait timer to measure the time until the guidance display starts, which corresponds to about 30 seconds. A timer value (15000) is set (step 004SGS512), a guidance display start wait flag indicating a wait for guidance display start is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether a power-on designation command reception flag indicating reception of a power-on designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on designation command has been received, a timer value (30000) corresponding to approximately 60 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS508), and the demo movie start wait timer value is set. Set a flag (step 004SGS511), set a timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), set the guidance display start wait flag (step 004SGS513), and start the demonstration. The performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on designation command has not been received, it is determined whether a power failure recovery designation command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not the power failure recovery designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a power failure recovery designation command reception flag indicating reception of the power failure recovery designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that the power failure recovery designation command has not been received, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power failure recovery designation command has been received, a timer value (45000) corresponding to approximately 90 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS510), and the demo movie A start wait flag is set (Step 004SGS511), a timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds is set as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and a guidance display start wait flag is set (Step 004SGS513). , the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is waiting to start, it is determined whether the end condition E2 is satisfied, that is, whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS514). Whether or not the end condition E2 is satisfied is determined by whether or not a starting opening winning designation command reception flag indicating reception of the starting opening winning designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the end condition E2 is satisfied, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), The guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the termination condition E2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied, that is, whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS515). Whether or not the end condition E3 is satisfied is determined based on whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 specified by the frame state display designation command changes from off to on.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the end condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the demo movie start wait timer is set. The value is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration production control process ends. Then, the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, that is, whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether or not the end condition E4 is satisfied is determined based on whether or not menu display control was started in the previous menu display process of step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the end condition E4 is satisfied, the menu displaying flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the demo movie start wait timer is set. The value is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration production control process ends. Then, the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the end condition E4 is not satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether the timer is waiting for the start of the guidance display (step 004SGS524). ). Whether or not the system is waiting to start the guidance display is determined by whether or not the guidance display start waiting flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display start wait time is determined, the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS525), and whether or not the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0 or not, that is, the guidance display It is determined whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the time measurement by the start waiting timer started (step 004SGS526).

If it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0, the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), and the demonstration production control process is started. It ends and returns to the production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that there is no waiting for the guidance display to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is not 0, it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0 or not. It is determined whether a specified time (any one of 60 seconds, 90 seconds, and 120 seconds) has elapsed since the start of time measurement by the demo movie start waiting timer (Step 004SGS529).

If it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie execution flag is set (step 004SGS531), A timer value (27500) corresponding to approximately 55 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie timer for measuring the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), and the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533). The demonstration performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is being executed, it is determined whether any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, that is, the occurrence of a starting prize, the turning on of touch ring 004SG035, or the start of menu display. is identified (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS535), and the timer value of the demo movie timer is checked to see if it is 0 or not. It is determined whether 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of time measurement by the demo movie timer (Step 004SGS536).

If it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS538), and the demo movie A timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds is set as the timer value of the start waiting timer (step 004SGS539), a guidance display is started (step 004SGS540), the demonstration production control process is ended, and the process returns to the production control main process. do.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), and the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542). , the demo movie display is ended (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether the end condition E3 is satisfied, that is, whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, that is, whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that the termination condition E4 is not satisfied, that is, if the termination condition E2 is satisfied, the demonstration production control process is ended and the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the end condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that the end condition E4 is satisfied, the menu displaying flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS546).

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, if the menu display ends due to the start winning, the menu displaying flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demonstration production control process is ended, and production control is performed. Return to main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether the menu display has ended (step 004SGS548). Whether or not the menu display has ended is determined based on whether or not the menu display control has ended in the previous menu display process of step S80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not ended, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has ended, the menu displaying flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), and a timer value (60000) corresponding to approximately 120 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer. (Step 004SGS506), sets a demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), sets a timer value (15000) equivalent to about 30 seconds as the value of the guide display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and waits for the guide display to start. A flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that touch ring 004SG035 is on, it is determined whether end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, whether a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that the end condition 2 is satisfied, the demonstration performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether termination condition 4 is satisfied, that is, whether menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not satisfied, it is determined whether touch ring 004SG035 is off (step 004SGS552). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 changes from on to off in response to the frame state display designation command.

If it is determined that the touch ring 004SG035 is off at step 004SGS552, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), and a timer value (60000) corresponding to approximately 120 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer. (Step 004SGS506), sets the demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), sets a timer value (15000) corresponding to about 30 seconds as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and starts the guidance display. A wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is satisfied, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

(Type of production mode)
Next, the types of production modes will be explained based on FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing (A1) and (A2) the first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) the second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) the third performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular figures when viewed from the front. A numeric display section 004SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the pedestal section and the front of the numeric pedestal section, and 10 types corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the numeric display section 004SG051. character display section 004SG052 on which characters (all characters are omitted) are displayed, an information pedestal section having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and information regarding the characters displayed on the front of the information pedestal section (for example, in this embodiment). In the form of , an information display section 004SG053 consisting of the character's name), a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 004SG054 displayed so as to surround these number display section 004SG051, character display section 004SG052, and information display section 004SG053; It consists of

In this embodiment, the name of the character displayed in the character display section 004SG052 is displayed on the information display section 004SG053, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in section 004SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items owned by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21(B1) and (C1), when the gaming state is the high base state, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are as follows: It is composed of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 004SG064 displayed so as to surround the number display section 004SG061. The decorative pattern for the high base state is not provided with a character display section and an information display section like the decorative pattern for the low base state.

Further, in a display area 5S provided at the upper left of the image display device 5, the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern are displayed. The small symbols are composed of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily have to correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern correspond to the numbers of the small pattern. It may be a number from 1 to 5, which is smaller than the numbers from 0 to 9, or it may be a symbol or figure different from the numbers of the decorative design.

As shown in FIG. 21, the performance control CPU 120 has a first performance mode (see FIGS. 21(A1) and (A2)), a second performance mode (see FIGS. 21(B1) and (B2)), and a second performance mode (see FIGS. 21(B1) and (B2)) as performance modes. It is possible to execute any of three performance modes (see FIGS. 21 (C1) and (C2)). The first production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability low base state. Further, the second production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability high base state, and the third production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability high base state. This is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), in the first production mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a daytime city scene is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The displayed first background display 004SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R linearly from the top to the bottom. executed.

For example, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line to the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The frame is displayed downward from the bottom edge of the image. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". " is displayed repeatedly. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and small symbols are displayed, and the special symbol provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the pending memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F, a first pending display 004SG101 and a second pending display 004SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, these first pending memory number, second pending memory number, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, so their explanation will be omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 21 (B1), in the second production mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the evening city scenery is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The displayed second background display 004SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. Ru.

For example, the decorative pattern in the second production mode has a first side and a second side that is the opposite side to the first side, and the first side has the preceding decorative pattern (for example, "3"). Decorative designs) are displayed. On the other hand, when the first side faces forward, it is not possible to specify whether a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second side. In other words, since the pedestal display section 004SG064 has low transmittance (opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

In addition, the decorative pattern can be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and by rotating in the order of the first surface, second surface, first surface, second surface, etc. , the number increases in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9" it returns to "0" and the updated display from "0" to "9" is displayed. It is done repeatedly. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the rotating display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations. At the lower left corner, a time saving remaining display 004SG202 indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control will be executed (in this example, characters "XX times remaining", XX=0 to 100) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 21 (C1), in the third production mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a night city scene is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The third background display 004SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (C2), the variable display of decorative symbols is achieved by a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom. A variable display is executed.

For example, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line to the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The frame is displayed downward from the bottom edge of the image. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly increased. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations.

Further, the decorative pattern and the small pattern have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is displayed in a frame from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is displayed in a frame from the lower side for a predetermined period. It takes a long time. That is, a predetermined period of time is required until one decorative pattern is displayed and the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are displayed by being switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, five times, etc.) in the above-mentioned predetermined period.

In addition, in the scrolling display in the first presentation mode and the third presentation mode, and the rotating display in the second presentation mode, the decorative design changes the variable display speed from low to high speed at the start of the variable display, and when the variable display stops. While the variable display speed can be changed from high speed to low speed, the small symbols are variably displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the form in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the first performance mode, the second performance mode, and the third performance mode as the performance modes is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute four or more types of presentation modes. In particular, a plurality of types of performance modes may be executable in response to one gaming state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state).

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described based on FIGS. 22 to 25. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first production mode. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 22. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third production mode. FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first effect mode and (B) the second and third effect modes.

In addition, in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams with lines other than solid lines (for example, one-dot chain lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are not displayed on the display screen. This is not a representation of the image that was created, but is provided to explain the movement of the image.

(Example of operation of variable display in first production mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first performance mode will be described based on FIGS. 22 and 23.

FIG. 22(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the first performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first pending displays 004SG101 are displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U (first pending memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. At the same time, the active display 004SG103 is erased from the area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, The decorative pattern variation start action is started in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 22(D)). In addition, the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 22(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 22(D)).

Note that the deletion effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 22(B) continues for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), when the shift display for moving the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F is completed, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the action of the decorative symbol (reversal action of the character) is completed and the upward action is started, and when the upward movement is completed, the downward movement is started and the scroll display is displayed as shown in FIG. 22(F). will be started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(F), when the (reversal motion of the character) of the decorative symbol displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R is completed, the upward action is started, and when the upward movement is completed, the As shown in 22(G), downward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(G), the action of the decorative symbol displayed in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C (reversal motion of the character) is completed and the ascending action is started, and when the ascending movement is completed, As shown in FIG. 22(H), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the middle decorative symbol display area starts in this order, but the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, a variable start action in which the character moves in reverse is performed, so the variable display is started. It is possible to make the player aware that the Note that the operation mode of the fluctuation start action can be changed in various ways.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, fade-out display is performed where the transmittance reaches approximately 90%. For example, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 22(G) to 23(K), the decorative symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, A fade-out display is executed in which the speed increases and the transmittance also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of operation of variable display in 3rd production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the third production mode will be described based on FIG. 24.

FIG. 24(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the third production mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first pending displays 004SG101 are displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U (first pending memory number "2"). Further, the small symbols and the right-hit notification image 004SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) than the decorative symbols. (See Figure 24(A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. At the same time, the active display 004SG103 is erased from the area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbol starts; Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 24(A)) is not performed. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 24(C)). In addition, the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 24(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 24(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 24(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, Scroll display of the decorative pattern displayed on 5R is started (see FIG. 24(D)). In the high base state, scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F is completed, the decorative symbol display area 5L, Scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed on 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. Proportionally, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and as the speed increases, fade-out display is executed where the transmittance reaches approximately 90%. For example, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display starts, as shown in FIGS. , the speed becomes high as shown in FIG. 24(H). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the transmittance of the decorative pattern is set to the first value (0%) when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and when the variable display starts, the transmittance gradually increases and reaches the final value. Although the second value (90%) is exemplified in the high-speed scroll display, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the first value may be the minimum value of the transmittance, as long as the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, when the transmittance is 5%, the decorative pattern is In the case where it is most clearly displayed, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. Further, the second value may be the maximum value of the transmittance and should be a value that makes the decorative pattern almost difficult to see. For example, when the transmittance is 100%, the decorative pattern is almost visible. If there is no such condition, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. That is, the first value and the second value can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs the action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the special symbol pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative symbols is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 004SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type of fluctuation pattern designation command ( For example, when a variable display is executed based on a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command), By being able to perform a common shift display, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, the common shift display is performed, so the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing a pending shift display with the start of variable display, and also displays a special symbol pending memory display. Until the first pending display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in area 5U, is switched and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scrolling display of decorative symbols is not started, while in the high base state , the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative pattern fluctuation start action is not performed while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols when performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs The scroll display of the decorative symbols may not be started until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type When a variable display is executed based on a variation pattern specification command of the second type (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command) Since it is possible to perform a common shift display even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, a common shift display can be performed even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, reducing the number of shift display patterns. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the decorative symbol display areas are moved in the order of left, right, and center. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display starts with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. After the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the display to the active display is completed, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the left, right, and center decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts. If the shift display is performed, the scroll display of any of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be started.

(Operation mode of each part at the start of variable display)
As shown in FIG. 25(A), in the first production mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is Along with the start, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the fluctuation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, scrolling display starts. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the speed is gradually decelerated in the order of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when displaying a temporary stop, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, when the variable display ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative symbols ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(B), in the second production mode and the third production mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-3 of shortened non-reach is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is Along with the start, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be rotated or scrolled all at once without performing a variation start action. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all gradually decelerate all at once to a low-speed display, and the transmittance decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) also decreases, causing the image to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. That is, the variable stop action and loop action such as in the first performance mode and the second performance mode are not executed, and the variable display ends as it is, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together with the small symbols. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the rotating display is executed in the second production mode or the scroll display is executed in the third production mode. (Fade-out display period A23<Fade-out display period A21; see FIGS. 25(A) and 25(B)).

In addition, in the first performance mode, the mode shown in FIG. 25(A) will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. In addition, in the second performance mode and the third performance mode, the mode shown in FIG. 25(B) will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

(Example of operation of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach effect will be described based on FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a low base state. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a high base state. In addition, in FIG. 27, an example of the operation of the reach effect in the third effect mode will be explained, but it may be possible to perform the same reach effect in the second effect mode, or it may be possible to perform a different reach effect. .

As shown in FIG. 26(A), when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is started in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 causes multiple characters to appear in stages based on the variable display result. Displays whether or not to execute a step-up effect, and a specific step-up effect display pattern (see FIG. 26(B)) in which the background display becomes a rainbow mode to notify that a jackpot is confirmed at a predetermined step in the step-up effect. Determine whether or not to do so. Then, when it is decided to execute the step-up effect and display the specific step-up effect display pattern, the step-up effect is started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variable display, and the specific step-up effect is started at the predetermined step. The display pattern is displayed (see FIG. 26(B)). In addition, if it is decided not to execute the step-up effect, or if it is decided to execute the step-up effect but the display of a specific step-up effect display pattern is not determined, the step whose background does not include a rainbow display A close-up effect display pattern is displayed.

Next, after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 26(C)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed to notify the reach title, and the notification to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. An SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a performance (see FIG. 26(D)). In the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 which is the normal background display, and represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect (Fig. 26 (E) (F )reference). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image whose appearance differs depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Next, from the time when the battle is settled until the predetermined operational validity period has elapsed, an operation promotion display 004SG071 consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B are displayed. 004SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 26(G)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has passed, the operation promotion display 004SG071 and the button display 004SG072 are hidden and the process ends. . If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color while the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 004SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production sound effect is output to notify that the jackpot game state is being controlled (see FIG. 26(H)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background display. , After the jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 26(I)), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first Background display 004SG081 is displayed, and when the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, a jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, The jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 26(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is negative, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the production position, and the result notification display 004SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 26(K)), in the notification performance, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display, a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232 ") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 26(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 When is displayed, the combination of confirmed symbols that are out of place (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed, then the small symbols and each decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the out-of-order display results are derived and displayed (Fig. 26 ( (See M).

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(A), when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is started in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls whether the specific character appears and It is determined whether or not to display a specific cut-in effect display pattern (see FIG. 27(D)) in which the background display is in a rainbow mode to notify that a jackpot has been confirmed, and the determination result is stored.

Then, after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 27(B)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed to notify the reach title, and the notification to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. An SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a performance (see FIG. 27(C)).

Here, if the display of a specific cut-in effect display pattern is determined at the start of the variable display, after the reach title display 004SG070 is displayed, the cut-in effect is started with the specific cut-in effect display pattern (Fig. 27 (See (D)). In addition, if it is decided not to perform a cut-in effect, or if it is decided to execute a cut-in effect but the display of a specific cut-in effect display pattern is not decided, a cut with a background color other than rainbow will be displayed. The in display is displayed.

Then, in the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 which is the normal background display, and represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect (Figure 27 (E) (See (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image whose appearance differs depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Regarding the flow of FIGS. 27(G) to (M), the only difference is that the third background display 004SG083 for high base is used in FIGS. 27(J) to (M). Since it is almost the same as M), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In the present embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a specific step-up performance in which the background has a rainbow pattern in the low base state (see FIG. 26(B)), as a specific performance to notify the confirmation of a jackpot. In the base state, it is possible to execute a specific cut-in effect including a cut-in in which the background has a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 27(D)). Although the specific step-up effect and the specific cut-in effect have the same rainbow pattern as the background, the display patterns are different, but the lighting patterns of the panel lamps and side lamps are the same. In other words, since the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the board lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), the data capacity for light emission can be reduced.

(Customer waiting demonstration performance [demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be explained based on FIGS. 28 to 34. In FIG. 28, (A) shows the start and end conditions for displaying a demo movie, and (B) shows the configuration of displaying the demo movie. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part during display of a demo movie. FIG. 30 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing display examples of (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) the fourth scene (warning 2). FIG. 34 is a diagram comparing the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols.

The "customer waiting demonstration performance" is for the purpose of the performance control CPU 120 to notify that the game is in a game standby state where no games (for example, variable display, jackpot games, small win games, etc.) are being played, that is, it is in a customer waiting state. This is mainly performed by displaying a demo movie display (see FIGS. 31 and 32) on the image display device 5.

The demo movie display is a display that informs the player that an empty machine is not being played by a player by displaying a demo movie display that is different from the background display during play. The company name scene that lets you know whether the game machine is related to the company, what kind of story the pachinko game machine 1 is about, what kind of characters appear, what kind of production and what kind of specifications are included. It consists of a model introduction scene that tells you whether the pachinko game machine 1 is available, a model introduction scene that shows the title and subtitle of the pachinko game machine 1, and a warning scene that tells you things to be careful about before playing the game. In the demo movie display, in addition to the content described above, for example, in a model introduction scene, an introduction of effects, an explanation of model specifications, etc. may be introduced, and the content can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIGS. 28A to 30, the "customer waiting demonstration performance" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is performed when the performance control CPU 120 meets any of the following starting conditions S1 to S6. It is started based on the determination that it has been established. Specifically, the start condition S1 is established when a first period of time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 upon completion of the variable display, and the start condition S2 is established when a second period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the power-on designation command output from the main board 11 due to power-on with initialization, and the start condition S3 is satisfied. is established when the third time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command output from the main board 11 due to the power being turned on without initialization, and the start condition S4 is satisfied. is established when the fourth time (for example, 120 seconds) has passed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) was turned off, and the start condition S5 is established when the fifth time (for example, 120 seconds) has passed since the menu screen display ended. For example, 120 seconds) has elapsed, and the start condition S6 is established when the sixth time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the demo movie display via the conditions S1 to S5 has ended (2 weeks). From the second step onwards, the same condition as in S6 is established (the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance).

Further, the "demonstration movie display" ends based on the effect control CPU 120 determining that any of the following end conditions E1 to E4 is satisfied. Specifically, the end condition E1 is satisfied when the end time (for example, 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display started, the end condition E2 is satisfied when a starting prize has occurred, and the end condition E3 is satisfied. is satisfied when the touch ring 004SG035 is turned on, and the termination condition E4 is satisfied when the menu screen display start operation is performed.

Furthermore, although the demo movie display is not in progress, when the first to sixth hours are being counted in the waiting state for the above start conditions to be satisfied (demo movie start waiting period), the above end conditions E2 to E4 are met. When the start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are satisfied, the time measurement is stopped, and the time measurement is reset (reset) when the start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are satisfied.

In addition, during the demo movie start waiting period, the demo movie display is not displayed, but menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed on various background displays as guide displays regarding production adjustment. (See FIG. 37 (A4) and FIG. 123).

Note that the guidance display regarding production adjustment is, for example, a menu that allows production function adjustments such as customization and customization reset of various production functions such as the vibration function, V flash function, auto button function, and production mode provided in the push button 31B. In addition to the menu guide display 004SG401 that guides the operation of the push button 31B to display the screen, and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 that guides the button operations to adjust the volume and light intensity, there are also functions for adjusting production functions other than those mentioned above. It may also include a guidance display.

Further, when the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the termination condition E2 is almost never satisfied. In other words, in order for the starting prize to occur, the ball-hitting operation handle 30 must be operated, so basically, the ending condition E3 is satisfied before the ending condition E2, but in the following irregular case, There is a possibility that the termination condition E2 is satisfied without the termination condition E3 being satisfied.

Irregular case 1: The player calls a store clerk based on the occurrence of a grape (so-called ball jammed between nails), but by the time the clerk arrives, a demo movie has started to be displayed, and after that, the grape is released. If a starting prize is generated by this, the demo movie display ends without operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, so the end condition E3 is not satisfied, but the end condition E2 is satisfied.

Irregular case 2: If the ON state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed by the production control CPU 120 due to some kind of malfunction in the CPU 103 or a malfunction in the production control CPU 120, the on-state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed and the prize is won. may occur, so the termination condition E2 is satisfied without the termination condition E3 being satisfied.

Note that the end condition E3, which is satisfied when the touch sensor is on, does not need to be set as the end condition. In such a case, the demo movie display will not end only by operating the steering wheel, and the end condition will be set when the start winning occurs. E2 is established and the demo movie display ends.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the demo movie display consists of four scenes, the first scene to the fourth scene. Specifically, the first scene is a "company name" part (company name part) that displays the name and slogan of the company involved in development, manufacturing, sales, etc. of the company (Figure 31 (A)). See B).

The second scene is composed of "Model Introduction 1" to "Model Introduction 3" parts (Model Introduction 1 to 3 parts) in which the story of the performance performed in the pachinko game machine is introduced. In the "model introduction 1" part (model introduction 1 part), ally characters and names appearing in the production are displayed (see FIGS. 31(C) to (F)). In the "Model Introduction 2-1" part (Model Introduction 2-1 part), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see Figures 31 (G) and (H)), and "Model Introduction 2 -2" part (model introduction 2-2 part), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see Figures 31 (J) and (K)), and the "model introduction 2-3" part. In (model introduction part 2-3), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see FIGS. 32(M) to 32(O)). "Model introduction 3-1" part (Model introduction 3-1 part), "Model introduction 2-1" part (Model introduction 2-1 part) and "Model introduction 2-2" part (Model introduction 2-2 part) ), a cut-in display of an ally character is displayed without text (see Figure 32 (I)), and in the "Model introduction 3-2" part (Model introduction 3-2 part), "Model introduction 2- 2" (model introduction 2-2 part) part and "model introduction 2-3" part (model introduction 2-3 part), the cut-in display of the ally character is displayed without text (Figure 32 ( (See L).

The third scene consists of a "model name main title name" part (main title part) and a "model subtitle name" part (subtitle parts 1 and 2) in which the main title name of the pachinko machine is displayed ( (See FIGS. 32(P) to (V)). In addition, in the "Model main title name" part (main title part), the main title name "FEVER POWERFUL" is displayed, and in the "Model subtitle name" part, the subtitle name "II/All set Ver." is displayed. Is displayed.

The "model main title name" is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in question, which expresses the theme of the machine in one word, and the "model subtitle name" is the subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in question. The information may be supplementary information added to the main title name of the model (for example, "II" indicating that this is the second work of this title, or the heading "All members set Ver."), and the content may vary. Can be changed.

The fourth scene consists of a "Caution 1" part (Caution 1 part) and a "Caution 2" part (Caution 2 part) in which the player is alerted (Figure 32 (W) - (See (X)). In addition, in the "Caution 1" part (Caution 1 part), a warning display is displayed to prevent people from becoming addicted to the game, and in the "Caution 2" part (Caution 2 part), a warning display is displayed to prevent the pachinko machine from becoming addicted to the game. A warning message is displayed to prevent physical accidents.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the demo movie display, after the start condition is satisfied, various demo images are displayed in the order of the first scene, second scene, third scene, and fourth scene. The display period tb2a of the first scene is about 10 seconds (tb2a=10 seconds), the display period tb2b of the second scene is about 30 seconds (tb2b=30 seconds), and the display period tb2c of the third scene is about 10 seconds (tb2c= 10 seconds), the display period tb2d of the fourth scene is about 10 seconds (tb2d=5 seconds), and the display period tb of one demonstration movie display is about 55 seconds (tb2=55 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 30, if the first demo movie display ends without the end conditions E2 to E4 being satisfied during the display of the demo movie display, that is, if any of the start conditions S1 to S5 are satisfied. When the first demonstration movie display that has been started ends under the termination condition E1, the process shifts to a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

During the period when the demo movie display is displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, and the display of the number of reserved memories and the small symbols is maintained (Fig. 31, (See Figure 32). In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and small symbols are displayed while the demo movie is being displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The numbers and small designs may be hidden.

In addition, during the period when the demo movie display is displayed on the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps (attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and the frame lamp (main lamp 9a). and side lamps 9b), the light emission is controlled based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration described later), while button lamp 9e is lit in white, which does not correspond to the demonstration movie display. Light emission control is performed based on a default brightness data table (lamp data table to be described later: button lights up white). Further, although BGM is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R, music for displaying a demo movie may be output.

The brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table to be described later: customer waiting demo) is composed of a plurality of brightness data tables (grandchild tables to be described later).

Specifically, as a brightness data table (grandchild table described later) of the main lamp 9a that constitutes a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo), a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part is used. , brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 1 part to model introduction 2-3 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of main title part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, period of subtitle part 2 and a brightness data table corresponding to the period from attention-calling part 1 to attention-calling part 2, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table in each period.

In addition, it can also be used as a brightness data table (grandchild table described later) of the side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f that constitute the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo). , a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 3-1 part. Corresponding brightness data table, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-2 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 3-2 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-3 part , a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 2, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of alerting part 1 to alerting part 2. A luminance data table is provided, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding luminance data table in each period.

Note that control using the brightness data table during the period when the demo movie is displayed will be described in detail later.

(Example of operation of demo movie display)
Next, an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie will be described based on FIGS. 31, 32, and 119 to 121. In addition, in FIG. 119, (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing operation examples of character display and light emission mode in each scene. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an operation example in which (A) is the first scene, (B) is the third scene, and (C) is the fourth scene. FIG. 121 is a comparison table showing character animation display.

In addition, an example of the expression showing the display mode used in the following explanation will be explained.
"Fade-out display" is a display that increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes, whereas "fade-in display" increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes. This is a display that decreases the transparency (transparency).

"Animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (video display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the previous image. , the visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the previous image. In other words, "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarging display", "reducing display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also " It also includes displays such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display" that do not involve displacement of the image but change the display mode such as color tone. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Static display" is the opposite of animation display, and is a non-dynamic display (still image) that does not change the display mode at all by not changing the visibility of the image compared to the image one frame before. display).

In addition, an example of expressions indicating a light emission mode used in the following description will be explained.
"Wave lighting" is a light emission pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of brightness data, and there is less change in brightness between each data than the following flashes, for example, the brightness of a lamp increases at a predetermined period, This is a pattern in which the color changes at a predetermined period or in which a predetermined color emits light moving within a light emitting area. It is also used when simply keeping the lamp on is not enough as a performance element, or when it is desired to emphasize the image display device 5 etc. rather than the lamp, as in the case of the flash below, to prevent the lamp from being too conspicuous.

“Flash” is a light emission pattern that alternately uses brightness data with high brightness and brightness data with low brightness (including turning off). Depending on the strength of the light, the brightness that the player sees can be greatly changed, and this is a light emitting pattern used for emphasis.

"Rainbow" is a pattern commonly used when the display of FIG. 26(B) is executed in the low base state and when the effect of FIG. 27(D) is executed in the high base state. In this example, a rainbow wave pattern is created in which the brightness data of seven colors is sequentially changed to light up in waves. A rainbow flash pattern may be used by alternating the brightness data.

As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, when the demo movie display start condition is satisfied, the first scene starts to be displayed. Note that, as will be described later, depending on the start conditions, a switching display may be displayed before the first scene starts to be displayed. In the first scene, a company name background display 004SG301 consisting of white characters is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting of a blue corporate slogan display 004SG302A and a corporate logo display 004SG302B is displayed with a "small" in the center of the screen. After being displayed in the same size, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed moving from the back of the display screen to the front by gradually increasing the size and decreasing the transmittance (transparency). can be shown. Incidentally, the number of pending memories and the small symbols remain displayed in the display area 5S at the upper left of the display screen. In this way, by displaying the small symbols even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the player can be made aware that the variable display is in a stopped state.

In addition, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are set in a lighting mode (for example, lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302. (color, brightness, etc.) changes. For example, as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases, the brightness of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) may increase or the color may change.

To explain in detail using FIG. 120(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in the "small" size at the center of the screen, and then the transmittance (transparency) is decreased while gradually enlarging it for about 3 seconds. When the company name display 004SG302 collides with a wall and is bounced back, a bounce display is displayed. (See Figure 120 (A2)). Then, after being statically displayed at a specified position in the center of the screen for about 4 seconds (see FIG. 120 (A3)), it is faded out for 1 second (see FIG. 120 (A4)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then turn on in white. In this way, by flashing white at the start of displaying the demo movie, it is emphasized that the display of company name display 004SG302 has started. Then, as the company name display 004SG302 expands and fades in, the brightness increases (white fade-in lighting), and after a white flash in conjunction with the bound display of the company name display 004SG302, it lights up in white. The brightness decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out lights).

Next, when the display of the "Model Introduction 1" part of the second scene starts, the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D appearing in various productions and the character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D showing the names of each character are displayed in sequence ( At the same time, effect display 004SG502 is displayed in the background (see FIGS. 31(C) to 31(F)). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 119 (A2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up in the color corresponding to the character in accordance with the appearance of each character and the fade-in display of the name, and then turn on white. do.

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model Introduction 2-1" begins, the enemy character 004SG510A that appears in various productions is displayed as an animation, and the text "Enemies are rampaging in the city!" Display 004SG511A is displayed in a fade-in manner (animation display) (see FIGS. 31(G) and (H)). Next, when the display of the "Model Introduction 3-1" part starts, the background display 004SG503 showing the city and the ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display showing the situation where the ally character is flying and rushing through the city is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 31(I)).

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model introduction 2-2" starts again, the friendly character 004SG500A, the enemy character 004SG510A, and the character display 004SG511B "Protect the city from the enemy!" fade in (animation display) ) (see FIGS. 31(J) and (K)). After that, when the display of "Model Introduction 3-2" starts, the ally character 004SG500A is enlarged and a cut-in display is displayed in which the effect display 004SG504 is displayed in the background (see Figure 31 (L)). .

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model introduction 2-3" part starts again, the image of the friendly character 004SG500A and the enemy character 004SG510A fighting and the text display "Don't lose!" 004SG511C fade in. (animation display) (see FIGS. 32(M) to (N)). After that, all of the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the character display 004SG511D saying "All gather!" are faded in (animated) (see FIG. 32(O)).

In addition, the animation display of the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene is an animation display with movements such as enlargement, contraction, and fighting of the ally characters, whereas various character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D , 004SG511A to 004SG511D, for example, are displayed in a fade-in manner at the start of display, and are displayed as animations that have a lower degree of change in visibility than animation displays that involve movement such as the friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (A2), in the second scene, "Model introduction 3-1" and "Model introduction 3-2" are displayed on the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). Sometimes there is a green flash, but basically it is a white wave light, and the light emission mode (for example, lighting, blinking, (lights out, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or not) change, and basically, the lights emit light in conjunction with dynamic animation displays such as the running, jumping, and punching of friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy characters 004SG510A. The appearance (for example, lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes.

Specifically, for example, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) may light up or blink (flash) in accordance with the movements of the friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D or the enemy character 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, or punching. The color may change.

Note that in the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be off, but the light emitting mode of the main lamp 9a may also be changed in the same way as the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e). good.

Next, when the display of the third scene starts, the effect display 004SG505 is displayed in the background, and the model main title name display 004SG520A, which consists of the words "FEVER POWERFUL" and a cloud-shaped background, is displayed at the center of the display screen. After being displayed in "small" size at (default display position), the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed by gradually expanding and fading in (animation display) while decreasing the transmittance (transparency). It can be made to appear as if the screen is being displayed moving from the back side to the front side (see FIGS. 32(P) to 32(R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B consisting of the characters "II" is displayed in "extra large" size on the right side (default display position) of the model main title name display 004SG520A, and then the transmittance (transparency) is adjusted while being slightly reduced. It is displayed in a fade-in manner while decreasing the size, and is displayed in a bound manner in a "large" size on the right side (default display position) of "FEVER POWERFUL" (see FIGS. 32(S) to (T)).

Furthermore, the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "All members gathered Ver." is displayed in "extra large" size in the center in front of the model main title display 004SG520A (default display position), and then shrinks slightly and displays "FEVER". 32 (U) to (V)).

Also, in the third scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are basically lit in a rainbow wave, and are linked to the animation display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C and 004SG520C. The light emission mode changes. In particular, in the "Model subtitle name" part, when the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C is moved and displayed and bound to the specified display position, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) flash (blink). .

Using FIG. 120(B), to explain in detail the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "All members gather Ver.", "Extra large" is displayed in the front center (standard display position) of the model main title name display 004SG520A. After being displayed in the size (see Figure 120 (B1)), it shrinks slightly for about 0.5 seconds, moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (default display position), and is displayed in the "Large" size. (See FIG. 120 (B2)) and is statically displayed at the specified display position for 0.5 seconds (See FIG. 120 (B3)). Thereafter, the entire model title display 004SG520, consisting of the model main title display 004SG520A and the model subtitle display 004SG520B, 004SG520C, is gradually enlarged (animated) over approximately 1.5 seconds (Fig. 120 (B4) )reference).

In addition, as shown in Figure 119 (A3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a rainbow direction (rainbow wave lighting) when the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed, and the model subtitle name When display 004SG520B and model subtitle name display 004SG520C are displayed, a white flash is performed in conjunction with the enlargement/reduction (animation) display, and then rainbow lighting (rainbow wave lighting) is performed.

Next, when the display of the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene starts, the dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded in at the center of the screen (animation display ) (see FIG. 32(W)). Next, when the display of the "Caution 2" part is started, the display is switched to the black caution background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed (see FIG. 32(X)).

To explain in detail the display of the "Caution 1" part using FIG. 120(C), when the display of the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene starts, a dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed. At the same time, the anti-immersion display 004SG312 is displayed at the standard display position in the center of the screen, and fade-in display (animation display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (see FIGS. 120 (C1) and (C2)). Next, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is statically displayed for 2 seconds after the transmittance reaches 0% (see FIG. 120 (C3)).

Additionally, as shown in Figure 119 (A4), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are linked to the fade-in display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 in the "Caution 1" and "Caution 2" parts. In the fourth scene, the white wave lighting continues without a white flash.

In addition, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) change their lighting modes (for example, lighting, flashing, turning off, Since the color, brightness, etc.) do not change, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is prevented from being displayed more emphatically than the company name display 004SG302, the model main title name display 004SG520A, and the model subtitle display 004SG520C, 004SG520C. .

(Comparison of display modes of each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 28(B) and with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the display manner of each scene on the image display device 5 during display of the demo movie will be compared.

<Display mode when character display starts> 1st scene (company name), 2nd scene (model introduction 1, 2), 3rd scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), 4th scene (warning 1) In , various characters are displayed in a fade-in manner (displayed in animation), while in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (attention alert 2), various characters are not displayed in a fade-in manner (displayed in animation).

<Character animation display (degree of change in visibility)> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), animation display is performed when the degree of change in visibility is "large". In the second scene (model introduction 1 and 2), an animation is displayed with the visibility change degree as "medium", and in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (warning 1), the visibility change degree is "medium". While the animation indicating that the degree of gender change is "small" is performed, the character display is not animated in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (warning 2).

<Text size> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name), the text is displayed in "small" size and then enlarged to "large" size, while in the fourth scene In (Caution 1 and 2), characters are displayed at a constant size of "small" or "medium" from the beginning. In addition, in the second scene (model introduction 1 and 2), the text is displayed in "medium" size, and in the third scene (model subtitle name), the subtitle text is displayed in "extra large" size and then reduced to "large" size. and display it.

<Background color> The background color is white in the first scene (company name), the color according to the story in the second scene (model introduction 1 to 3), and the title in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) In the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue and the warning 2 part is black.

Regarding character display, for example, when displaying animation, the degree of emphasis is higher than when displaying no animation (highlighted mode), and when the change in visibility in animation display is large, The degree of emphasis will be higher than when the change in visibility is small (the mode of emphasis), and the degree of emphasis will be higher when there are many colors of text than when there are few colors (the mode of emphasis). ).

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 consisting of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B displayed in the first scene (company name) is performed after the text display is faded in. , the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1) is displayed in a fade-in manner, but the size is enlarged as it is displayed in a bound manner. '', the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 is emphasized more than the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312, that is, the visibility of the character display is changed to a higher degree.

In addition, in the animation display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the text display was faded in to the specified display position. After that, the size increases, decreases, or moves. However, in the animation display of immersion prevention display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1), the character display fades in to the specified display position. The animation display of company name display 004SG302 is emphasized more than the animation display of immersion prevention display 004SG312 because it is only displayed and the size does not change after that without expanding, shrinking or moving. In other words, it is a mode in which the degree of change in the visibility of character display is high.

Here, based on FIGS. 120 and 121, the character animation displays of the first scene (company name), third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and fourth scene (warning 1) will be compared.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is enlarged and faded in at the beginning of the display (see FIG. 120 (A1)), and when displayed at the specified position, it is displayed in a bound manner (see FIG. 120 (see (A2))), and after the specified position is displayed, it is displayed statically (see FIG. 120 (A3)). In the third scene (model main title name), when the display starts, the model main title name display 004SG520A is enlarged and faded in, and then displayed statically when displayed at the specified position (see Figures 32 (P) to (R)). ), after the specified position is displayed, it is enlarged (see FIG. 120 (B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C is enlarged at the start of display and then reduced (see Figures 120 (B1) and (B2)), and is displayed statically when displayed at the specified position (see Figure 120 (B1) and (B2)). 120 (B3)), and after the specified position is displayed, it is enlarged (see FIG. 120 (B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is displayed in a fade-in manner at the start of the display (see Figures 120 (C1) and (C2)), and is displayed statically when the specified position is displayed and after the specified position is displayed. (See FIGS. 120 (C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is such that company name ≧ model title (main, sub) > alert. The alert is only a fade-in display at the start of the display, and there is no animation display when or after the prescribed position is displayed, so the degree of emphasis is low. On the other hand, because the company name is displayed as an animation in two places: when the display starts and when the specified position is displayed, the degree of emphasis is higher than that of the alert. Because animation is displayed in two places, the degree of emphasis is higher than that of a warning.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we highlight each piece of information by displaying it with its own display animation. However, compared to the scene in Alert 1, by emphasizing the animation display of the company name and model title display scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, it is possible to attract more suitable customers. Waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the characters of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C are faded in and displayed at the specified display position, and then the size is enlarged or reduced. In contrast, in the fourth scene (warning 1), after the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded in to the specified display position, an animation display that enlarges, reduces, and moves the size is displayed. Display without.

In this way, by adding a lingering movement to the display of the model title name, it gives a sense of attention to the title, and by avoiding the lingering movement to call attention, the characters can be read clearly. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(Comparison of company name and warning display format)
Here, based on FIGS. 33 and 34, the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols will be compared.

As shown in FIG. 33(A), in the first scene (company name), a company name background display 004SG301 is displayed, and a company name display consisting of a company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in the center of the screen. 004SG302 is displayed. In addition, the number of pending memories and small symbols are displayed in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), in the fourth scene (warning 1), the caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is animatedly displayed at the center of the screen. The addictive prevention display 004SG312 is composed of a heading display 004SG313 consisting of the words "Pachinko and Pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation." and a heading frame display 004SG314 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, which is the background of the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG321 is switched and displayed, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 is composed of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A includes an illustration display 004SG323A showing a situation in which a player hits his or her head on the protruding part of the upper part of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the words "Be careful over your head", and a heading display "The upper part protrudes". Caution details display 004SG325A consists of the words "Please be careful not to hit your head.", caution mark 004SG326A consists of the words "!" inside a triangular mark, and an "x" mark. It consists of attention mark display 004SG327A.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B includes an illustration display 004SG323B showing a situation in which a player's fingers are caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the casing, a heading display 004SG324B consisting of the words "Be careful of finger pinching", and a heading display 004SG324B that says "Beware of finger pinching". The warning detail display 004SG325B consists of the words ``It moves. Be careful not to get your hands or fingers caught.'', the caution mark 004SG326B consists of the words ``!'' inside a triangular mark, and the ``↓'' mark. It consists of attention mark display 004SG327B.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the first scene (company name), the size of the characters of the corporate slogan display 004SG302A is "medium" and the color is chromatic (blue), and the size of the characters of the corporate logo display 004SG302B is "Large", the color is chromatic (blue), and the company name background display 004SG301 is achromatic (white).

In the fourth scene (warning 1), the text of the heading display 004SG313 is set to "medium" in size and the color is achromatic (white), and the color of the heading frame display 004SG314 is set to a chromatic color (dark blue), The caution background display 004SG311 is a chromatic color (light blue). Further, the frame line of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

Note that the background of the character display of the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the caution background display 004SG311 that covers the entire area of the display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314 that is provided in a part of the display screen.

In the fourth scene (warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A has a size of "large" and a color achromatic (white), and the text of the heading display 004SG324A has a size "medium" and a color achromatic (white). ), and the characters of the caution detail display 004SG325A are "small" in size and achromatic (white), and the caution mark 004SG326A is "medium" in size and chromatic (yellow), and the caution mark is "small" in size and achromatic (yellow). The mark display 004SG327A has a size of "small" and a chromatic color (red), and the caution background display 004SG321 has an achromatic color (black).

Note that the "caution marks 004SG326A, 004SG326B" are marks that help the headline letters that call attention to the players stand out, and the "caution mark displays 004SG327A, 004SG327B" indicate areas that the players should pay attention to. These are marks that assist illustrations, and unlike text, they are displayed as a single mark, so they are preferably chromatic so that they stand out more than the achromatic heading text.

Regarding the number of retained memories and small designs, the size is "small" and the color is achromatic (black).

As shown in FIGS. 33(A) and 34, when comparing the display modes of the company name display 004SG302 and the number of reserved memories and small designs in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B are , the font size is larger, the number of displayed colors used is larger, and the saturation and brightness of the tone are higher than the number of retained memories and small designs, so corporate slogan display 004SG302A and corporate logo display 004SG302B are It can be displayed more emphatically than the number of reserved memories and small symbols.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and the small design are achromatic (black), but they may be chromatic, and even in such a case, the corporate slogan display 004SG302A or the corporate logo display 004SG302B displays a corporate slogan if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: font size is larger, number of display colors used is larger, and saturation/brightness is higher than the number of reserved memories and small designs. 004SG302A and company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphatically than the number of reserved memories and small designs.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 33(B), (C), and 34, the addictive prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2) are In comparison, the caution background display 004SG311 is colored in a chromatic color (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314, which is the background of the heading display 004SG313, is colored in a chromatic color (dark blue), while the caution background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black). ).

In this way, the background display color of the warning text is different between the first part of the warning and the second part of the warning, which makes it easier to draw attention to different phenomena such as prevention of addiction and prevention of physical accidents. Since it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching from the first alerting part to the second alerting part, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

Next, when comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the addictive prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), The company name background display 004SG301 of the name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the warning background display 004SG311 of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), and the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue). ), the caution background display 004SG321 of the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

In this way, the background display color of the text display is different between the first scene (company name) and the different fourth scene (alert 1, alert 2), so the display of the company name and the alert are different. By making the background color different, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the background display colors of the character displays of the company name background display 004SG301, the caution background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the caution background display 004SG321 are all different. The invention is not limited to this, but the background display color of at least one character display among the caution background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the caution background display 004SG321 is the same as the character display color of the company name background display 004SG301. It only needs to be different from the background display color.

(Comparison of lighting modes in each scene)
Next, on the basis of FIG. 28(B) and with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the lighting modes of the lamps in each scene during the display of the demo movie will be compared.

<Interlocking with text animation display> In the first scene (company name), third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and fourth scene (warning 1), the text animation display (fade-in display) While the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) emit light in conjunction, in the second scene (model introductions 1 and 2), they are not linked to the character animation display (fade-in display) (non-linked). , the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are made to emit light in conjunction with the animation display of the character.

<Emphasis level> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set to a high emphasis level. In the second scene (model introductions 1 to 3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are emitted with the emphasis level set to "medium", and in the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) ), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are caused to emit light with the emphasis level being "low".

The "degree of emphasis" is the degree of emphasis in the light emission mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). For example, when there is a flash (blinking), that is, when the interval between the color transitions of the luminance data is short, the degree of emphasis is higher (the mode of emphasis ), when a large number of lamps are lit, the degree of emphasis is higher (the mode of emphasis) is higher than when a small number of lamps are lit, and when there are many lit colors, the emphasis is higher than when fewer lamps are lit. The degree of emphasis is higher (the mode is emphasized), and when the proportion of chromatic colors is higher, the degree of emphasis is higher (the mode is emphasized) when the proportion of chromatic colors is lower than when the proportion of chromatic colors is small. The degree of emphasis is higher when the light is on than when it is not lit (in a rainbow manner), and when the brightness is high, the degree of emphasis is higher than when the brightness is low (the state is emphasized). ).

Specifically, to explain based on FIG. 28(B) and referring to FIG. 119, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the degree of emphasis is The second scene (model introduction 1 to 3) has a green flash but is not linked to the character animation display, so the emphasis level is "medium", and the third scene (model main title name, Model subtitle name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high", and the fourth scene (warning 1 and 2) is not synchronized with character animation display. Since it is not, the emphasis level is "small".

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is higher when the company name is displayed than when calling attention, and when the title name is displayed, the lighting is more emphasized than when the lamp is called for attention. The degree of emphasis is higher than the aspect. Since the company name has more lamp switching in conjunction with the animation display than the model title, the lighting mode for the company name is more emphasized than the lighting mode for the model title. Therefore, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is in the relationship of company name > model title (main, sub) > alert.

In addition, since a plurality of panel lamps and frame lamps are each provided at a plurality of locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis of the light emission of the first lamp consisting of a plurality of lamps and the emission of light emission of a second lamp consisting of a plurality of lamps, Rather than comparing the degree of emphasis of one first lamp and one second lamp, we compare the light emission mode when the entire first lamp is averaged and the light emission mode when the entire second lamp is averaged. All you have to do is compare.

<Rainbow> In the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), in the "model subtitle name" part (for example, Figures 32 (P) to (V)), the board lamp and frame lamp light up in a rainbow manner. let The brightness data table used at this time (grandchild table described later) is the same as the rainbow brightness data table used in the step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) and cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) described above. This is the rainbow brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01) described later).

<Specific light emission> Only in the predetermined frames of the model subtitle name (for example, FIGS. 32 (S) and (U)) in the third scene (title name), the panel lamp and frame lamp emit white flash (specific mode). . The brightness data table used at this time (grandchild table described later) is the brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2, which are different from the brightness data table for main title used in the model main title name, and are the brightness data table for subtitle 2. It is said to be a white flash (specific mode) that emits light in conjunction with character animation display.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), the luminance data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2 -1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts (see Figure 29) are used, and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same table as the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used. The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 29) is used, and the brightness data table for company (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used. The brightness data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2-1, 2- The grandchild table corresponding to parts 2 and 2-3) is linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511A that indicates "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1). It does not include brightness data associated with the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511B "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

In this way, in the demo movie display, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but since we particularly want to convey information about the company name, by using luminance data that is linked to the display animation, it is easy to compare with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, and the brightness for subtitle 2 The luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 parts) (see Figure 29) is different from the data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the brightness data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 parts) that is common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used. A brightness data table for the main title (a grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), a brightness data table for subtitle 1, and a brightness data table for subtitle 2 (see FIG. 29) are used. The grandchild table corresponding to ) is linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts), which includes brightness data, is Luminance data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511A that shows "Rampaging!" and the fade of the character display 004SG511B that says "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2) Does not include brightness data linked to in-display (animation display).

In this way, in the demo movie display, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by text display, but since we especially want to convey information about the model name, by using luminance data linked to the display animation, it is easy to compare with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) (see Figure 29) is based on the caution brightness data table. The degree of emphasis is higher than that of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are controlled using (the grandchild table corresponding to the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts) (see Figure 29). The brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (Fig. 29) is used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), the caution luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the caution 1 and caution 2 parts) is used. This mode has a higher degree of emphasis (emphasis) than the mode of the controlled panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high," and the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle (name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high", whereas in the fourth scene (Caution 1 and 2), white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display. Since this is not the case, the emphasis level is "low".

In this way, there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text display, but we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, by emitting dedicated light for each. Among them, by emphasizing the lighting mode of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be carried out. It can be carried out.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is changed from the caution brightness data table (warning 1, Aspects of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the grandchild table corresponding to the attention calling 2 part, and the brightness data table for the main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), The mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) is for caution. The aspect that is emphasized more than the aspect of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts) is (1). Emphasize the company name and model title by using one of the following modes: (2) lighting in many colors, (3) using a large number of light emitting means, or (4) high brightness. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is the same as the main title brightness data table (main title part). The panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the subtitle 1 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and subtitle 2 parts), subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) ) By emphasizing the company name more than the other aspects, it is possible to emphasize the company name more, and it is possible to clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is related to, and as a result, it is possible to improve customer waiting control. It can be performed.

In addition, during execution of the demo movie display, the production control CPU 120 uses the rainbow luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) to use the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). ), and when a step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) or a cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) is executed, the brightness data table for rainbow (corresponding to step-up effect and cut-in effect) The board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are controlled using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchildren table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) that is used while displaying the demo movie. table) and a rainbow brightness data table (compatible with step-up effects and cut-in effects) used when step-up effects (see Figure 26 (B)) and cut-in effects (see Figure 27 (D)) are executed. is a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed during the game. By using the same brightness data table used for specific performances (for example, step-up performances and cut-in performances), it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control without increasing the capacity.

In addition, the rainbow luminance data table (title part , grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts), and a demo movie execution period (second period) after the end of the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after the end of the game in the high base state (special state). ) used for the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1 and 2 parts) and the step-up effect that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) (see Figure 26 (B)) (specific Brightness data table for rainbow used when a cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) and high base state (special state) table) and are common brightness data tables (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the lighting mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the lighting mode to rainbow can be created in a normal state. By sharing the brightness data table with the brightness data table used for the specific performance and the special performance that can be executed in the special state, the capacity can be avoided and, as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, there is also a step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) (specific effect) that can be performed in a low base state (normal state) and a cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) that can be performed in a high base state (special state). ) is a performance that definitively notifies that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, so it is a brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01 )) is also used for demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the luminance data table for subtitle 1 and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) are based on a plurality of luminance data, and the lighting mode is linked to the animation display of model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C. This is a brightness data table for causing the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) to emit light.

In this way, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in this order, and by displaying the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine is completed, so the board lamp and frame lamp are By lighting up the game machine (excluding the button lamp 9e), the title name of the game machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, a plurality of pieces of brightness data constituting the company name brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) include the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means), the panel lamp, and the side lamp 9b. (first light emitting means) is configured to emit light, and the introductory brightness data table (model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, 3 The plurality of luminance data constituting the grandchild table corresponding to the -2 part is luminance data configured so that the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp emit light, and the main lamp 9a does not emit light.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but in the company name display scene, both the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light emitting means) emit light. In the model introduction scene, the board lamp and side lamp 9b (first light emitting means) emit light, but the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means) does not emit light, so that the company name is relatively visible. The first scene displayed can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In this embodiment, the first light emitting means is the panel lamp and the side lamp 9b, and the second light emitting means is the main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second light emitting means is the main lamp 9a. At least one of the frame lamps may be used as the second light emitting means that does not emit light in the scene, and at least one of the panel lamps may be used as the first light emitting means.

In addition, as a modified example, the performance control CPU 120 uses the introduction 1 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part) corresponding to the model introduction 1 part in the model introduction part of the second scene. The light emitting means (for example, a panel lamp) is controlled, and in the model introduction 2 part, the luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) is used to Control the light emitting means (e.g., panel lamp), and control the second light emitting means (e.g., frame lamp) using the first luminance data table (one's grandchild table) in the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part. You can do it like this.

In this way, while the demo movie is displayed, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by text display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are designed to emit light in a dedicated light emitting mode, and the model In the introduction part 1 and the model introduction part 2, the first light emitting means emits light in a dedicated light emitting mode, but the second light emitting means emits light in a common light emitting mode, so that companies can The name display scene can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the model introduction part 1 of the second scene, the production control CPU 120 also controls the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the model main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part). ), brightness data table for model subtitle (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts), brightness data table for alert 1, brightness data table for alert 2 (grandchild table corresponding to alert 1 and 2 parts), and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a different brightness data table for model introduction 1 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 1 part), and in the model introduction 2 part of the second scene. , the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) may be controlled using the first luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction part 1).

In this way, there are multiple situations in which information is conveyed using text displays, but since we want to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, each of them has a dedicated light emitting light so that it can be easily compared with other text displays. , can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the execution period of the model introduction scene including the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part (30 seconds) > the execution period of the company name display scene (10 seconds), the model introduction scene including the 1st model introduction part and the 2nd model introduction part The execution period is (30 seconds) > the execution period of the warning display scene (5 seconds), and the company name text display and the warning text display are displayed at display timings other than when the demo movie is being displayed. It may be done. In this way, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene, which are displayed only while the demo movie is being displayed, can be emphasized for a longer period of time, thereby providing suitable customer waiting control.

Note that even when the demo movie is not being displayed, it is possible to display a text display of the company name or a text display calling for attention. For example, the text display of the company name and the text display warning may be displayed during the ending period after the end of the jackpot round, or the same display as that displayed during the demo movie display may be displayed. You can. In this case, in order to maintain the tempo of the jackpot and high base state, the display time may be set shorter than during the demonstration movie display.

(Lamp lighting mode corresponding to gaming status)
Next, the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the gaming state will be explained based on FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the gaming state. 36, (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement position of the lamp in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in FIG. 35, the board lamps and frame lamps arranged in the pachinko game machine 1 are controlled to change the state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is performed due to a cold start, and when it is controlled to a low base state. It is designed to emit light in different manners when it is in the high base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie is displayed, and when an error notification described later is being performed.

Specifically, during the initialization notification execution period, an initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e are set to "red". ” flashes.

In the low base state, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "blue" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up as "blue" as the main color. "White" lights up.

In the low-accuracy, high-base state (time-saving state), a time-saving background luminance data table (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "green" as the main color. , the button lamp 9e lights up in white. In addition, in the high-accuracy, high-base state (variable-accuracy state), a brightness data table for a variable-variable background (lamp data table: background variable) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b are waveformed with "purple" as the main color. The button lamp 9e lights up in white. Note that hereinafter, the time-saving background brightness data table and the variable probability background brightness data table may be collectively referred to as a high-base background brightness data table (or high-B background brightness data table).

During the execution period of the demonstration performance (demonstration movie display), a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) is used, and the main color of the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b is "white". The light emission mode changes, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white" color.

During the error notification execution period, an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b are set to "colors according to the state (low base state, high base state, demonstration effect)". On the other hand, the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the button lamp 9e lights in white.

Note that the "main color" is a color that forms the basic tone of the overall color in each period, and for example, it may be the color that has the highest luminous time and the highest occupancy rate of the luminous area (number of lamps) in each period, It may be possible to emit light in a color other than the above-mentioned colors. Further, a predetermined hue may include a plurality of colors having different luminance, lightness, saturation, etc. When the main color is "blue", it is sufficient if it is a similar color of "blue".

For example, similar colors will be explained based on FIG. 122. Colors have three attributes: hue (tint), value (brightness, brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness, lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

An example of the above "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in FIG. 122(A). To explain based on (B), in a hue circle of a predetermined number (24 colors here), the three primary colors of light are red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F]. When arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees, each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within a range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if red (R) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side and 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to red (R), When green (G) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the reddish-purple (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to green (G), and blue When (B) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the reddish-purple (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), the board lamps include an attacker lamp 9c built in the special variable winning ball device 7 provided at the bottom right of the game board 2, and a movable body provided at the top of the image display device 5. 32, and a decorative lamp 9f built into a decorative body provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Incidentally, as long as the lamps are provided on the game board 2, lamps other than those described above may be included (for example, lamps built into the prize-winning device, etc.).

Further, the frame lamps include a main lamp 9a provided on the upper part of the gaming machine frame 3, side lamps 9b provided on the left and right sides, and a button lamp 9e provided on the push button 31B. Note that lamps other than those described above may be included as long as they are provided in the gaming machine frame 3 (for example, lamps built into the ball-hitting operation handle 30 or the speakers 8L, 8R).

Furthermore, the attacker lamp 9c of the board lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the movable lamp 9d is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the main lamp 9a is composed of a plurality of LEDs, The side lamp 9b is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is composed of a plurality of LEDs.

Further, FIG. 36(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in FIG. 36(A), and in the following description, for convenience of explanation, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 36(B) will be used. It can be expressed.

(Start of customer waiting demonstration performance, fluctuation stop ver.)
Next, the flow from when the variable display is stopped until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started will be explained based on FIGS. 37 to 42 and FIG. 123. In FIG. 37, (A1) to (A8) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state is finished. In FIG. 38, (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing main parts of FIG. 37. FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in the low base state. FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. In FIG. 41, (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance in the high base state. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is started by a cold start (power-on with initialization). FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is activated by cold start. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started (power-on without initialization) in a low base state. FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a low base state. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state. FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started when the gaming state is the low base state will be explained based on FIGS. 37 to 40.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 39, in the low base state, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, although not particularly shown, if execution of a preview effect or reach effect has been decided, these effects is executed (see FIG. 37(A1)). During variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden.

In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table. . Further, normal background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when a preview effect or reach effect is executed, a brightness data table for the preview effect or reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the advance notice effect or reach effect) is set, and the light emission control and the mode corresponding to the effect are set. BGM is output.

Next, when the variable display ends and the winning confirmed symbol combination (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), it is determined that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent from the CPU 103. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 starts counting (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins. Note that although the output of BGM is stopped, it may be faded out when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A3)). , when the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 37 (A5) to (A8)). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on this, control of the light emitting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

In starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decoration designs) that are displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demonstration performance. Before switching from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) It is designed to control light emission.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), a combination of determined symbols (decoration patterns) that are out of place is displayed on the display screen in the background of the first background display 004SG081. Displayed as stopped. Further, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal).

Next, when the demo production start condition S1 is satisfied, before switching from the first background display 004SG081 to the demo movie display, the fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place is started. , the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decoration patterns) that are out of place gradually increases, and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data 38 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place approaches 100% and the display screen becomes white-out (see FIG. 38 (A42)), the demo movie display starts. (See Figure 38 (A5)).

In this way, the production control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display stops displaying), and A demo movie display is displayed during a second customer waiting period (second period) after the period ends. Then, before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demonstration performance, the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: background normal) is changed to the one for the customer waiting demonstration. Switch to the brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the demo movie display starts, the change will be better than if everything were to be started all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demonstration movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to designate a demo movie display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extended command: BF01, Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). On the other hand, after a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 controls the first background displayed on the display screen. The display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are switched to a demo movie display for demonstration performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39, when a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the start condition S1 of the demonstration effect is satisfied, the first background display 004SG081 and the fade-out display of the decorative pattern ( After the display screen becomes white-out, display of company name display 004SG302 is started. That is, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). ) to start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e), while changing the display content from the normal background display to a demo movie display including a fade-out display (switch display) of the normal background display. Switching control is started, but display of a fade-out display (switched display) as a demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demonstration start condition S1 was satisfied.

Therefore, the demonstration movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 of the demo movie display (See FIG. 37 (A5)) starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so it appears that the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed on the board before they are switched to the demo movie display. Light emission control of the lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the customer waiting demonstration will begin.

In this way, the light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first without the switching display using the fade-out display as described above, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player. This can be prevented (see FIG. 38 (A31), (A32), and FIG. 39).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of displaying the demo movie is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. be. In addition, although a fade display was performed as a switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or even if the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern display are maintained without performing a fade display etc. good.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 39, if 55 seconds elapse after the demonstration movie display starts without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, the first The demo movie display ends. Then, on the display screen, the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place are displayed, as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and the second first customer A waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) starts (see FIG. 37 (A4)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background, and then to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). Light emission control is performed based on the button lamp 9e, and light emission control of the button lamp 9e is performed based on a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) continues until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied. The second customer waiting period (demo movie period) is repeated from the second time onwards. In addition, from the second time onwards, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are also displayed. Along with the display, the animation display (frame-in display) of menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 starts, and 30 seconds have passed since the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) started. The demo movie display starts (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) of the first menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. This is a common animation display (see FIG. 37 (A3)).

Furthermore, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in FIG. 38, the performance control CPU 120 displays the Before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns to the demo movie display for demonstration production, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data Table: background normal) and starts controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In addition, the production control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (variable display is stopped), and displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) In the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the customer waiting period, a demo movie display is displayed, and in the first customer waiting period, the panel lamp and The light emission of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is controlled, and the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) are controlled using the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period. At the same time, during the first customer waiting period and the second customer waiting period, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: Light emission control of the button lamp 9e is performed using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) that is different from the one used in the customer waiting demonstration).

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. Therefore, by setting the button lamp 9e in a fixed manner, misunderstandings can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In detail, as mentioned above, when using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), the display mode of the demo movie display Since the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are turned on and blinking in conjunction with each other, for example, when an operation promotion display is displayed that encourages operation of the push button 31B in a production introduction scene, the button If the lamp 9e is turned on, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand and perform a useless operation, so the button lamp 9e is set in a fixed manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to irregular winning or the like in the low base state, the process of starting the demo movie display after the variable display ends is as follows. As shown in FIG. 39, this is the same as the case where variable display of the first special symbol is started in the low base state, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
Next, an example of the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance when the gaming state is the high base state will be explained based on FIGS. 41 and 42.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, although not particularly shown, if the execution of a preview effect or reach effect has been decided, these effects is executed (see FIG. 41 (B1)). During variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden.

In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp have a purple (or green) wave based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background accuracy change (or lamp data table: background time saver)) for constant change (or time saving). Lighting is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit). Further, high B background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when a preview effect or reach effect is executed, a brightness data table for the preview effect or reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the advance notice effect or reach effect) is set, and the light emission control and the mode corresponding to the effect are set. BGM is output.

Next, when the variable display ends and the winning confirmed symbol combination (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 41 (B2)), it is determined that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent from the CPU 103. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 starts counting (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins. Note that although the output of BGM is stopped, it may be faded out when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B3)). , when the animation is displayed by moving toward the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 41 (B5) to (B8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp are switched from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table, and the customer waiting demonstration brightness data Control of the light emission mode based on white is started based on the table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e lights up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) continues.

To start displaying the demo movie in this way, the performance control CPU 120 demos the combination of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) displayed on the display screen and the determined symbol (decorative symbol) of the loss. Before switching to the demonstration movie display for production, change from the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: waiting for customer). demo) to control the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

Specifically, during the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), the determined combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) is stopped and displayed on the display screen in the background of the third background display 004SG083. In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background time saving, or lamp data table: background variable) for fixed variable (or time saving). The wave is lit in purple (or green).

Next, when the demo production start condition S1 is satisfied, before switching from the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) to the demo movie display, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the The fade-out display of the confirmed symbol combination (decorative symbol) starts, and the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG084) and the missed confirmed symbol combination (decorative symbol) gradually increases. The brightness data table for background B (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) is switched to the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamp and frame lamp (button 38 (A41) and (A42)). Then, after the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place approaches 100% and the display screen becomes white-out, the demo movie display starts. (See Figure 41 (B5)).

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display stops displaying). is displayed, and a demo movie display is displayed in a second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. Then, before switching the third background display 004SG0833 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for demonstration production, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table : Switch from the background change (or lamp data table: background time saving) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do.

Therefore, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the demo movie display starts, the change will be better than if everything were to be started all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demo movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to designate a demo movie display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extended command: BF01, Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 displays the third background displayed on the display screen. Display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are switched to a demo movie display for demonstration performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, a fade-out display (switching display) of the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern is started, and after the display screen becomes white-out, the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. In other words, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 selects the brightness for the customer waiting demonstration from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). Switch to the data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while fading out the display contents from the high base background display to the high base background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie is started for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds after the demonstration start condition S1 is satisfied). ) has elapsed before starting.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 of the demo movie display (See FIG. 41 (B5)) starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so it looks like the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern are demo. Before switching to the movie display, light emission control for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the customer waiting demonstration is started.

In this way, the light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first without the switching display using the fade-out display as described above, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player. This can be prevented (see FIG. 38 (A31), (A32), and FIG. 42).

Note that in this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be 0.3 seconds or more and can be changed in various ways. In addition, although a fade display was performed as a switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative The display of the symbol may be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, if 55 seconds elapse after the demonstration movie display starts without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, based on the determination that the end condition E1 of the demo effect is satisfied, The demo movie display ends. Then, on the display screen, a third background display 004SG083 (or a second background display 004SG082) and a combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place are displayed, as well as a menu guide display 004SG401 and a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. Then, the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) starts (see FIG. 37 (A4)). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp are changed from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) The light emission control is performed based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)), and the button lamp 9e is switched to the default brightness data table (lamp data table: Light emission control is performed based on the button (white lit).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) continues until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied. The second customer waiting period (demo movie period) is repeated from the second time onwards. In addition, from the second time onwards, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and Along with displaying the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 starts, and the first customer waiting period (demo The demo movie display starts when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movie start waiting period (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) of the first menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. This is a common animation display (see FIG. 41 (B3)).

Furthermore, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 ( Or, before switching the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern to the demo movie display for demonstration production, wait for customers from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) Switch to the demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In addition, the production control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) in the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display stops displaying). In the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends, a demo movie display is displayed, and in the first customer waiting period, a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: The luminance control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is performed using the background change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table) is used during the second customer waiting period. :Customer waiting demonstration) is used to control the light emission of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), which is the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) ) is used to control the light emission of the button lamp 9e.

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. Therefore, by setting the button lamp 9e in a fixed manner, misunderstandings can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Furthermore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant manner in both the low base state and the high base state, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in both the low base state and the high base state. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, the production control CPU 120 uses the board lamp and frame lamp (button In the first scene (for example, the first scene (company name), etc.) during the second customer waiting period, the corporate brightness data table (corresponding to the company name part) corresponding to the first scene is controlled. In the second scene (for example, the second scene (model introduction 1 to 3), etc.) during the second customer waiting period, The board lamp and frame are created using the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 corresponding to the scene (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2 parts). The lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are controlled, and in the first scene during the second customer waiting period, the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 (model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2 parts) using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) that is different from The button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) in the second scene during the second customer waiting period.

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. By setting this, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, the first default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is brightness data for a promotion effect used when a promotion effect (see FIG. 26(G)) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B is executed. This is a different brightness data table from the table (lamp data table: button flashes white, lamp data table: button flashes red), and the brightness data that makes up the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights white) is more effective. There are fewer changes in brightness than the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table (lamp data table: button flashes white, lamp data table: button flashes red).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the push button 31B operation is being prompted. , it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, the default brightness data table may be made up of brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e, and by doing so, the player is informed that the push button 31B is being prompted to operate. Misunderstandings can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, although the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided in the gaming machine frame 3, it is not managed using the same brightness data table as the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3. By using separate management, it is possible to appropriately design a system to prevent players from misunderstanding that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the production control CPU 120 displays a menu guide display 004SG401 regarding production adjustment and a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display). is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the production control CPU 120 displays a menu guide display 004SG401 regarding production adjustment and a volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 (guidance display). is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (see FIG. 41 (B2)), and then , display a demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, in both the low base state and high base state, the guidance display is not displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, thereby preventing unnecessary adjustments to the performance, and allowing the demo movie to be displayed once. After the display ends, there is a possibility that the player is away from their seat, so by prompting the player to adjust the performance immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to create a suitable gaming environment. It is possible to encourage players to play games, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, when variable display of the first special symbol is started due to irregular winning or the like in the high base state, the flow of starting the demo movie display after the variable display ends is as follows. As shown in FIG. 42, this is the same as the case where variable display of the second special symbol is started in the high base state, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, in the low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to irregular winnings, etc., the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance regarding performance adjustment. 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) are not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then the demo movie is displayed. Display. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to irregular winnings, etc., the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and volume/light intensity guidance display. 41 (B2 ), then display the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol in either the low base state or the high base state, even after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, immediately after the end of the variable display, By not displaying a guidance display, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and since there is a possibility that the player may have left his/her seat once the demo movie display has finished, By prompting the performance adjustment immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

<Cold start>
Next, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start (power-on with initialization) will be described based on FIGS. 44 and 45.

As shown in FIGS. 44(C1) and 45, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 is started on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the startup timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power-on designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the first game state background designation command is received, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initializing display 004SG610 starts in place of the startup preparation display 004SG600 (FIG. 44 (C2)), and a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start blinking in red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the output of the initialization notification sound is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. . Further, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (60 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, when 10 seconds have passed since receiving the power-on designation command and the first gaming state background designation command, the initialization process ends, the initialization display 004SG610 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 changes. Display starts (see FIG. 44 (C3)). At this time, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden. In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e starts lighting in a blue wave based on the default brightness data table (background normal). White lighting starts based on the lamp data table (button white lighting). Furthermore, the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 44 (C4) When the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 44 (C5)).

If another 30 seconds have passed since then, and 60 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S2 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 44 (C6) to (C9)). In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), control of the light emitting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the brightness data table for default.

Incidentally, since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the low base state shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (low base state)>
Next, an example of the operation will be explained based on FIGS. 46 and 47 when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started (power-on without initialization) in a low base state. do.

As shown in FIGS. 46(D1) and 47, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the low base state, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 is started on the image display device 5 from the startup timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the startup timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the first game state background designation command is received, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). The button lamp 9e starts lighting up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. Further, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (90 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 At the same time, a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 46 (D3)). When the animation is displayed by moving toward the right side to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 46 (D4)).

If another 60 seconds have passed since then, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 46 (D5) to (D8)). In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table). Control of the light emitting mode based on white is started based on the data table (customer waiting demonstration), and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

Note that since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the low base state shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (high base state)>
Next, an example of the operation will be explained based on FIGS. 48 and 49 when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started (power-on without initialization) in the low base state. do.

As shown in FIGS. 48(E1) and 49, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the high base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the start-up preparation display 004SG600 from the start-up timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the startup timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the second and third game state background designation commands are received, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are set to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: Purple (or green) wave lighting starts based on the button lamp 9e's default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the button lamp 9e starts lighting in white based on the button white lighting, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (90 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the second and third gaming state background designation commands from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 is finished, and the third background The display of the display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is started (see FIG. 48 (E2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 48 (E3)). When the animation is displayed after moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (E4)).

If another 60 seconds have passed since then, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 48 (E5) to (E8)). In addition, panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can be changed from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), control of the light emitting mode based on white is started based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is set to the default brightness data. White lighting continues based on the table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

Note that since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the high base state shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a hot start is made thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and a volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and instead of displaying the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). ) (see FIG. 46 (D2) and FIG. 48 (E2)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) start displaying, and the corresponding The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a cold start is performed thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and a volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display ) is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 44 (C3)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

In this way, the start-up situation before a game store opens can be either a hot start (power-on without initialization) or a cold start (power-on with initialization). However, the game store clerk can check the display by checking the background display after turning on the power, checking the demo movie display, and checking the guide display, increasing the efficiency of checking. Furthermore, if a background display is displayed when a game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be a background display with a guidance display, so the guidance will be clearly provided from the timing of the start of the game to the production adjustment. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment to the players, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, after a hot start or a cold start, after the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed. Although the demo movie display is started after 004SG402 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first background display 004SG081, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) After is displayed, the demo movie display may be started without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, when the power is cut off in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the low base state and the power is turned on afterwards, the performance control CPU 120 displays the menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and the volume - Display the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the light amount guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 44 (C3) and FIG. 46 (D2)), and then, Display the demo movie display. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the high base state and the power is turned on afterwards, the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and volume/light intensity guidance. The display 004SG402 (guidance display) is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (Fig. 48 ( (see D2)), then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, there are two possible start-up situations before a game store opens: a low base state and a high base state. If the background is displayed again after that, there is a high possibility that you have already confirmed the status, so by displaying the guidance display from the timing when the background display starts displaying. , When the background display is displayed when the game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide solid guidance for performance adjustment from the timing of the start of the game, A suitable gaming environment can be provided to the players, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, after the variable display ends, the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and for a predetermined period of time. (for example, 30 seconds), the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed with a specific animation (fade-in display) to display the first background display 004SG081, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display). display 004SG082), then displays a demo movie display, and after the display period of the demo movie display has elapsed, menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed as the first menu guide. The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed by displaying the same animation (frame-in display) as the display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. Display so that it is superimposed on the

In this way, by not immediately displaying the guide display after the variable display ends, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and once the demo movie display ends, the background display changes from the demo movie display. By prompting you to adjust the performance immediately after switching to , you can encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and also when displaying the guidance display immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display. By displaying the guidance using the same animation as when the guidance is displayed later, it is possible to emphasize that the guidance display has been displayed without incurring any cost, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

In this embodiment, a frame-in display is applied as an animation display for the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement direction , moving speed, display position, etc. are not limited to those described above. Further, the animation display may be in other forms such as a fade-in display, a moving display, or an enlarged display.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, 47, 49, and 123, the production control CPU 120 determines whether 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have passed after the variable display ends in the low base state. After the variable display ends in the high base state, the demo movie display is displayed after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) has elapsed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the demo movie in the low base state. Based on the hot start, when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is hot in the high base state. The demo movie is displayed when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) has elapsed since the power failure recovery designation command was received based on the start. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is longer than 90 seconds (third specific periods tc4, tc5).

In this way, after the end of the variable display, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately, the player may not have been replaced and it will be troublesome, so the longer time tc1, tc2 = 120 seconds is However, after a hot start, the game store clerk is present instead of the player, so by setting tc4, tc5 = 90 seconds, which is a shorter time, the game store clerk can check the demo movie display. This can be done quickly, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, 45, and 123, the performance control CPU 120 starts the demonstration when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) has elapsed after the end of the variable display in the low base state. After the movie display is displayed and the variable display ends in the high base state, a demo movie display is displayed when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) has elapsed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 cold starts in the low base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since receiving the power-on designation command based on the startup, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 cold starts in the high base state. The demo movie is displayed when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since the power-on designation command was received based on the startup. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it becomes troublesome. After setting the seconds and cold starting (powering on with initialization), the demo movie display will be displayed immediately, as this is the start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming arcade. By setting tc3 = 60 seconds, which is a short time, the game store staff can quickly check the demo movie display and learn more about the installed machine, which is a good result. Customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 45, 47, 49, and 123, the performance control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started with hot start in the low base state. When 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since then, a demo movie is displayed, and a power outage recovery designation command is received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 started up with hot start in the high base state. When 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since then, a demo movie display is displayed, and after receiving a power-on designation command based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 started up by cold start in the low base state. After 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed, a demo movie is displayed, and 60 seconds have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 started up with a cold start in the high base state. After seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed, a demo movie is displayed. In this case, 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5) is longer than 60 seconds (second specific period tc3).

In this way, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a game machine is introduced into a game store, so the demo movie display is displayed immediately. By doing so, the game store clerk can immediately check the demo movie display and learn more about the installed machine, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, and 45, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) has elapsed after the variable display ends in the low base state. When 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demonstration movie display has finished, the demo movie display is displayed again, and after the variable display has finished in the high base state, 120 seconds (the first specified period) has elapsed. After the period tc2) has elapsed, a demo movie is displayed, and after 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie is displayed again, and pachinko is played in a low base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since the gaming machine 1 received the power-on designation command based on the cold start, the demo movie display is displayed and the demo movie display ends. After that, when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie display is displayed again, and a power-on designation command is received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by cold start in the high base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since then, the demo movie is displayed, and after the demo movie display has ended, when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie is displayed again. indicate. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it becomes troublesome. A cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced at a gaming parlor, so the demonstration movie will be displayed immediately. By setting tc3 = 60 seconds, which is a short time so that it is displayed in , after the end of the variable display in the low base state, after the end of the fluctuation in the high base state, after a cold start, the demo movie display is displayed once, and the period until the demo movie display is displayed again is By making them common, it is possible to stably display the demo movie, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, after being started by hot start, a startup preparation display 004SG600 indicating that the startup is in progress is displayed (see FIG. 46 (D1) and FIG. 48 (E1)), Control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) at the timing related to displaying the display indicating that it is being activated. , the button lamp 9e is controlled using one default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) at a timing related to displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600.

In this way, by emitting light using the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) before the background display is displayed, the panel lamp and frame lamp can be made to be normal at the startup stage. It is possible to confirm whether the light is present, and then seamlessly switch to the lighting mode for waiting for a customer, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance Time elapsed Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends after the elapse of time will be explained based on FIGS. 50 to 52. FIGS. 50A to 50E are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display ends over time in the low base state. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in the low base state. FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends over time when the gaming state is the low base state will be explained based on FIGS. 50 and 51.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, in the low base state, the first demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 is satisfied ends when the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, the demo movie display is started. If it ends based on the fact that 55 seconds have elapsed since then, the process shifts to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(A), when the second part of the last fourth scene of the demo movie display is displayed, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) The button lamp 9e lights up in a white-based luminescence mode based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is lit based on the brightness data table for default (lamp data table: button white lighting). White lighting is performed.

Then, when the end condition E1 of the first demo movie display is satisfied, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal), The panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 50(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E1 was satisfied, the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the second part of the caution alert in the fourth scene gradually changes to black and the black caution alert is displayed. A fade-out display (switching display) that blends with the background display 004SG321 starts (see FIG. 50(C)). Then, after the display screen becomes a black screen and is blacked out, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern start to be displayed, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (Fig. 50 ( (see FIG. 50(E)), when the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 50(E)).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). While starting the light emission control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), it also starts the switching control for switching the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background display including the fade-out display (switch display). , the display of the fade-out display (switched display) as the normal background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 was satisfied (see FIG. 50(C) and FIG. 51). .

Specifically, when the termination condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, which has received the extension command: B10E, sends the extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display. Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed after the light emission mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched, and in particular, the background display starts when the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed. Since the display starts after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have passed, it appears that the board lamp and Light emission control for the normal background of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table) from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). :Background normal) to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the normal background display starts, there is no aftertaste after the end of the demonstration display. This can be prevented and, as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to the customer during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period after the end of the variable display in the low base state. The luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used for control, and during the first waiting period after the second waiting period in the high base state, the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is data table: background normal), and before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) for normal background. Control is performed by switching to the brightness data table, and before switching the display from the demo movie display to the first background display 004SG081, the normal background brightness data table is changed from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). (Lamp data table: background normal) to control.

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the background display starts, there is no aftertaste when the demo movie display ends. It is possible to prevent the situation from getting worse, and furthermore, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the situation based on the light emitting mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the establishment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after switching from the background display to the demo movie display. While the display of 004SG402 is started, if the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 will be displayed when the demo movie display is switched to the background display. will be started.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends over time when the gaming state is the high base state will be described based on FIGS. 50 and 52.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 52, in the high base state, the first demonstration movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 is satisfied ends when the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, the demo movie display is started. If it ends based on the fact that 55 seconds have elapsed since then, the process shifts to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(A), when the second part of the last fourth scene of the demo movie display is displayed, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) The button lamp 9e lights up in a white-based luminescence mode based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is lit based on the brightness data table for default (lamp data table: button white lighting). White lighting is performed.

When the end condition E1 of the first demo movie display is satisfied, the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in purple (or green) waves (see FIG. 50(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was satisfied, and when a predetermined period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was satisfied. Then, a fade-out display (switching display) is started in which the second-part accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene gradually changes to black and is assimilated with the black caution background display 004SG321 (FIG. 50(C) reference). Then, after the display screen becomes a black screen and blacks out, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed from the lower left side of the display screen. When it is displayed in the frame (see Figure 50 (D)), moves to the right to the specified position and is displayed in animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (Figure 50 (E) )reference).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or Lamp data table (background time saving)) to start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while changing display contents from demo movie display to fade-out display (switching display) Switching control to switch to the 3rd background display 004SG083 (or 2nd background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern is started, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the background of the high B music is performed as specified after the completion condition E1 is satisfied. It starts after the period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 50(C) and FIG. 52).

Specifically, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first sends a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern. Output. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern to the production control CPU 120, The production control CPU 120, which has received the extended command B11D (or B121), creates a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern. :Starts light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 transmits tg (tg1=0 3 seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the background display starts after the predetermined period tg has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. The background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative patterns start after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have passed, so visually the demo movie display ends and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background Before switching to the display 004SG082) and the display of decorative symbols, the light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the high B music background is started.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, the performance control CPU 120 displays the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting (demonstration) to the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the high B background display starts, there is no aftertaste after the end of the demonstration display. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to accommodate customers during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period after the end of the variable display in the high base state. The luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used for control, and in the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state ends, the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is controlled. Lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) is used to control the customer waiting time before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Control is performed by switching from the demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)), and from the demo movie display to Before switching the display to 3 background display 004SG083 (or 2nd background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: Control by switching to background change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the background display starts, there is no aftertaste when the demo movie display ends. It is possible to prevent the situation from getting worse, and furthermore, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the situation based on the light emitting mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the establishment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after switching from the background display to the demo movie display. While the display of 004SG402 is started, if the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 will be displayed when the demo movie display is switched to the background display. will be started.

(End of customer waiting demonstration production, starting prize winning Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends when the player starts winning a prize will be explained based on FIGS. 53 to 58. FIGS. 53A to 53E are diagrams showing an example of the operation in the case where the demo movie display ends with the start winning in the low base state. In FIG. 54, (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the display mode in FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize win in the low base state. FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize win in the low base state. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize win in the high base state. FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize win in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with the first winning prize when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 53 to 55.

As shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the low base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met is completed when the end condition E2 is met, that is, the first demo movie that occurs during the demo movie. If it ends based on the occurrence of a starting prize (start of variable display of the first special symbol), the demo movie display ends and variable display of the decorative symbol begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in white light based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first starting prize occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, if the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer The brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: background normal) changes from the standby demo) to the normal background brightness data table, and the blue wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) starts (see FIG. 53(B)). . Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. (See FIGS. 53(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). While starting the light emission control of the panel lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background (variable display) display and the variable display of decorative patterns is started. However, the normal background display and the variable display of decorative symbols start after at least a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied (see FIG. 53(C) and FIG. 55).

More specifically, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative symbols. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative symbols to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that has received the extended command: B10E normally Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 starts displaying the demo movie after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Switch to normal background display and variable display of decorative designs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54(A), when the first start winning occurs and the ending condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the customer waiting demo The brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the blue wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. On the other hand, the demo movie display is maintained until a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E2 is satisfied, and the variable display of the small symbols is started (FIG. 54(B) reference).

Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 is satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative symbols is started, and the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols are displayed in the special symbol retention storage display area 5U. After the first pending display 004SG101 is displayed, a shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F is started (see FIGS. 54(C) and (D)).

In addition, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the same as those displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, as shown in FIGS. 54(C) to 54(E). Until the 1 hold display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F, that is, the shift display of the hold display is completed, it remains temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C without starting scroll display, and each character performs a variable start action. The fluctuation start action includes, for example, a character displayed on the character display section 004SG052 moving in a manner different from the scroll display, such as moving its face or body on the pedestal display section 004SG054 or changing its expression.

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start scrolling display in the order of left, right, and center (see FIG. 52(F)). When scroll display starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of slow, medium, and high speed, and fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. The transmittance gradually increases, and as the speed increases, the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see FIG. 52(G) and FIG. 55). In addition, in the low base state (first performance mode), the mode shown in FIG. 54 will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of the decorative designs are started after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. Visually, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and the scroll display of decorative patterns, the normal background light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. It turns out.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table) from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). :Background normal) to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the first starting condition is quickly established by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). It is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the first starting condition has been met and the demonstration movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 56, in the low base state, the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to irregular winnings, etc., as shown in FIG. 55. Since the flow is the same as that in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the base state, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with the second starting winning when the gaming state is the high base state will be described based on FIG. 57 and with reference to FIGS. 53 and 124.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the high base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied, ends when the end condition E2 is satisfied, that is, the second starting prize that occurred during the demo movie ( If the demo movie display ends based on the occurrence of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white light emission mode based on the white color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, when the second starting prize occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: The brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) changes from the standby demo) to the purple (or green) brightness data table for the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e). Wave lighting starts (see FIG. 53(B). In FIG. 53(B), blue wave lighting). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started. , the variable display of decorative patterns starts (see FIGS. 53(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table (background time saving)) to start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while changing the display contents from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display). The switching control to switch to the display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols is started, but the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative symbols are changed for at least a predetermined period th( from the satisfaction of the termination condition E2). th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 53(C)).

More specifically, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first issues a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Output. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, The production control CPU 120 that received the extended command B11D (or B121) controls the board lamp based on the high B background brightness data table corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern. and starts controlling the light emission of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns, the display control unit 123 transmits the extended command B11D (or B121) for a predetermined period th (th1=0 3 seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124(A), when the second start winning occurs and the ending condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is displayed, the customer waiting demo The brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) The demonstration movie display is maintained until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 is met, and the small Variable display of symbols starts (see FIG. 124(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started, and a special After the second pending display 004SG102 is displayed in the figure pending storage display area 5U, a shift display in which the second pending display 004SG102 is moved to the active display area 5F is started (see FIG. 124(C)).

In addition, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the same as those displayed in the special symbol retention memory display area 5U, as shown in FIGS. 124(C) to 124(D). 2 Hold display 004SG102 moves to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the hold display is completed, it remains temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C and does not start scrolling, but the high base In this state, the fluctuation start action of each character is not executed (see FIG. 25(B)).

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start to be scrolled all at once on the left, right, and center (see FIG. 124(E)). When scroll display starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of slow, medium, and high speed, and fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. The transmittance gradually increases, and as the speed increases, the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see FIGS. 124(F) and 124(G)).

In addition, in the high base state (second performance mode, third performance mode), the mode shown in FIG. 124 will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

Therefore, the scrolling display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative patterns is started for a predetermined period th after the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. has passed, so visually the demo movie display ends and the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e The light emission control for the high B background (excluding the above) will be started.

In other words, if the first start condition is satisfied when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 lowers the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) from the demo movie display. Before switching the display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the base state, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) If the second start condition is met while the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, before the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state. Then, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, in the high base state, by first switching from the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) can be switched, and the second control can be performed quickly. It is possible to notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the low base state and high base state, by switching from the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) can be switched quickly. It is possible to notify that the first starting condition or the second starting condition has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the second start condition has been met and the demonstration movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58, in the high base state, the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is started due to irregular winnings, etc., is as shown in FIG. 57. Since the flow is the same as that in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the base state, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 changes the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) to the first special symbol from the demo movie display when the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is displayed. Before switching the display to variable display, control is performed by switching from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and displaying the demo movie. If a second starting prize occurs while is displayed, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol, the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting Control is performed by switching from the demo) to the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, no matter which starting prize occurs, by switching control from the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can be controlled first. By switching, it is possible to quickly notify that a starting prize has occurred and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 changes the transmittance of the decorative pattern from the first value (for example, 0%) to the first value. A scroll display of decorative symbols is displayed so that the second value is higher than the value (for example, 90%), and if a first starting prize or a second starting prize occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, Before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to notify that a starting prize has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, and as a result, it is possible to increase the number of desirable customers. Waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 changes the transmittance of the decorative pattern from the first value (for example, 0%) to the first value. A scroll display of decorative symbols is displayed so that the second value is higher than the value (for example, 90%), and when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, the first start prize and the second start prize are If this occurs, before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative pattern, and when the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, the first When a starting prize or a second starting prize occurs, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transmittance of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes high, the first start winning and the second starting winning occur. It is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, even if the variable display of the small symbol starts with the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting prize, the transparency of the decorative symbol will not change while the decorative symbol is performing the fluctuation start action. Before the rate changes from the first value, the demo movie display is switched to the background display for variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, if the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 will respond to the first special symbol from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative symbol reaches 90%. If the display is switched to the variable display of decorative symbols that are displayed and the second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the display will change from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. The display is switched to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

In this way, regardless of whether a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, the starting winning can be achieved. It is possible to notify that the demo movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance, steering wheel operation version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended by operating the steering wheel will be explained based on FIGS. 59 to 60. FIGS. 59A to 59C are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demonstration movie display is ended by a handle operation in the low base state. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a handle operation.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended by operating the handle when the gaming state is the low base state will be explained based on FIGS. 59 and 60. In addition, in the following, we will explain an example of an operation in which the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with a handle operation when the base state is low, but an example of an operation in which the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with a handle operation when the base state is high will be explained. Since the operation example is almost the same except that the background display and lamp data are changed to those for high base, the explanation here will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, in the low base state, when the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied ends when the end condition E3 is satisfied, that is, based on the steering wheel operation. After the demonstration movie display ends, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white light emission mode based on the white color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, if a steering wheel operation is detected and the end condition E3 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the end condition E3 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 59(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E3 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed on the display screen. is displayed in the frame from the lower left side of the screen, moves toward the right to a specified position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 59(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E3 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). At the same time, it starts controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e), and also starts switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background (design stop) display. The decorative pattern starts at least after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E3 was satisfied (see FIG. 59(C) and FIG. 60).

Specifically, when the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, which has received the extension command: B10E, sends the extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display. Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the display of the decorative pattern are started after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. Visually, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern, and the guide display, the light emission control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. That will happen.

In other words, when the operation of the batting operation handle 30 is detected while the demo movie display is being displayed, the production control CPU 120 adjusts the brightness for the customer waiting demonstration before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display. Switching from the data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the batting ball operation handle 30 can be operated quickly by switching the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). For example, it is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the termination condition E3 has been satisfied and the demo movie display has ended.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance menu operation version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended by menu operation will be explained based on FIGS. 61 and 62. FIGS. 61A to 61C are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in the low base state. FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a menu operation. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a high base state and ending with a menu operation.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is ended by opening the menu display when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 61 to 63.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, in the low base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is terminated when the end condition E4 is satisfied, that is, the operation to open menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as a menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns starts, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of it. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is an operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may be other operations such as the stick controller 31A.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in white light based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, if a menu operation is detected and the end condition E4 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 61(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E4 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is started. Menu display 004SG410 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen, and further in front of first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 61(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). At the same time, it starts controlling the light emission of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), and also starts switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, but the normal background display The menu display 004SG410 starts at least after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E4 was satisfied (see FIG. 61(C) and FIG. 62).

Specifically, when the end condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 that has received the extension command: B10E displays the normal background and menu. Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to display 004SG410. On the other hand, after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 changes the demo movie display to the normal background and Switch to menu display 004SG410.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 starts after a predetermined period th has elapsed after the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, so the appearance Above, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative pattern and menu display 004SG410, the normal background light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. That will happen.

In other words, if an operation to display menu display 004SG410 is detected using the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, the production control CPU 120 switches the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guide display 004SG401. Before that, switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and display panel lamps and frame lamps (except button lamp 9e). ).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed as soon as the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched. Therefore, when the push button 31B is operated, it is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the termination condition E4 has been satisfied and the demo movie display has ended.

<High base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is ended by opening the menu display when the gaming state is the high base state will be explained based on FIGS. 61 and 63.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, in the high base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is terminated when the end condition E4 is satisfied, that is, the operation to open menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (first background display 004SG081 in FIG. 61) and decorative patterns starts. , a menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of it. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is an operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may be other operations such as the stick controller 31A.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white light emission mode based on the white color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, if a menu operation is detected and the end condition E4 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)), and the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) turn on in a purple (or green) wave. is started (in blue in FIG. 61(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E4 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started. , a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen, and a menu display 004SG410 is further displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 61(C)). ).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 selects the high B background brightness data table from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). B Switch to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and start light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). , starts switching control to switch from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082), but at least ends third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410. The process starts after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since condition E4 was satisfied (see FIG. 61(C) and FIG. 63).

Specifically, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. . Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410 to the production control CPU 120, and sends the extended command :B11D (or B121), the production control CPU 120 reads the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410. Alternatively, light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the lamp data table (background time saving). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command B11D (or B121) for a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) have passed, the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 starts after a predetermined period th after the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. has passed, so it appears that the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e The light emission control for the high B background (excluding the above) will be started.

In other words, if an operation to display menu display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) from the demo display is detected by the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082 ) and menu display 004SG410, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table) :background time saving)) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed as soon as the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched. Therefore, when the push button 31B is operated, it is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the termination condition E4 has been satisfied and the demo movie display has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a menu brightness data table for panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time shortening) )), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the menu brightness data table may be a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: A brightness data table having a different light emission mode from the background time saving) may be set.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance when interrupt conditions are met)
In the present embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls when an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying a demo movie display, that is, termination condition 2 (start winning), termination condition 3 (handle operation), termination If either condition E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, the demo movie display is changed to the normal background display or the main screen without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display when end condition E1 (time elapsed) is met. The display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time can be done by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of a sudden change, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interrupt condition can be ended without inserting a switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying the demo movie display in the low base state, if the interrupt condition is satisfied, that is, the end condition 2 (start winning), the end condition 3 (handle operation) , if any of the termination conditions E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, or if the termination condition E1 (time elapsed) is satisfied, the demo movie display is changed to the normal background display without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display. , and when the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, if the interrupt conditions are met, that is, end condition 2 (start winning), end condition 3 (handle operation), end condition E4. (menu operation), the demo movie display or the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, the display is switched to the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time can be done by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of a sudden change, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interrupt condition can be ended without inserting a switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying a demo movie display, that is, termination condition 2 (start winning), termination condition 3 (handle operation), termination condition E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, the first background display 004SG081 or the third background is changed from the demo movie display without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time elapsed) is met. Although the example is shown in which the menu display 004SG410 is displayed on the front side of the display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the present invention is not limited to this, and the display ends when the demo movie display is displayed. If any of the conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without displaying the switching display.

(End of customer waiting demo performance error occurred ver.)
Next, a case where an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance will be explained based on FIGS. 64 to 67. In FIG. 64, (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a ball out error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the priority layer. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance started in the low base state. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance started in the high base state.

First, one of the errors, the out-of-ball error, will be explained. The out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when a game ball is not detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 even though the payout device 004SG031 is operated by the payout control unit.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5) are paid out by the payout device 004SG031 based on the fact that the payout conditions for prize balls are satisfied due to the occurrence of a winning or the like. When a payout operation (for example, a rotational operation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed, a game ball is paid out to a payout passage. When all five game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the start of the payout operation, the CPU 103 concludes that the payout has been performed normally and ends the payout process. Therefore, the error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65(B)) consisting of a mark and the text "Out of bulb error" will not be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a will also be described later. No error flashing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), when a winning occurs, the payout device 004SG031 puts out a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)). operation) is performed, the CPU 103 detects game balls using the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 in a state where there are unpaid balls (for example, a state where the remaining three game balls out of five have not been detected). It is determined whether or not the period in which no detection is performed continues for a first determination period tl (for example, tl=5 seconds). Then, when it is determined that no game ball is detected within this first determination period tl, that is, it is determined that the period in which no game ball is detected while there are unpaid balls continues in the first determination period tl. , Assuming that the payout has not been performed normally, the payout operation of paying out 5 game balls and the game balls within the first determination period tl until the number of unpaid balls (for example, 5 game balls) is detected. The retry operation of repeatedly performing the detection judgment is continued.

Then, in this retry operation period, if five game balls are not detected even after the third retry operation is completed, in other words, there is a period in which no game balls are detected while there are unpaid balls. If it continues for the second judgment period tm (for example, 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl), the CPU 103 may detect an insufficient supply of game balls to the payout device 004SG031, a malfunction of the payout device 004SG031, a ball jam in the payout passage, etc. Assuming that one of the following problems may have occurred, an error designation command indicating the occurrence of an out-of-ball error is sent, and the retry operation is continued.

On the other hand, based on receiving the error designation command, the performance control CPU 120 switches the main lamp 9a to blinking red for error notification, while maintaining the previous control of the light emission mode of the board lamp and side lamp 9b. do. Further, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk=3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error designation command, error notification is performed by displaying error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65(B)) on the display screen.

In addition, after transmitting an error specification command indicating an out-of-ball error, when the first game ball is detected by the retry operation, the CPU 103 sends an error specification command for production control that specifies that the out-of-ball error has been canceled. Send to CPU 120. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, from the time when the first game ball is detected by the retry operation, a specific period (for example, 1 Since the error designation command for designating cancellation of the out-of-ball error is transmitted when the time period (seconds) has elapsed, the error notification can be promptly terminated without waiting until all unpaid balls are detected. Further, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk=3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error cancellation designation command, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen and the error notification is ended.

In addition, if there are still unpaid balls remaining after sending an error specification command to cancel the error, the retry operation will be started again, and even after the third retry operation is completed, there will be no unpaid balls. If the same number of game balls are not detected, an error designation command for designating an out-of-ball error is sent again, and the performance control CPU 120 restarts the above-described error notification.

<Low base state>
Next, based on FIGS. 65 to 67, we will explain an example of the operation when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol that started in the low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. I will explain.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, when variable display of the first special symbol starts in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see FIG. 65(A)). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e maintains white lighting based on the default brightness data table. .

Next, when the production control CPU 120 receives an error designation command indicating a bulb out error during variable display, the production control CPU 120 selects panel lamps and frame lamps (button lamps) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). For the main lamp 9a, as shown in FIG. 66, error brightness data (lamp data table: error) is used as brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer. To make the settings, switch to flashing red light emission control (see FIG. 65(B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 66, basically, a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp is set in the normal layer depending on the state. On the other hand, in the priority layer that is given priority over the normal layer, when an error occurs as described above, a brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is set. Then, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is used preferentially over the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background normal, etc.) to output brightness data to the LED driver. Then, the main lamp 9a flashes in red. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb out error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the decorative pattern display area 5L of the display screen , 5C, and 5R, error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer.

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen, and is directed to the right until it reaches the specified position. When the animation is displayed by moving, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 65(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue to be executed.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is satisfied, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b is changed to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer The display switches to the standby demo) and starts controlling the light emitting mode based on white. Note that even if the demo movie display is started, the error display 004SG700 and the red blinking of the main lamp 9a continue to be executed (see FIG. 65(E)). Thereafter, the demo movie display is started when a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was satisfied (see FIG. 65(F)).

After that, when the out-of-bulb error is canceled at a predetermined timing while the demo movie is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is switched to light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer. , the light emission control of the main lamp 9a is also started based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65(G)). At this time, the light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, so from the predetermined point of the demo movie display, the customer waiting demo Luminance data table Light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) can be started midway. Further, when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the out-of-ball error was canceled, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65(G)).

Also, although not shown in detail, when a ball out error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol that is started due to irregular winnings in a low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. Regarding the flow, as shown in Figure 65, the flow when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol that started in the low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. Since they are similar, detailed explanation here will be omitted.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the production control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error to turn on the main lamp 9a. Then, if the bulb out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then the second During the period, if the out-of-bulb error is not resolved, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification of a specific error that occurs during the game (for example, a ball out error) is carried over to both the background display and the demo movie display, stable It is possible to notify a bulb out error, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 uses an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error. Then, if the burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a is continued using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Then, during the second period, if the out-of-bulb error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. If a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during the bulb out error, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error, and then the first customer waiting period If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period, the out-of-bulb error is resolved. If not, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is inherited and executed both during the background display and during the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

<High base state>
Next, based on FIG. 68, we will explain an example of the operation when the ball out error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol started in the high base state continues even after the demo movie display starts. This will be explained with reference to 65.

As shown in FIG. 68, when variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (FIG. 65(A) )reference). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a purple (or green) wave based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)), and the button lamp 9e maintains white lighting based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the production control CPU 120 receives an error designation command indicating a bulb out error during variable display, the production control CPU 120 sets the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)). While continuing to control the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the brightness data of the main lamp 9a on the priority layer, as shown in FIG. In order to set the brightness data (lamp data table: error), switch to red blinking light emission control (see FIG. 65(B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 66, basically, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp is added to the normal layer. ) etc. are set depending on the state, while the priority layer that takes priority over the normal layer has a luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. Set. Then, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used preferentially over the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening), etc.). By outputting the brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a blinks in red. During this time, the production control CPU 120 uses the timer without stopping the time measurement of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening), etc.) set in the normal layer. The value of continues to be updated.

Next, when a predetermined period of time tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb out error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen Error display 004SG700 is displayed (see FIG. 65(C)).

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen, and is directed to the right until it reaches the specified position. When the animation is displayed by moving, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 65(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue to be executed.

In addition, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is satisfied, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b is displayed for the customer waiting demonstration. The display switches to the lamp data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), and control of the light emission mode based on white is started. Note that even if the demo movie display is started, the error display 004SG700 and the red blinking of the main lamp 9a continue to be executed (see FIG. 65(E)). Thereafter, the demo movie display is started when a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was satisfied (see FIG. 65(F)).

After that, when the out-of-bulb error is canceled at a predetermined timing while the demo movie is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is switched to light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer. , the light emission control of the main lamp 9a is also started based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65(G)). At this time, the light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, so from the predetermined point of the demo movie display, the customer waiting demo Luminance data table Light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) can be started midway. Further, when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the out-of-ball error was canceled, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65(G)).

Also, although not shown in detail, in a high base state, when the out-of-ball error that occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol that is started due to irregular winnings, etc., continues even after the demo movie display has started. Regarding the flow, as shown in Figure 68, the flow when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the second special symbol that started in the high base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. Since they are similar, detailed explanation here will be omitted.

In addition, when a ball out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 stores an error brightness data table (lamp data table) corresponding to the ball out error. If the bulb burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the high base state is maintained. If a ball out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in , the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the ball out error. Then, if the bulb burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period. If the bulb burnout error has not been resolved, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the lamp notification of a burnout error that occurs during variable display in both the low base state and high base state will be carried over and executed both during the background display and during the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 uses an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error. Then, if the burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a is continued using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Then, during the second period, if the out-of-bulb error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. If a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during the bulb out error, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error, and then the first customer waiting period If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period, the out-of-bulb error is resolved. If not, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is inherited and executed both during the background display and during the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are different. Specifically, white is the color that occupies a large percentage of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error ) is the color that occupies a large proportion of the luminance data (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emission mode while the demo movie is being displayed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different colors that account for a large proportion. . Specifically, while the color that accounts for a large percentage of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal) is blue, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: errors) The color that occupies a large proportion of the constituent luminance data is red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to have different main colors in the brightness data, , it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred by the light emitting mode during the background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) differ in the colors that occupy a large proportion. , the brightness data that makes up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). , the color that occupies a large proportion is different. Specifically, while blue is the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal), the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: errors) is The color that occupies a large proportion of the constituent luminance data is red (see FIG. 35). In addition, the colors that make up the majority of the brightness data that make up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time saving)) are green (for time saving) or purple (for variable certainty). On the other hand, the color that occupies a large proportion of the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, and The main color of the brightness data is now different between the brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). By configuring this, it is possible to suggest that an out-of-bulb error has occurred by the light emission mode during background display, regardless of which background is being displayed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error has not occurred during background display, the main lamp 9a is If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is displayed. and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) have different colors that occupy a large proportion (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to be different in the main color of the brightness data. , it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emitting mode while the demo movie is being displayed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error has not occurred during background display, the main lamp 9a is When the side lamp 9b and panel lamp are controlled and a bulb burnout error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table : background time shortening, lamp data table: background probability change) and error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the colors that occupy a large proportion are different (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background probability variable) are used to By configuring the main colors to be different, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing error notification, a mode is exemplified in which flashing red light emission is controlled based on the error brightness data table set in the priority layer, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when performing error notification, light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error luminance data (grandchild data) that causes a lamp dedicated to error notification to blink in red.

Further, in this embodiment, when an error is notified, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the light emission for error notification, but the error lamp is used to emit light for the purpose of notifying the game store staff. Therefore, the main lamp 9a is placed at the highest point of the frame lamp that is not hidden by the player and is most easily noticed by the game store staff, but side lamps 9b or other lamps may be used.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) have different proportions, and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp Data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) have different colors that occupy a large proportion (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the main color of the brightness data is made different between the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and The brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) should be configured so that the main colors in the brightness data are different. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emitting mode during the background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are displayed on the board that the player visually recognizes. The lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emission modes. Specifically, in the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the light emission mode is based on white, but in the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), it flashes in red. (See Figure 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are used to display the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) that are shown to the players. By configuring the display to have different movements (except for can.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error has not occurred during background display, the main lamp 9a is When the side lamp 9b and panel lamp are controlled and a bulb burnout error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table :Background time saving, lamp data table: background change) brightness data, error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp) that are visually recognized by the player. (excluding 9e) are configured to have different light emission operation modes. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) lights up a blue wave, and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time short)) lights up the blue wave. In contrast to the purple (or green) wave lighting, the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background certain) can be used to By configuring the movement of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) to be shown to be different, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred depending on the light emission mode while displaying the demo movie. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the luminance data that constitutes the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that constitutes the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the board lamp and The frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emitting operation modes, and are different from the brightness data that constitutes the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). The luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are visually recognized by the player is different. Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), for blue wave lighting, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short) ), the lamp lights in a purple (or green) wave, whereas the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes in red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. ) is configured so that the movement of By configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to be different, it is possible to suggest that a ball-out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The board that is visually recognized by the player includes the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emission operation modes, and the brightness that constitutes the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short)) The luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are visually recognized by the player is different. . Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), for blue wave lighting, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short) ), the lamp lights in a purple (or green) wave, whereas the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes in red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. ), and the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)). By configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to be different, it is possible to suggest that a ball out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) show the light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a that is visually recognized by the player, and the board lamp and The light emitting mode is different from that of the side lamp 9b. Specifically, in the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based light emission mode, and the error brightness is In the data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a manner according to the state (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) can be used to display the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. By configuring the motions of (excluding) to differ, it is possible to suggest that an error has occurred depending on the light emission mode during display of the demo movie, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: short background time, lamp data table: background definite change) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are visually checked by the player. The light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the light emitting operation mode of the panel lamp and side lamps 9b are configured to be different. Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: background fixed), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in blue wave. , the green wave is lit or the purple wave is lit, and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b are lit in a manner according to the state (Fig. 35 reference).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background certain) can be used to By configuring the display lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to differ in their movements, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred depending on the lighting mode during background display, and as a result, Suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are used to determine the light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a that is visually recognized by the player, the board lamp and The light emission operation mode of the side lamp 9b is different from that of the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The light emitting mode of the main lamp 9a and the light emitting mode of the board lamp and side lamps 9b that are visually recognized by the player are different from each other. Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in blue waves, and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data Table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)), the purple (or green) wave lights up, error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp And the side lamp 9b lights up in a manner according to the state (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player. The brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) are configured to have different movements. By configuring the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player to differ in their movements, it is possible to suggest that a ball out error has occurred depending on the lighting mode during the background display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The above-mentioned light emission operation mode is a light emission mode that allows the player to see some kind of movement, such as blinking: a mode in which the light turns on and off alternately, and shaking (haze): a change in brightness. (such as changing from RGB:700 to RGB:400), and lighting and extinguishing with no change in brightness are not included in the light emission operation mode. For example, in the case of shaking (moya), the specific light emitting means is set to the first brightness (RGB is 100) between the first brightness data xms (or the combination of the brightness of the first color, second color, and third color) (or each luminance of the first color, second color, third color) The previous brightness data is based on the brightness of a specific light emitting means. It is preferable that the values are different.

In addition, if the game ball payout condition is met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error will occur, and the performance control CPU 120 will be activated during the second customer waiting period. If a game ball exceeding the unpaid number is distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout section) when a ball out error occurs during the game, and game balls that do not exceed the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031. In any case, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error ) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout device 004SG031, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp will be demonstrated at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball. By switching to the light emitting mode corresponding to movie display, the demo movie display can be displayed without any discomfort, and the processing can be shared, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if the game ball payout condition is met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error will occur, and the performance control CPU 120 will not be able to detect the game ball during the first customer waiting period. If a game ball exceeding the unpaid number is distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout section) when a ball out error occurs during the game, and game balls that do not exceed the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031. In any case, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error ) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: background definite) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout device 004SG031, at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is changed to the background. By switching to a light emitting mode corresponding to the display, the background display can be made to look natural and the processing can be shared, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, during the second customer waiting period, if the conditions for paying out game balls are met and the period in which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl) , the panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the lamp is displayed during the second customer waiting period. When a run-out error occurs and a specific period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected the game ball. Then, the panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration).

In this way, if the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detected, there is a possibility of a ball out error, but there is also a possibility of a delay in the ball, so do not change the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp immediately. First, when a game ball is detected, by immediately switching the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp to the lighting mode that corresponds to the demo movie display, the demo movie display can be shown without any discomfort, and as a result, it is possible to attract more and more customers. Waiting control can be performed.

Additionally, during the first customer waiting period, if the conditions for paying out game balls are met and the period in which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl) , switch from the background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background variable) to the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and change the panel lamp and frame lamp. control, and when an out-of-ball error occurs during the first customer waiting period, the time after the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the game ball is determined to be shorter than the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl). When a period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: Control the board lamp and frame lamp by switching to (background change).

In this way, if the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect it, there is a possibility of a ball out error, but there is also a possibility of a delay in the ball, so do not change the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp immediately. First, when a game ball is detected, by immediately switching the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp to the lighting mode corresponding to the background display, the background display can be made to look natural, resulting in suitable customer waiting control. It can be performed.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 transmits brightness data for lighting/blinking/turning off one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Output to the LED driver (also called lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a lamp data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table used during super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in a normal state (background normal shown in FIG. 77), a fanfare background lamp data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot background lamp data table. A lamp data table for a jackpot background used during a round in a gaming state, a lamp data table for an ending background used in an ending state where an ending effect is executed to notify the end of a jackpot gaming state, and a lamp data table for an ending background used in a variable probability state. A background lamp data table (background probability variation shown in FIG. 77), a time saving background lamp data table used in the time saving state (background time saving shown in FIG. 77), and a customer waiting lamp data table used in the customer waiting state (Fig. (Customer waiting demonstration shown in 77).

Each of the above-mentioned background lamp data tables is used without overlapping, and can be used to select one of multiple types of game states such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, variable probability state, time saving state, and customer waiting state. Depending on whether the game state is being controlled, one of the background lamp data tables is used. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on the background lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the priority when used is increased in the order of the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table.

For example, if a super reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on a normal background lamp data table in a normal state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect. It is used preferentially over the normal background lamp data table, and brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach lamp data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table and a super reach effect develops, the SP reach lamp data table of the game effect lamp 9 is changed. For lamps for which brightness data is not set based on the background lamp data table, the lamps are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table, but among the game effect lamps 9, lamps for which brightness data is set based on the SP reach lamp data table are controlled. The lamp is controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach performance based on the SP reach lamp data table. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table is set, the brightness based on the background lamp data table Data is not output to the LED driver, and when the normal state returns after the super reach effect ends, brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. In addition, after the super reach effect ends, if there is a jackpot and a fanfare state occurs, brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and for any lamp, the fanfare background lamp data table The lamp is controlled in a manner based on

More specifically, the production control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the gaming state being controlled, and controls the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to the gaming state being controlled. However, when a super reach effect develops, the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect is used preferentially than the background lamp data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the value of the timer without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background lamp data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach lamp data table, but the background lamp Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the SP reach lamp data table, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the super reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table is not set, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver.

Further, for example, the performance control CPU 120 outputs brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state, or outputs brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during the super reach performance. If an error occurs, the lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set among the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. However, for the game effect lamps 9 whose brightness data is set based on the error lamp data table, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is used as the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data. It is used preferentially over the table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, among the game effect lamps 9, the lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table are not set are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. Among the effect lamps 9, the game effect lamps 9 are lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table for the lamps for which brightness data is set based on the error lamp data table. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the error lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set, the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp The brightness data based on the data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the error is cleared and the game returns to the normal state or the game state during super reach effect, it is output to the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. The brightness data based on this is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the normal background lamp corresponding to the normal state while measuring the lamp control time corresponding to the normal state and the lamp control corresponding to the super reach production under control using a timer. Brightness data is output to the LED driver using the data table and SP reach lamp data table that corresponds to the super reach effect, but when an error occurs, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is output to the background lamp data table. The brightness data is outputted to the LED driver using priority over the lamp data table for SP reach. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, the production control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error lamp data table. However, since the luminance data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table have a lower priority than the luminance data included in the error lamp data table, The luminance data included in the lamp data table for use in the LED driver is not output to the LED driver. Then, after the error is cleared, the production control CPU 120 outputs the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated. start. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver. .

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 include "unlit,""substantiallyunlit,""lit," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the LED in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a state other than "turning off" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes cases where the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching over time between cases where the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. The two differ from each other in that blinking is that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

[Explanation regarding game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 70 to 76.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 when the sub variable time reaches the timing to start display corresponding to each part. I do. The display control unit 123 sends extended commands (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. (where “X” is an arbitrary value (0 to F)) and sends the extended command to the production control CPU 120.The production control CPU 120 controls the display control by the display control unit 123 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123. The address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed is specified.

FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in FIG. 70, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs predetermined display control, it transmits an extended command (BXXX) for specifying the display control to the production control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the predetermined display control.

In the parent table, information specifying which lamps are to be controlled (lit locations or unlit locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, and lamp control information corresponding to the lamps to be controlled. Information that specifies a child table that is referenced at the same time, and information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 72, the side lamp 9b is designated as the target of lamp control. Also, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified for side lamp 9, and 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and lamp control is performed by this child table. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time. In addition, in the parent table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 72, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information in the parent table that was last set before then continues.

As shown in FIG. 70, the production control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, when 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time. In order to time this 600000ms (10 minutes), the counter is decremented by 1 every 10ms. That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is counted. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives another extended command before timing a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) after receiving the extended command, the CPU 120 for effect control stops the lamp control that is currently being executed, and restarts the lamp control. The lamp control of the target lamp is performed using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). Therefore, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can continue for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table contains information specifying a grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the child table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 73, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), grandchild table: Execution time for lamp control: 500ms, execution time for lamp control using grandchild table: The order in which lamp control is performed using the grandchild table is specified. In addition, in the child table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 73, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information of the child table that was last set before that time continues to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 70, when performing lamp control on a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, for example, the production control CPU 120 uses the first specified grandchild table to perform lamp control on the target lamp. After performing ramp control for this grandchild table and measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the process of performing ramp control for the target lamp using the next specified grandchild table is performed for all specified grandchild tables. They are to be performed in the specified order. For example, with the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the side lamp 9b, the lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until the first 500 ms is measured, and then the lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the time is measured for 500 ms. , Next, ramp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then ramp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600000 ms is measured. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control using the grandchild table specified at the end is 600000ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). By setting, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can be continued for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In addition, in the child table, when the side lamp 9b is the target of lamp control, one grandchild table is used as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, for example, as shown in FIG. :XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 may be specified, and although not shown, two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1 may be specified. When one grandchild table is designated as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the production control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to The same lamp control is performed for both the lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the production control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables. The left side lamp 9b is controlled by the left side lamp 9b, and the right side lamp 9b is controlled by using the other grandchild table. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as a grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b have a common table. While lamp control is performed, if two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b.

The grandchild table specifies the brightness data to be referenced during lamp control and the execution time for performing lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. information is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the grandchild table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 74, corresponding to the side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1), brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms , Brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x00000 0, 0x000000, 0x000, lamp according to this brightness data Execution time for control: 120ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA 5AA , 0x5AA, an execution time of 40 ms for lamp control based on this luminance data is specified in the order in which lamp control based on these luminance data is executed. In addition, in the grandchild table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 74, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information in the grandchild table that was last set before then continues.

In the luminance data of the left side lamp 9b and right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) of the grandchild table shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and No. 2 indicates the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 are the values of the second lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the 3rd lamp, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th lamps indicate the value of the 3rd lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values of numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the corresponding data indicate the RGB values of the 5th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 The value of the digit indicates the RGB value of the 6th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 and 8 is the value of the RGB of the 6th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the side lamp 9b are shown, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 are the values of the eighth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The lower 1st to 3rd digit values of the data corresponding to number 10 indicate the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lower 1 digit of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11 The values in the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b.

Although not particularly shown, when different grandchild tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the brightness data of the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~) , the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the lower 1 of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 indicates the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values in the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4. The value indicates the value of the third lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the value of the lowest digit to third digit of the data corresponding to No. 3 and 4 indicates the value of the fourth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the lamp of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the 5th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to indicate the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the lower 1st digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8. The value of the 3rd digit indicates the RGB value of the 8th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 9 and 10 are the values of the left side lamp. The RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of the 9b are shown, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 are the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the 11th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. In the brightness data of (XD___LWU_2_~), the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and correspond to numbers 3 and 4. The lower 4th to 6th digits of the data indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The value indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 are the values of the right side lamp 9b. The RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top are shown, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 are the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to No. 8 indicate the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the lower 4 digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 9 and 10 The values in the 6th to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values in the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the right side lamp 9b. The RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of the side lamp 9b are shown, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 11 are the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. It indicates the value.

Further, although not particularly shown, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LMAIN_~) specifying the main lamp 9a, the values of the first to third lower digits indicate the RGB values of the main lamp 9a. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LLOGO_~) that specifies the movable lamp 9d, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 are the 1st from the left of the movable lamp 9d. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. Yes, the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, and the lower values of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. The values in the first to third digits indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of the first from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. Indicates the RGB value of the lamp, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and 3 The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the lower 1st to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. The value of the third digit indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the value of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicates the RGB value of the fifth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. This shows the RGB values of the lamp. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LATAK_~) that specifies the attacker lamp 9c, the values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of the first from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. It shows the RGB values of the lamp, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c, and 3 The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c, and the lower 1st to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. The third digit value indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LPUSH_~) that specifies the button lamp 9e, the values of the first to third lower digits indicate the RGB values of the button lamp 9e.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B". The brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the luminance data of "A" flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by flowing current corresponding to the luminance data to each RGB element. . In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can be lit in colors according to each effect or character by emitting light based on brightness data. . As an example, data "F00" is outputted from an LED lamp to an LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. Further, data "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in reddish-purple color. Furthermore, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control on the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, for example, the production control CPU 120 outputs the initially specified brightness data to the LED driver, After measuring the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, the process of outputting the next designated brightness data to the LED driver is performed for all the designated brightness data in the designated order. For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 is sent to the LED driver until the first 100ms is measured. Output brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 to the LED driver until the next 120ms is measured, then brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x00 until the next 120ms is measured. 0000, 0x000000, 0x000000 , Output 0x000 to the LED driver, then output brightness data until 120ms is counted: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA to the LED driver, then 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, until next 40ms is counted. Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA to the LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, 10 ms cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the specified grandchild table. On the other hand, while outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 71, in the child table: 500ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified, 230ms is specified as the time for third lamp control, and grandchild table: 600000 ms is specified as the time for lamp control, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, the brightness data (RGB data) for the side lamp 9b are "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4" 995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA , 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499" order is specified to be executed at 100ms intervals. For convenience of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms will be referred to as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms will be referred to as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms will be referred to as data 4. .

When performing lamp control for the second designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: The luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on :XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until reaching 500 ms, but after outputting data 1 to data 4, the time is still 500 ms. If the luminance data has not been reached, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 500 ms, the production control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 at that point, and outputs the brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 specified by the child table. Start.

In addition, when performing lamp control for the fourth designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: Until the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on : If the time has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order starting from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 at that time. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will start, but some abnormality must occur. In this case, the time measurement never reaches 600,000 ms, and by receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the time measurement reaches 600,000 ms, the parent table/child table/child table specified by the newly received extended command is displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table will start.

Furthermore, as shown in the parent table shown in Figure 72, 600000ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by the child table, and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays the role of troubleshooting. . That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the main board 11, but if some malfunction occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp control is performed one after another from the point where a problem occurs. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, as in the child table shown in FIG. 73, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the last specified grandchild table, and the 10 minute data in such a child table is Prevents ramp control from being performed again by the grandchild table specified at the beginning of the child table due to the timer of the parent table still remaining when the value of the timer corresponding to the table becomes 0. play a role.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the last specified luminance data. With this configuration, 10 minutes in the luminance data When the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so lamp control is performed again using the luminance data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table. This will play a role in preventing things from being put away. In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

[About the lamp data table used during non-gaming 1]
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a lamp data table used during non-gaming (only button blinking white and blinking red are used during gaming).

The background normally shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image, and the effect control CPU 120, after the power is restored (when controlled to the normal state), After the end of the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the gaming state, after the end of the fluctuation in the normal state, after the end of the fluctuation of the last game in the time saving state, after the end of the jackpot gaming state (when controlled to the normal state), the normal state After the demo movie ends and after the menu display in the normal state ends, when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B10E that is sent in conjunction with the control to display the normal background image, the normal background image is used. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

The background time saver shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time saver background image, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the operation of the game effect lamps after the power is restored (when controlled to the time saver state). The display control unit 123 displays the time-saving background image after the variation in the time-saving state ends, after the jackpot game state ends (when controlled in the time-saving state), after the demo movie ends in the time-saving state, and after the menu display in the time-saving state ends. When the extended command B11D transmitted in conjunction with the control is received, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the background normal.

The background probability change shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the background image for probability variation, and the performance control CPU 120, after the power is restored (when controlled to the probability variation state), The display control unit 123 displays the background image for probability variation after the fluctuation in the probability variation state ends, after the end of the jackpot gaming state (when controlled in the probability variation state), after the end of the demo movie in the probability variation state, and after the end of the menu display in the probability variation state. When the extended command B121 transmitted in conjunction with the control is received, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the background normal.

The customer waiting demonstration shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration performance. When the unit 123 receives the extended command: BF01 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display the image corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration performance, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the customer waiting demonstration.

The white lighting of the button shown in FIG. 77 is the lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to non-gaming except during initialization notification, and after the power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 After the end of the notification and after the end of the operation promotion performance, when receiving the extended command: B001 transmitted from the display control section 123, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white lighting.

The white blinking button shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e that corresponds to the operation promotion effect, and the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the operation promotion effect that causes the display control unit 123 button lamp 9e to blink white during the game. When receiving the extended command B002 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display the image, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white blinking.

The blinking button red shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation promotion effect, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the operation promotion effect in which the display control unit 123 causes the button lamp 9e to blink red during the game. When receiving the extended command B003 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display the corresponding image, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white blinking.

Note that the button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation promotion presentation; , lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white lighting. In addition, since the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e are not specified for button white lighting, button white flashing, and button red flashing, the performance control CPU 120 is extended to specify button white lighting, button white flashing, and button red flashing. Even when a command is received, lamp control based on the previous lamp data table is continued for the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e.

The initialization notification shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification, and the production control CPU 120 transmits the lamp data table as the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification. When the extended command: BFFF is received, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using initialization.

The error shown in FIG. 77 is the lamp data table of the main lamp 9a corresponding to the error notification, and the production control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of the error. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the error.

Furthermore, since no game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a are specified as an error, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying an error, the game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a are not specified. Continues lamp control based on the previous lamp data table.

[Lamp data table: background normal]
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table:background normal parent table used when extended command: B10E is received, and FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table:background normal child table. FIGS. 80 and 81 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: background normal grandchild table.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B10E transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a normal background image, the production control CPU 120 creates a background normal parent table based on the extended command: B10E. specify. Background As shown in FIG. 78, the normal parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: When B10E is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the background normal parent table.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 79, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (FIG. 80) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO, as shown in FIG. 80, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in grandchild table:

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: and similar Repeat control. In addition, if the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600000 ms has passed after the child table: .

As shown in FIGS. 78 to 81, child tables that also refer to the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c are set in the background normal parent table. In the child table, reference grandchild tables etc. are set, and in these grandchild tables, reference brightness data etc. are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The lamps of the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are controlled in the same manner as above by referring to the child table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table. I do.

Background The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the normal child table refers to for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c is also set to a brightness based on blue, and the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on blue.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the normal background parent table, so the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white) continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: background time saving]
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of lamp data table:background time saving used when extended command: B11D is received, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of lamp data table:background time saving. FIGS. 84 and 85 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: background time saving grandchild table.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B11D transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a time-saving background image, the production control CPU 120 creates a background time-saving parent table based on the extended command: B11D. specify. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the background time saving parent table has child tables that refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. , In these child tables, grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set, and in these grandchild tables, brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp are installed in the same manner as the background by referring to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table. 9f, performs lamp control of the attacker lamp 9c.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background time saving child table refers to for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, brightness based on green is set. In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on green.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the background time saving parent table, so the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white) continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: background change]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of lamp data table: background probability variation used when extended command: B121 is received, and FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of lamp data table: background probability variation. FIGS. 88 and 89 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the ramp data table: grandchild table of background probability variation.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B121 transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a background image for probability variation, the production control CPU 120 creates a parent table for background probability variation based on the extended command: B121. specify. As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the parent table for background probability changes has child tables that refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. , In these child tables, reference grandchild tables etc. are set, and in these grandchild tables, reference brightness data etc. are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp are installed in the same manner as the background by referring to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table. 9f, performs lamp control of the attacker lamp 9c.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the child table of background probability variation refers to for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, the brightness based on purple is set. In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on purple.

In addition, since the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the background probability change, the lamp control based on the lamp data table (button lit white) that was previously set continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: Customer waiting demo]
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of lamp data table: customer waiting demo used when extended command: BF01 is received, and FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of lamp data table: customer waiting demo. FIG. 92 to FIG. 98 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration.

When the display control unit receives an extended command: BF01 that is transmitted when the display control unit performs display control of the customer waiting demo display performance, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01. do. As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the child table: : When BF01 is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, as shown in FIG. 91, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a are set in the order of reference.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (FIG. 92) which is initially set in the child table: As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks in white at the start of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: I do. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white over the period of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, and the light emission mode changes in accordance with the movement of the letters of the company name.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 9500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. A common table is a grandchild table that is commonly referenced even if the parent tables are different. As a result, the main The lamp 9a is turned off.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 30500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, and executes the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. Common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table common to the one used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the main title part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, the production control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes in white at the start of the subtitle 1 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration production.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to a rainbow color over the period of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration production.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks in white at the start of the second part of the subtitle constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the second part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, and sets the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. As a result, the main lamp 9a is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white during the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500 ms.

The effect control CPU 120 then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) that is sent when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and displays a lamp based on the newly received extended command. Switch to lamp control using data table. Thereby, the main lamp 9a continues to be turned off until receiving a new extension command, and upon receiving the new extension command, the main lamp 9a switches to the light emission mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to control the side lamp 9b for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the child table: : When BF01 is received, the lamp control of the side lamp 9b is performed with reference to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

In the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, as shown in FIG. 91, the grandchild table and execution time of the side lamp 9b are set in the order of reference.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (FIG. 92) that is initially set in the child table: As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in white at the start of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamp with reference to the grandchild table: I do. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white over the period of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, and the light emission mode changes in accordance with the movement of the letters of the company name.

After that, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 9500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, over the period of model introduction 1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, the lighting color of the side lamp 9b changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white according to the type of character appearing. do.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 12500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-1 constituting the customer waiting demonstration production, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in green over the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-2 constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in green over the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-3 constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 5000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, and executes the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. Common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table common to the one used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the side lamps 9b emit light in rainbow colors over the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in white at the start of the subtitle 1 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration production.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the side lamp 9b changes to rainbow colors over the period of the first part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in white at the start of the second part of the subtitle constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamps 9b emit light in rainbow colors over the period of the second part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamps 9b are lit in white during the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

The effect control CPU 120 then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and displays a lamp based on the newly received extended command. Switch to lamp control using data table. As a result, the side lamp 9b continues to be turned off until it receives a new extension command, and upon receiving the new extension command, the side lamp 9b switches to the light emission mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 98, child tables that also refer to the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo. The grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in these grandchild tables in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 is With reference to the table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are controlled in the same procedure as above.

As a result, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c flash in white for 500 ms after the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance and at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, thereby configuring the customer waiting demonstration performance. It lights up in white for the period of the company name part, and the lighting pattern changes according to the movement of the letters of the company name, and then remains off for 500ms, and appears for the period of model introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance. The lighting color changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white depending on the type of character being played, and the lighting continues to be white for the period of model introduction 2-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. In addition, the lighting mode changes according to a predetermined pattern, flashing in green during the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, and lights up white during the period of model introduction 2-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. , and the lighting mode changes according to a predetermined pattern, flashing in green during the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, and lights up white during the period of model introduction 2-3 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. Then, the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern, and then the light goes off for 500ms, and the light emission color changes to rainbow colors during the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, forming the customer waiting demonstration performance. It flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part, changes to a rainbow color over the period of the subtitle 1 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance, and flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance. , the emitting color changes to a rainbow color during the period of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance, and then turns off for 500 ms, and during the period of the attention calling 1 and attention calling 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demonstration performance, respectively. It lights up in white, then remains off for 500ms, remains off until a new extended command is received, and upon receiving the new extended command, switches to the light emission mode based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control based on the extended command: BF01 based on the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, thereby controlling the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c change in luminous color and luminous manner according to each part of the customer waiting demonstration production.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo, so the lamp control based on the lamp data table (button lit white) that was previously set will continue. will be carried out.

In addition, the lamp data table: customer waiting demo includes the company name part, model introduction 1 part, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2- for the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. 2. Model introduction 3-2, Model introduction 2-3, Since a grandchild table is specified for each main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and attention part, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker Lamp control can be performed so that the lamp 9c emits light according to each part.

In addition, in the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, for the main lamp 9a, a grandchild table is specified for each company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and attention calling part. For model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3, which make up the model introduction part, the grandchild table of 1 is specified, so the overall The amount of data can be reduced.

In addition, the lamp data table: customer waiting demo does not have a grandchild table of the button lamp 9e, and lamp control is performed for the button lamp 9e based on the grandchild table from before the customer waiting demo, so the total amount of data is can be reduced.

Furthermore, for the grandchild table that is controlled to be turned off and the grandchild table that is caused to emit light in rainbow colors, lamp control is performed using a common table that is also used in other parent tables, so the overall amount of data can be reduced. A grandchild table that temporarily emits white light may also be controlled using a common table.

[Lamp data table: Button lit white]
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: button white lighting parent table used when extended command: B001 is received, and FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white lighting child table. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the contents, and FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of button white lighting.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after the power is restored, after the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the gaming state, and after the end of the operation promotion performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the extended command. : Specify the parent table for button white lighting based on B001. As shown in FIG. 99, the parent table for button white lighting is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B001, the button lamp 9e is controlled by referring to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table of button white lighting.

In the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 100, the grandchild table and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referred to are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (FIG. 101) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, as shown in FIG. 101, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set to the brightness to emit white light, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B002 or B003) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, Lamp control is performed based on the lamp data table based on the extended commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table with the white button lit, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: Button flashing white]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: button white blinking parent table used when extended command: B002 is received, and FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white blinking child table. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of blinking white button.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command: B002, which is transmitted during a game to perform control to display an image corresponding to an operation promotion performance that causes the button lamp 9e of the display control unit 123 to blink in white, Command: Specify the parent table of the white blinking button based on B002. As shown in FIG. 102, in the parent table of the button blinking white, it is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B002, the lamp control of the button lamp 9e is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table of button white blinking.

As shown in FIG. 103, the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is set with the grandchild table of the button lamp 9e to be referenced and the execution time.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (FIG. 104) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, as shown in FIG. 104, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU every execution time of the brightness data. In the brightness data set in the grandchild table:

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, Performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table of the white button blinking, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: Button flashing red]
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of lamp data table: Button flashing red, which is used when extended command: B003 is received, and FIG. 106 is the setting of the child table of lamp data table: Button flashing red. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of blinking red button.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command: B003, which is transmitted during a game to perform control to display an image corresponding to an operation promotion performance that causes the button lamp 9e of the display control unit 123 to blink in red, Command: Specify the parent table of the blinking red button based on B003. As shown in FIG. 105, the parent table of the button flashing red is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B003, the lamp control of the button lamp 9e is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table of the blinking button.

As shown in FIG. 106, the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is set with the grandchild table of the button lamp 9e to be referenced and the execution time.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (FIG. 107) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP.

As shown in FIG. 107, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set to have a red light emitting brightness and an off state, and the button lamp 9e blinks in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, Performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table with the button blinking red, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: initialization notification]
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: initialization notification parent table used when the extended command: BFFF is received, and FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: initialization notification child table. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of initialization notification.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: BFFF that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, the production control CPU 120 issues an initialization notification based on the extended command: BFFF. Specify the parent table of. As shown in FIG. 108, the initialization notification parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: : When BFFF is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table of the initialization notification.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 109, the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (FIG. 110) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, as shown in FIG. 110, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA is set to the brightness to emit red light, and the main lamp 9a lights up in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. Furthermore, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. .

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the initialization notification parent table has child tables that also refer to the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. In addition, grandchild tables to be referred to are set in these child tables, and luminance data to be referred to are set in these grandchild tables in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 Referring to the child table specified in the table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker Controls the lamp 9c and button lamp 9e.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the child table of the initialization notification refers to for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, the brightness that causes red light to be emitted is also set. Also, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are lit in red.

[Lamp data table: error]
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error parent table used when the extended command: BFF1 is received, and FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error child table. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error grandchild table.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of an error, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the error based on the extended command: BFF1. As shown in FIG. 111, the error parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: , the main lamp 9a is controlled by referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the parent table of the error.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 112, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR (FIG. 113) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR, as shown in FIG. 113, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchildren table:

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600000 ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command. .

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the error, so they must be set before that. Lamp control based on the lamp data table continues.

[Common table]
The common table is a grandchild table that is also referred to by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in FIGS. 114 to 118, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, A common table (XD___L~_OFF) that turns off the attacker lamp 9c and button lamp 9e, and slowly changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors. Equipped with a common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01), a common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_02) that changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, button lamp 9e into rainbow colors at high speed, etc. .

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. It is possible to perform lamp control using a table.

By providing a common table that can be referenced from child tables set in different parent tables to perform lamp control in this way, data capacity can be reduced.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the embodiment, the first effect mode can be executed in a low base state, the second effect mode can be executed in a low accuracy high base state, and the third effect mode can be executed in a high accuracy high base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute two or more types of production modes in a low base state, or it may be possible to execute three or more types of production modes in a high base state, Only one type of production mode may be executable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a vertical scroll display is performed in the first performance mode, a rotating display is performed in the second performance mode, and a vertical scroll display is performed in the third performance mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and the manner of variable display of decorative symbols in each performance mode can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above embodiment, a jackpot gaming state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. , a small winning game state, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state is defined as a low-accuracy low-base state, and the special states in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than the normal state are defined as a low-accuracy high-base state and a high-accuracy low-base state. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the normal state may be a low probability state, and the special state may be a high probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low base state), a time saving state (low probability high base state), and a variable probability state (high probability high base state), and when the jackpot game ends, the time saving state or the probability variable state is set. Although the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled in a state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control to a time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or to be advantageous in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of Pachinko machine 1). The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state that is controlled after a jackpot game is changed to time-saving state A, and the predetermined state is set without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Time saving state B is a time saving state that is controlled based on the number of times variable display has been executed, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time-saving state that is controlled based on what has been done may be called the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the above-mentioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results for winning the time-saving state C are provided, and the control is performed according to the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C. The number of variable display times during which time saving control is performed may be varied.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state is a non-AT state, the advantageous state is a big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state is assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

In addition, when performing a reach effect according to a variation pattern, it is possible to perform a title notification or a chance-up effect during a reach. Furthermore, a gaming machine that moves an accessory during movement or reach and displays effects or outputs sound effects in accordance with the moving object is conceivable. In this case, a specific character may emit a line sound, or a specific sound effect may be output during a title display or a ready-to-win performance to arouse the expectation of a jackpot and draw the player's attention. In addition, in the specific production, the first display and the second display color, which is an inverted display color of the first display, are displayed multiple times in accordance with the output of the specific production sound, so that the gaming machine By creating a sense of unity between audio and video, and displaying each inverted display color multiple times, the display colors of the first display and the second display can be made to appear even more vividly. The output support for dialogue sounds and sound effects as well as actual machine control will be explained in detail below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 126 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 126, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special symbols (also called a special pattern) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electroluminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol whose execution is pending is referred to as the "first pending display", and the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol whose execution is pending is referred to as "the first pending display". "Second Pending Display". Note that the first hold display and the second hold display are collectively referred to as a "hold display" as appropriate.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 126). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 126, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 126), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 126, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 126), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 126).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 126).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the time-saving state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becoming a "jackpot". However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the time saving state may be controlled based on an opportunity other than the display result of the variable display of the special symbols becoming a "jackpot".

For example, a "time saving result" may be provided as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol. When a missed symbol with a time saver is stopped and displayed, the time saver control is controlled to a time saver state B in which the time saver control is performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, a chance time with the number of time savers being 7 times). In addition, when the fluctuation is performed 500 times without being controlled to hit the jackpot in a low probability state, the time saving control is controlled to a time saving state C in which the time saving control is performed a second predetermined number of times (for example, a play time with a time saving number of 99 times). . However, even if after the end of the time saving state C, the fluctuation is performed again 500 times without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state, the time saving state C will not be controlled again based on this.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of performance, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various performances (performances that notify the progress of the game or make the game more exciting) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 126, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, An I/O (Input/Output port) 105 is provided.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 127, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 128. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 128 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 128 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 128 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 130. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 130 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 131, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be explained. Regarding the feature section 152F, a technique aimed at a pachinko gaming machine in which setting means can set setting values having different advantages for players, such as the probability of winning a jackpot, will be described below. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player as the setting value of the probability of winning a jackpot. .

First, the setting values will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the setting value by a setting change operation performed by a person on the gaming parlor side (such as a clerk at the gaming parlor) using an operating means such as a predetermined switch. It is said to be composed of

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) executes a setting change process that allows changing the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, a setting change process is executed that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting values are, for example, comprised of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, and the probability of winning the jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage is in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. It increases in stages. It should be noted that the set value may be set in multiple stages, and is not limited to six stages. In this way, as the probability of winning the jackpot can be changed, the ball release rate (number of balls played per unit time (number of prize balls)) will change, so changing the setting value will change the ball release rate. It can also be said that it is something to do.

For example, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Among the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

Further, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting the setting value 1 to setting value 6, similarly to the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similar to the jackpot winning probability. The selection probability of the variable pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similarly to the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic part 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is In some cases, a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled (win) is executed is stored. Specifically, the pending connection means that among the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred, there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred Refers to consecutive wins within the range of pending information in which the next winning occurs consecutively within the range of . In addition, in the case of a small win, it becomes a jackpot via a small win based on the occurrence of a V winning, so it can be said that the pending information of a small win is the pending storage information of a win that will become a jackpot in the future. When such a pending series is executed, a notification effect that notifies that the series is on hold may be executed.

FIG. 132-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 152F, the reference numerals and descriptions of the same components as in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 will be omitted, and the different parts will be described.

In the game area where the game ball that has been hit can flow down, the first path of the flow paths along which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game ball is flown down. A second path different from the first path among the downstream paths along which the balls flow down is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area, so it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area, so it may be called a right-handed route.

Note that the first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left gaming area and the right gaming area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the gaming nails within the gaming area.

When the game ball that is fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area in response to the operation of the ball operation handle 30 is guided to the left game area, it is guided, for example, along the array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the right gaming area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area because it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A in which a first starting winning opening is formed is provided as a structure into which the game balls that have been distributed can enter the left gaming area of the gaming area. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning hole.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which the game balls that are divided into the right game area of the gaming area can enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B has a second starting prize opening into which game balls can be won. In addition, as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered each, a gate switch 21 is installed inside the passage gate 41, a second starting opening switch 22B is installed inside the second starting winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87 is installed. Inside, a V winning switch 87a, a V judgment winning switch 15a, and a V judgment discharge switch 15b are provided, respectively.

In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass through). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for determining the V winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when a small hit occurs.

The V judgment prize winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually check the game ball passing through the inside. The V judgment winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows the game ball to pass in the front and back direction, and walls on both sides (the front side and the back side) of the passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right direction. A guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, when a small hit occurs, a signal is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 open periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second). By repeating opening and closing, an operating opening is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more game balls can be won within a predetermined period of time when the opening is open. The path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball so as to protrude alternately on both sides of the wall, so that when hitting right-handed, , A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly is formed in the passage above the operation opening on the upper part of the V judgment winning device 87.

In the small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Opening control is executed. In the V judgment winning device 87, the portion of the guideway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guideway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guideway and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens in the guideway, so the game ball guided to the guideway can fall from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating port), a V-winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a winning region where the game ball that enters from the operating port can win. Further, a ramp is provided for guiding all of the game balls entering from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide the gaming ball that has entered from the V winning opening downward.

A plate-shaped opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided at the top end of the winning hole (V winning hole) of the V winning area 870. There is. The opening/closing member is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. In the state where the V winning hole is opened depending on the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is in a state where it can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. The ball is placed in a state where it can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small winning game state in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, one game ball is When entering the V winning area 870 and winning a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 from then on will be inside the winning ball area. will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V judgment winning switch 87a and the V judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V judgment winning device 87, which is opened in the small winning game state, closes its operating port and the game ball enters. considered to be an impossible situation. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom, and the gaming balls that have passed through the merged discharge passage and entered the V judgment winning device 87 are placed in a predetermined position inside the game board 2. It is discharged into the discharge channel. The discharge path is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect the game balls to be discharged, and all the game balls to be discharged are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , the conditions for generating a jackpot are satisfied, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The winning of a game ball in such a V winning area 870 is called a V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as mentioned above, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 game balls can be collected on average without requiring any special operation. The structure and control design are such that the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, the game ball is always (100%) in the V winning area. The structure is designed to enter 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-hitting promotion notification that instructs the player to hit the right-hand ball is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. Ru.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87, and unless the player hits the ball left-handed, the player must hit right-handed. In this case, the game ball will definitely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the V judgment winning device 87 was provided with a structure for decelerating the game ball. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operating port that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operating port is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that it may be arranged so that there is a possibility that the game balls hit into the left gaming area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are distributed into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the gaming area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nails.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a big winning opening covered by a rectangular door on the front, and when a jackpot occurs, the door is tilted forward about the bottom by a solenoid, and the big winning opening appears ( open). A count switch 23 is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 to detect the game ball that has entered. A winning route is set to the special variable winning ball device 7 using a game nail or other structure so that the game ball can enter the grand prize opening only when the game ball is hit into the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that it may be arranged so that a prize can be won in the big winning hole regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, an example was shown in which the special variable winning ball device 7 provided with the big winning hole and the V judgment winning device 87 for determining a V winning are different devices, but such a form However, the special variable winning ball device 7 having the big winning opening and the V judgment winning device 87 for determining a V winning may be a common device.

For example, a V judgment winning device 87 for determining a V winning may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening. In this case, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole enters the V judgment winning device 87 as it is.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Occurs in When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is drawn and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the second starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B.

A jackpot also occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 while the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small winning gaming state. Hereinafter, the game ball entering the V winning area 870 and being detected by the V winning switch 87a will be referred to as a V winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value imparting, and a jackpot can occur on the condition of a V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a gaming state in which the operating port is opened is called a "small winning gaming state." Then, in the small hit game state, a jackpot that occurs based on the game ball winning a V prize is called a "jackpot via a small win." On the other hand, a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as "jackpot by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player as a predetermined value imparting, and a repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeated continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning hole is open) is called a round. Repeated continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is set to the open state, a predetermined end condition of the open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the fulfillment of the opening termination condition (that is, the occurrence of winning balls). Then, when the release end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed when the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, when the game ball After passing (including winning) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole as the starting winning area, the start condition for the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is started based on the establishment of a state in which a jackpot game is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed, and when a variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, a display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed. Note that the game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been predetermined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning opening (winning a prize). It is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means to finally stop display (determine display) the symbol (an example of identification information).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the starting conditions have not yet been met even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, if the game ball has not yet started within the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information regarding variable displays for which conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "suspended storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been stored. Pending memory is also called starting memory or starting winnings memory.

Regarding the first special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the first pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole. Regarding the second special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the second pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole. If a jackpot occurs in a state where such first pending memory or second pending memory exists, the pending memory that existed before the jackpot occurrence will be maintained as it is, and the variable display will be displayed after the jackpot gaming state ends. used for.

When a second starting prize enters the second starting winning hole, even if there is a pending memory of the first starting winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning will be executed with priority. Ru. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "special 2 priority consumption").

In addition, although the above-mentioned embodiment showed the example in which special 2 priority digestion is executed, it is not limited to such a form, and special 2 priority digestion does not have to be executed.

For example, (A) the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed with priority over the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "special 1 priority consumption"), (B) The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "special 1 special 2 simultaneous consumption").

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is a second reserve consisting of four displays that display the number of valid winning balls that entered the second starting winning hole, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, a first reservation display 25A is provided which is made up of four indicators that display the effective number of winning balls that have entered the first starting prize opening, that is, the number of first reservation memories. . The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game ball in two ways: ``left-handed'' aiming at the left playing area, and ``right-handed hitting'' aiming at the right playing area. The game state and performance state are controlled so that a rich variety of games can be enjoyed. Below, the flow of the game after the player starts playing the game on the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

When a player takes a seat at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening by hitting the ball to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot due to the special symbol), the user switches from left-handed batting to right-handed batting and plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that is released. . After the jackpot game state ends, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to play the game by hitting right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, a game is performed in which the player aims at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting the ball with the right hand. During the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state ends, if the time saving state described later is reached, the player continues playing the game by hitting right. After the jackpot game is over, if the time saving state has been reached, a time saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the time saving state will start. Further, during the time saving state, a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hitting promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the game ball switches from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting and enters the first starting prize opening. Play the game as follows. In addition, if the time saving state does not occur, a left-handed playing promotion notification (also called left-handed playing notification) is made to be performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to switch back to left-handed playing and play the game. It's okay.

During the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the player plays the game by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole and the display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot due to a special symbol), the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting the right hand. In addition, if the game ball enters the second starting prize opening and the display result becomes a small hit display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 will be opened in the small winning gaming state, so the V judgment will be made while hitting the right hand. Aim for the winning device 87 and play the game. At the start of the small winning game state, a small winning start notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state is started. In addition, when controlled to a small winning gaming state, a specific timing (depending on the gaming situation, the start timing of the small winning display that is executed before the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the small winning) , or at a predetermined timing before the small win display is executed.), a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is in an open state due to the small winning gaming state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V judgment winning device 87, enters the V winning region 870, and is detected. When a V-win occurs, a jackpot via a small hit occurs. When a V winning prize occurs, a V winning notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V winning prize has occurred. Further, when the small winning gaming state ends, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small hit ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 is released in the jackpot game state, so the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting right.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning gaming state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, the jackpot will occur. does not occur. In this way, when a V winning does not occur during the small winning game state, a V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Furthermore, at the end of the small winning gaming state, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small winning game state ends, while the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable prize winning ball device 6B while hitting right. When the time saving state ends, the player switches from right-handed to left-handed and plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening. At the end of the time saving state, time saving end notification to notify that the time saving has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and left-handed playing promotion notification to urge the player to return to left-handed playing and play the game.

FIG. 132-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The winning type table shows, for each type of winning, the conditions for generating a jackpot, the control state (gaming state) after the jackpot, the number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4 )R Time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the jackpot via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is released.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (jackpot probability, small win probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball is entered into the operating port while the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot occurs. do. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. It will be done. 16(15)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9(8)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a second small win. 5(4)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot that occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, a jackpot occurs due to a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. This includes small wins and jackpots. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hit is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is named a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous for the player in this embodiment includes opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

The symbol 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). For the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 16 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 15 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type. Via small hit 9 (8) R Time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) with the condition of V winning. It is. Via small hit 5 (4) R Time-saving jackpot: After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 4 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type.

Symbol 4R Time Saving The time saving state after the jackpot has two conditions: the second special symbol is displayed 1 time, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 5 times. Two end states are set: The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is determined by taking into account that the game balls that enter the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is that when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of generating a jackpot via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7. It is assumed that there is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is one time is set for the following reason. In the case of symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically the time-saving state (including electric support state) continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the second special symbol in a variable manner, It is necessary to hit the game ball to the right and enter the passage gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, such a variable winning ball device It takes time to place the game ball in 6B, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed fluctuating is 5 times is that the jackpot can be achieved immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the condition for starting the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbols that are likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started due to the reserved memory based on the 1st starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state This is a condition for making it possible to reliably display batch fluctuations. By doing this, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from not being performed.

After a jackpot other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the end condition is that the second special symbol is displayed 7 times, and the total number of times that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11. Two end states are set: The number of times of seven times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 7 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot via a small hit will occur compared to the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot. This is the number of times that the number of cases becomes significantly higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is such that the jackpot occurs immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol starts due to the reserved memory based on the first starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state, the second special symbol 7 is likely to be determined as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the display of changes in the number of times of changes can be executed reliably. By doing this, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first starting prize opening is provided so that winnings can be won from the first route, so if the game ball flows down the first route, it will be easier to win from the second route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball were to fall. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so that the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot than when the game ball flows down.

In addition, the comparison is not limited to such advantages, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings)) are compared to the first route. and the second route, and in the low base state which is the normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning hole than the second route, and in the high base state, jackpot game state, and small In other states such as a winning game state, it is easier to win the variable winning slot on the second route than on the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second route.

FIG. 132-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 132-3, the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: This is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot and whether or not to win a small hit. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1: Jackpot type (type, symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Determine (any type of R time-saving jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the jackpots in the specific gaming state include symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and small hit. It includes multiple types of via 5(4)R time-saving jackpots. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number for determining a hit (random R), or when a determination is made as a small hit, based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a jackpot via a small hit, if a V-win does not occur, the determined jackpot will be invalidated. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the type of small win is determined, the small win symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining small winning symbols.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3), This fluctuation pattern is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve a reach, and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves a reach.

FIG. 132-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table, a second special figure hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 132-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. “Probability” shown in FIG. 132-4(A) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

FIG. 132-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot and a small hit for the second special symbol, and a jackpot determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R are set. This is the table where The upper part in FIG. 132-4(B) is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part in FIG. 132-4(B) is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper row of Figure 132-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting a jackpot.The "probability" shown in the lower row of Figure 132-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. Note that a small win may be provided in the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability due to the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. Extract the count value (random R). For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the first special symbol. decided on. Regarding the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the second special symbol. decided on. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is matched with any of the small hit judgment values. If they match, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during a small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small winning symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

FIGS. 132-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 132-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 132-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 132-4(C) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for determining the jackpot type, including "Symbol 15R Time-saving Jackpot" and "Symbol 4R Time-Saving Jackpot" A jackpot judgment value corresponding to each of these is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 132-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot" which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 is set.

In addition, as shown in Figures 132-4(C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The jackpot type determination table via small hit in FIG. 132-4(E) includes numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and " Jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" are set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot type determination table via small hit are the 1st small hit (16 (15) R time-saving jackpot), the 2nd small hit (9 (8) R time-saving jackpot) This is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the 3rd small win (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalidated if a V win does not occur in the small win gaming state.

FIG. 132-5 and FIG. 132-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIGS. 132-5 and 132-6, the relationship between specific command data for the production control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command is shown. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 132-5 and 132-6, various performance control commands are sent to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state.

The main commands in FIGS. 132-5 and 132-6 will be explained. Command 80XX(H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX(H), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance display device to start a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands that indicate display results including loss display results, jackpot display results for each jackpot type, small win type, and small win display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start varying display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are win start designation commands that designate the start of a jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A1XX(H) is a command for specifying the opening of the big winning hole, which indicates that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a designation command after the opening of the big winning hole which indicates the opening (closure) of the big winning hole of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are win end designation commands that designate the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command A402 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies the first pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first pending storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second pending storage number designation command that specifies the second pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second pending storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when subtracting the number of pending memories, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a pending memory number designation command that specifies the number of pending memories after subtraction; however, the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories, a pending storage number subtraction designation command may be used to specify that the number of pending memories is to be subtracted by one.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small winning. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to end the first small winning. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to end the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to end the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning designation command that designates that there is a V winning. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) has been detected entering the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first reservation storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured in the first pending storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second pending storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second pending storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second pending storage buffer. The second pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saves them in a storage area in the first holding storage buffer. Execute the process to (storage). Specifically, these random numerical values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first holding storage buffer based on the winning in the first starting winning opening. In addition, based on the winning in the second starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second holding storage buffer. Execute the process to save (storage) to. Specifically, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second holding storage buffer based on the winning in the second starting winning opening.

Storing information regarding the starting winnings in the pending storage buffer in this manner may be referred to as "being stored pending storage." In addition, the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the reservation memory buffer in advance, but are extracted at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. It may be extracted.

FIG. 132-7 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process in S101. In the starting port switch passage process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first starting port switch 22A is in the on state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not in the on state, the process moves to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending memory for counting the number of first pending memories). It is confirmed whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to S1221.

If the first pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first pending memory counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reservation storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance the variation display result and variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected first special symbol's starting winning is subsequently executed at the starting winning (S1215).

In this embodiment, after a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as pending storage information, the start conditions for the variable display are set. If established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal processing (S110), the variable display result is determined for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for which the variable display is to be started based on the relevant pending storage information. The determination as to whether or not to be displayed as a jackpot display result and the jackpot type are determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111), the fluctuation pattern (including the determination of the fluctuation pattern type) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination value and the fluctuation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random values described above. Based on.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the variable display starts based on the starting winnings in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, specifically, the timing when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole. Or, at the timing when a starting prize is won in the second starting prize opening (the timing at which the pending memory information is stored), the pending memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the starting prize is pre-read, and based on the pre-read pending memory information. In this way, the determination of whether or not it will be a jackpot, the determination of whether or not it will be a small hit, the type of jackpot, and the type of fluctuation pattern are performed in advance by a jackpot set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. A winning presentation process is executed to pre-read and determine based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the fluctuating display result in advance before the fluctuating display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the start winning time, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that foretells that there will be a jackpot (possibility of a jackpot).

Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1216), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first starting prize designation command to the production control CPU 120 (S1218), and sets the value of the first pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the first pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command, and the A set of four commands, including the first pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (S1221). If the second starting port switch 22B is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending memory for counting the number of second pending memories). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1222). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is immediately terminated.

If the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second pending memory counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reservation storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 regarding the starting winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1226), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second starting prize designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and sets the value of the second pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the second pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a starting prize to the second starting winning hole occurs, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a second starting winning designation command, A set of four commands, including the second pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 132-8 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer in S51, processing for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command (S80) is performed, and then the processing ends. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is pending memory data in the second pending memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A will be displayed depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A based on the pending memory data stored in the first pending memory buffer. be exposed. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B based on the pending memory data stored in the second pending memory buffer. will be held.

Through the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data in the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. Store it in the random number buffer of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second pending storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. Additionally, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command for specifying the number of reserved memories indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (S59 ). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, data indicating "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first starting winning hole, that is, "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first special symbol. , or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed targeting the second starting prize opening, that is, data indicating "second" indicating executing the process targeting the second special symbol. , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the same can be used for both the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the starting port switch passing process or S1224 of the starting port switch passing process and stored in the pending storage buffer or the random number buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small hit determination value with a random number for jackpot determination, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or small hit. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process and a small hit determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 132-4 (A), then the second special symbol will match any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 132-4 (B). If it matches the judgment value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not to make it a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped symbol on the special symbol display a jackpot symbol. .

If it is determined in S61 that it is a jackpot (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 132-4(C) is selected (S73) and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 132-4 (D) (S74). , proceed to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. It is determined (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

In addition, if the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". By checking whether or not there is, it is checked whether the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (it is a variable display of the first special symbol), the process advances to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol in Figure 132-4 (B) Using the determination table, a small hit determination process is performed by determining whether or not the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values (S77). That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 132-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small hit. do. If it is determined to be a small win (S77Y), a small win flag indicating that it is a small win is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 132-4 (E) (S79), and select the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. The jackpot type corresponding to the value matching is determined as the jackpot type via small hit (S80). Then, the process moves to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process moves to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating 16 (15) R time saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving jackpot via small hit are V winnings in the small winning gaming state. If this does not occur, the jackpot will not occur and there will be invalid data, which will be provisionally set.

In S82, a stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is a losing symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the small hit flag is set, one of "1", "5", and "9", which is a small winning symbol according to the small winning type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol. do. If the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot symbol according to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 132-9 is a flowchart showing the small win release preprocessing (S118). In the small winning opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small winning, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small winning start designation command indicating that a small winning game state is started to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judgment winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the number of winnings in the V winning area 870 in the small winning open state as the condition for ending the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is set to "10", and settings are made to count down the number of V winning prizes. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 132-10 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit release process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit release control timer by -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is checked whether the count value of the V judgment winnings counter that counts the number of V winnings is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning balls counter is set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 132-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the counted value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning prize counter is "0" in S430, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is checked whether the small hit release control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit release control timer has timed out in S432, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit release control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is brought into the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 in accordance with the timed value of the small win release control timer based on the opening mode of the small win. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not a V winning that occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 which is in an open state inside the V judgment winning device 87 from the V winning opening is detected, It is determined whether the switch 87a is in the on state (S434). When it is in the ON state in S434, it means that a V winning prize is detected, and a V winning flag that is set when a V winning prize is detected is set (S435). Then, processing for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). Thereby, the production control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning hole in the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V-win, the V-winning opening in the V-winning area 870 is closed, and after that, the game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not in the on state in S434, it is the time when the V winning prize is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V judgment winning switch 15a is in the on state (S438). If it is in the on state in S438, the process advances to S439, and if it is not in the on state in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V judgment winning ball counter, which was set to ``10'' in S413 of FIG. The following processing is performed (S440). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the V judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected. It becomes possible to recognize the number of game balls played.

When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is "0" in S431, it is the time when the small winning opening end condition is satisfied because the small winning V winning number reaches the upper limit value, and, When the small win release control timer times out in S432, the small win release control is completed and the small win release end condition is satisfied. At these times, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 22, and closes the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small winning, the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter becomes "0". The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small win release control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed in accordance with the end of the small win release control in the small win release mode.

Next, data corresponding to a specific period that is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (S442). The value is updated to the value corresponding to step S120) (S443), and the process ends. As a result, time measurement for a specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed, is started. In addition, by setting the specific period that is the V winning prize validity period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning prize area later than the normal time for some reason, the game ball can be detected. Further, since a specific period is set, even if someone attempts to enter the V winning area illegally, only that period will be detected, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 132-11 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the small winning post-end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning prize validity period timer by -1 (S441), and checks whether the V winning prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

If the V winning valid period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 when a V winning is already detected has been set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a It is determined whether or not it is in the on state (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that a V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that a V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, processing for transmitting the V winning prize designation command is performed (S446), and the processing ends. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that a V winning prize has occurred.

When the V prize validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small winning end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that it is a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small winning game state, if you play right-handed in accordance with the right-handed hitting promotion notification described later, you can make the game ball enter the V judgment winning device 87 with approximately 100% probability, and you will receive a V judgment winning prize. Based on the fact that the game ball that enters the device 87 always makes a V win in the V win area 870, the V win flag is set with approximately 100% probability (S435 in FIG. 132-10). A jackpot flag is set and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot is officially won due to the occurrence of the V winning. is formally stored (S450). Then, the time saving flag that was set at that point is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, jackpot start 4 designation command, or jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state has started. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Also, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, depending on the type of jackpot, the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval. Open pattern data indicating the opening mode such as time (big winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Among such data, data on the number of openings is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small winning gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot game state will not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win does not occur in the small winning gaming state, the state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 05TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 05TM will be explained using FIGS. 133-1 to 133-83. In this embodiment, during the fluctuating display, there is a production (such as a story SP development production) that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot for the fluctuating display is high, and a production that notifies that the display result of the fluctuating display will be a jackpot (the first one). When the first to third normal jackpot notification performances, etc.) are executed, a part of the performance sound is specially processed (scratch processing) and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, during a jackpot game, there is a performance that notifies you that there is a pending memory in which the display result is a "hit"("jackpot" or "small win") (first pending continuous performance), and the corresponding jackpot. When the notification that the jackpot type is the next confirmed jackpot (first confirmed production) is executed, a part of the production sound is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R with special processing (scratch processing). be done.

[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 133-1 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. The jackpot type table shows, for each type of jackpot, jackpot generation conditions, control status (gaming status) after the jackpot, number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), and opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, as jackpot types, symbol 10R time-saving jackpot, symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, small hit via 10(9)R time-saving jackpot, and small hit via 3(2)R time-saving jackpot are provided. The number in parentheses of the jackpot via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (jackpot probability, small winning probability, base) after the small winning gaming state ends is the same as before the small winning. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

While the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 (hereinafter referred to as “V winning port”) is open, a game ball is entered into the operating port, and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87. If you enter (V-win), a jackpot will occur. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. The jackpot via small hit includes "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small hit".

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include a "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" that occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, a jackpot occurs due to a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. This includes small wins and jackpots.

The advantageous state advantageous for the player in this embodiment includes opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. Hereinafter, "Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" and "3(2) Time-saving jackpot via small hit" will be appropriately referred to as "3R jackpot", and "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "10(9) Time-saving jackpot via small hit" will be referred to as "3R jackpot". It is appropriately referred to as "10R jackpot".

“Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). In addition, for the 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 9 times (9R) with the condition of V winning. This is a jackpot that will be opened, and the number of times the big winning hole will be opened is 9 times, but since the winning device will actually open for 10 rounds, the player will think of the opening of the big winning hole as a "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot". It feels like the same kind of jackpot.

“Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened three times (3R). In addition, for the 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened twice (2R) with the condition of V winning. It is a jackpot that is opened, and the number of times the big winning hole is opened is 2 times, but the winning device is actually opened for 3 rounds, so the player can think of the "symbol 3R time saving jackpot" regarding the opening of the big winning hole. It feels like the same kind of jackpot.

The time saving state after "Symbol 3R time saving jackpot" has the following conditions: the second special symbol is displayed once, and the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is five times. Two end states are set: a condition (not shown). The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is determined by taking into account that the game balls that enter the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is that when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of generating a jackpot via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7. It is assumed that there is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is one time is set for the following reason. In the case of "Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", basically the time-saving state (including electric support state) continues until the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is completed once, but when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol In this case, it is necessary to hit the game ball to the right and enter the passage gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It takes time to put a game ball into the ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the ending condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times is such that the jackpot is achieved immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbols that are likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started due to the reserved memory based on the 1st starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state This is a condition for making it possible to reliably display batch fluctuations. By doing this, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from not being performed.

In addition, after the jackpot with "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and part of "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", the end condition that the number of variable display of the second special symbol is 99 times, and the first special Two termination states are set, including a termination condition (not shown) in which the total number of times the symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner is 103 times. The number of times of 99 times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 99 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the next jackpot via the small hit is substantially determined. , compared to the "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", the number of times is set to significantly increase the possibility of generating a jackpot via a small hit. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the ending condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 103 is that for the same reason as in the case of "symbol 3R time saving jackpot", the second special symbol is displayed immediately after the start of the time saving state. Even if the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is started before the special symbol fluctuating display start condition is met and the first special symbol is stored in a suspended memory based on the first starting winnings, which can be memorized at a maximum of four before the jackpot game state, the player This is to ensure that the variable display of the 99 times of variation of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as an advantageous jackpot, can be executed.

In addition, after the jackpot of 10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small hit and 3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small hit, the end condition is that the number of fluctuating displays of the second special symbol is 7 times, and Two end states are set, including an end condition (not shown) in which the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. The number of times of seven times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 7 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", the end condition is that the number of fluctuating displays of the second special symbol is 7 times, and when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, it is virtually impossible to reach the next small hit via the next small hit. Although the jackpot is not certain, it is the number of times that the probability of a jackpot via a small win is significantly increased. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the ending condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is that for the same reason as in the case of the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, immediately after the start of the time-saving state, the second special symbol It is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started before the variable display start condition is met by the suspended memory based on the first starting winning that can be stored at a maximum of 4 before the jackpot game state. This is to ensure that the display of the seven variations of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a big hit, can be displayed.

[Random value]
FIG. 133-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 133-2, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of MR3, a random number MR4 for determining a general figure display result, and a random number MR5 for determining an initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable.

Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Note that although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 133-2, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random numbers MR1 to -MR5 may use values in other ranges.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns serving as modes are stored.

[Display result judgment table]
FIGS. 133-3 (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 133-3 (A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "[first special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the first special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for determining the jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value (not shown) is set to be compared with the random value MR1. It is. “Probability” shown in FIG. 133-3 (A1) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/199.

FIG. 133-3 (A2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the second special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "[second special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the second special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for making a jackpot determination and a small hit determination for the second special symbol, and includes a jackpot determination value that is compared with the random number MR1, and a small hit determination. This is a table in which values (not shown) are set. In FIG. 133-3 (A2), the upper part is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (proportion) of a small hit.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/199. Further, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35. Note that a small win may be provided in the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability due to the first special symbol may be set to 1/99.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing. The count value (random value MR1) is extracted. For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the first special symbol is Decided to hit the jackpot. For the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the second special symbol is Decided to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value does not match any of the small hit judgment values. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during a small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small winning symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIGS. 133-3 (B1), (B2-1), and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 133-3 (B1) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 133-3 (B2-1) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol. Figure 133-3 (B2-2) is a small hit via small hit jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of a small hit via small hit when a small hit is determined by the second special symbol. It is.

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol in FIG. 133-3 (B1) (hereinafter referred to as the "[first special symbol] jackpot type determination table") includes the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. A numerical value to be compared with the value, and a jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is set.

In addition, FIG. 133-3 (B1) also shows the number of times the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to each of the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot". "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" has a time-saving control number of 99 times, and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" has a time-saving control number of one time.

In this embodiment, the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "10 (9) time-saving jackpot via small hit" in which the number of time-saving controls is 99 are appropriately referred to as "10R jackpot A" (next confirmed jackpot), and the number of time-saving controls is 99. The "10R time-saving jackpot" and "10 (9) time-saving jackpot via small hit" which are 1 or 7 times are appropriately referred to as "10R jackpot B" (next non-determined jackpot), and the time-saving control number is 1 or 7 times. ``Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot'' and ``3 (2) time-saving jackpot via small hit'' are appropriately referred to as ``3R jackpot B'' (next non-determined jackpot). Hereinafter, a "jackpot" in which the number of time-saving controls is X times will be appropriately referred to as a "jackpot" (X times).

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], out of the range of determination values for MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 2 are assigned to "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (99 times) ( 1%), numbers 3 to 299 are assigned to the "Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" (once) (99%).

The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 133-3 (B2-1) (hereinafter referred to as the "[second special symbol] jackpot type determination table") includes random numbers for determining the jackpot type. A numerical value to be compared with the value of MR2, and a jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is set.

In addition, FIG. 133-3 (B2-1) also shows the number of times the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to each of the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot". "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" has a time-saving control number of 99 or 7 times, and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" has a time-saving control number of 7 times.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table, out of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 29 are assigned to "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (99 times) ( 10%), 30 to 149 are assigned to "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (7 times) (40%), and 150 to 299 are assigned to "Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" (7 times) ( 50%).

In the small hit via small hit jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as the "[second special symbol] small hit via jackpot type determination table") in Figure 133-3 (B2-2), the small A numerical value that is compared with the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot via a hit, and is used for each of "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small hit". A corresponding jackpot judgment value is set.

In addition, in Figure 133-3 (B2-2), the actions to be executed after the jackpot corresponding to "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" are shown in Fig. 133-3 (B2-2). The number of times of time saving control is also shown. "10 (9) R time saving jackpot via small win" has a time saving control number of 99 or 7 times, and "3 (2) R time saving jackpot via small win" has a time saving control number of 7 times.

In this example, in the [2nd special symbol] jackpot type determination table via small hit, out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, from 0 to 29 is "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" ( 99 times) (10%), 30 to 149 are allocated to "10 (9) R time saving jackpot via small hit" (7 times) (40%), and 150 to 299 are " Allotted (50%) to 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot (7 times) via small hit.

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether the fluctuation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. This fluctuation pattern is determined.

Here, a description will be given of variation pattern determination in the case where the production mode is the normal mode and when the production mode is the powerful RUSH mode (see FIG. 133-12 for details about the production mode). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment table includes a [missing] fluctuation pattern judgment table that is used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "miss", and a fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the fluctuation display result is determined to be a "miss" ("jackpot"). A variation pattern determination table [for jackpot] that is used when it is predetermined to make a winning (including a small hit) is prepared in advance.

<Normal mode fluctuation pattern>
In the variation pattern judgment table for [missing] when the production mode is normal mode, the variation pattern of "non-reach miss", the variation pattern of "normal reach miss", the variation pattern of "SP-A miss", the variation pattern of "SP- A predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of "B is off" and the variation pattern of "SP-C is off".

[For jackpot] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, there are fluctuation patterns of "Normal reach jackpot", fluctuation patterns of "SP-A1 jackpot", fluctuation patterns of "SP-A2 jackpot", fluctuation patterns of "SP-B1 jackpot", " For the variation pattern of "SP-B2 jackpot", the variation pattern of "SP-C1 jackpot", and the variation pattern of "SP-C2 jackpot", a predetermined random value from the range that can be taken by the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern. is assigned as the judgment value.

<Non-reach out>
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "miss", in the "non-reach miss" variation pattern, it is reported that the reach state is not established and the final display result is a "miss".

<Normal reach is off>
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "Off", in the "Normal Reach Off" variation pattern, after the reach state is established, a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) By displaying a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "miss", it is notified that the final display result is a "miss".

<Normal reach jackpot>
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "jackpot", in the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, after the reach state is established, a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) By displaying a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "222", "777", etc.) that corresponds to the display result being a "jackpot", it is possible to know that the final display result is a "jackpot" or "small win". be notified.

In this embodiment, multiple types of characters appear in various performances. In this example, these characters include an ally character A, an ally character B, an ally character C, an enemy character X, and an enemy character Y. In the following, ally character A will be referred to as "ally character A", "ally A", "character A", "character A", "ally character (A)", "ally (A)", "character (A)" as appropriate. ”, is called “Character (A)”. In addition, in the following, ally character B will be referred to as "ally character B", "ally B", "character B", "character B", "ally character (B)", "ally (B)", "character ( B)" and "Character (B)." In the following, ally character C will be referred to as "ally character C", "ally C", "character C", "character C", "ally character (C)", "ally (C)", "character (C)" as appropriate. ”, is called “Character (C)”. In addition, below, enemy character X will be referred to as "enemy character X", "enemy X", "character X", "character X)" and "Character (X)." In addition, below, enemy character Y will be referred to as "enemy character Y", "enemy Y", "character Y", "character Y", "enemy character (Y)", "enemy (Y)", "character ( Y)” and “Character (Y).”

<Liss/Jackpot with super reach>
In this embodiment, a variation pattern with super reach ("SP-A misses", "SP-B misses", "SP-C misses", "SP-A1 jackpot", "SP-A2 jackpot", "SP- "B1 jackpot", "SP-B2 jackpot", "SP-C1 jackpot", "SP-C2 jackpot"), super reach performance (hereinafter referred to as "SP reach" as appropriate) informs you whether or not you have won the "jackpot". The final display result is fixed and stopped by executing the "Production" and "SP Reach").

(Challenge SP performance)
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns with super reach, in the variation patterns of "SP-A miss", "SP-A1 jackpot", and "SP-A2 jackpot", the variation display result is "lost" after the reach state is established. ” The combination of decorative symbols indicating that it will be temporarily stopped is displayed (temporary failure notification), and then it develops into a super reach, and whether or not ally character B has won the jackpot by taking the challenge of destroying the rock. A super reach performance (hereinafter referred to as "Challenge SP performance" or "Challenge SP" as appropriate) is executed (in this example, "Nana Challenge", see FIG. 133-27 (3)). Hereinafter, such a variation pattern will be appropriately referred to as a "variation pattern with 'SP-A'", "variation pattern with challenge SP", etc.

Here, if the variation pattern is "SP-A FAIL", an effect in which ally character B fails the challenge (failure effect) is executed, and it is announced that the final display result will be ``FAIL''. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is "SP-A1 jackpot", a performance (success performance) in which ally character B succeeds in the challenge is executed (see Figures 133-32 and 133-33), and the final display result is You will be notified that you have won the jackpot. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "SP-A2 jackpot", after the failure effect is executed in the challenge SP effect, the resurrection effect described later will be executed, and the final display result will be announced as a "jackpot". Ru.

(Battle SP production)
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns that involve super reach, the variation patterns of "SP-B miss", "SP-B1 jackpot", and "SP-B2 jackpot" develop into super reach after the reach state is established. , a super reach performance (hereinafter referred to as "battle SP performance" or "battle SP" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not a "jackpot" has been won by a battle between ally character A and enemy character X. (See Figure 133-27 (6)).

Here, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-B miss", a production in which ally character A is defeated by enemy character X (defeat production) is executed, and it is announced that the final display result will be "miss". Ru. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-B1 jackpot", a performance (victory performance) in which ally character A wins against enemy character X is executed (see Figures 133-34 to 133-37), and the final display is You will be notified that the result will be a "jackpot". In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "SP-B2 jackpot", after the defeat effect is executed in the battle SP effect, the resurrection effect described later will be executed, and it will be announced that the final display result will be "jackpot". Ru. Hereinafter, such a variation pattern will be appropriately referred to as a "variation pattern with SP-B", a "variation pattern with battle SP", etc.

(Story SP production)
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns that involve super reach, the variation patterns of "SP-C miss", "SP-C1 jackpot", and "SP-C2 jackpot" develop into super reach after the reach state is established. , a super reach production (hereinafter referred to as "story SP production" or "story SP" as appropriate) that displays a story video related to ally character A to notify whether or not a "jackpot" has been won. It is executed (see Figure 133-27 (8)).

Here, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-C missed", a production in which the display of the story video related to ally character A ends halfway (unachieved production) is executed, and the final display result is "SP-C missed". ” will be announced. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is "SP-C1 Jackpot", a performance (achievement performance) in which the story video related to ally character A is displayed until the end is executed (Figures 133-38 to 133-41). ), you will be notified that the final display result will be a "jackpot". In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-C2 jackpot", after the unachieved effect is executed in the story SP effect, the resurrection effect described later will be executed, and the final display result will be announced as "jackpot". be done. Hereinafter, such a variation pattern will be appropriately referred to as a "variation pattern with SP-C", a "variation pattern with story SP", etc.

FIG. 133-4 is a fluctuation pattern determination table in normal mode. As shown in FIG. 133-4 (A), in the [missing] fluctuation pattern judgment table in normal mode, out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, values from 1 to 900 are "non-reach missing"; Variation patterns from 901 to 950 are "Normal Reach Off", 951 to 970 are "SP-A Off", 971 to 990 are "SP-B Off", and 991 to 997 are "SP-C Off". is assigned to.

Also, as shown in Figure 133-4 (B), in the normal mode [for jackpot] fluctuation pattern judgment table, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 50 are “normal reach jackpot”. , 51-185 is "SP-A1 jackpot", 186-200 is "SP-A2 jackpot", 201-470 is "SP-B1 jackpot", 471-500 is "SP-B2 jackpot", 501 The numbers from 950 to 950 are assigned to the "SP-C1 jackpot" and the numbers from 951 to 997 are the "SP-C2 jackpot".

As shown in Figure 133-4, when the display result is "miss", among the variation patterns with super reach, the variation pattern with "SP-A" (in this example, "SP-A is missed") ) is selected at a rate of (970-951+1)/997 = approximately 2%, and the rate at which a variation pattern involving "SP-B" (in this example, "SP-B is off") is selected is: (990-971+1)/997=approximately 2%, and the rate at which a variation pattern involving "SP-C" (in this example, "SP-C is off") is selected is (997-991+1)/997= It is about 0.7%.

On the other hand, when the display result is "Jackpot", among the variation patterns with Super Reach, the variation patterns with "SP-A" (in this example, "SP-A1 Jackpot", "SP-A2 Jackpot") ) is selected is {(185-51+1)+(200-186+1)}/997=approximately 15%, and the variation pattern with "SP-B" (in this example, "SP-B1 jackpot") is selected. , "SP-B2 Jackpot") is selected at {(470-201+1)+(500-471+1)}/997=approximately 30%, and the variation pattern accompanied by "SP-C" (in this example, , "SP-C1 jackpot", "SP-C2 jackpot") are selected at a rate of {(950-501+1)+(997-951+1)}/997=about 50%.

In this way, when the display result is "off", among the variation patterns with super reach, the variation pattern with "SP-C" (approximately 0.7%) < the variation pattern with "SP-B" (approximately 2%)=The execution rate is assigned based on the relationship of the fluctuation pattern (approximately 2%) with "SP-A". Also, when the display result is "Jackpot", among the variation patterns with super reach, the variation pattern with "SP-A" (about 15%) < the variation pattern with "SP-B" (about 30%) )<The execution rate is assigned based on the relationship of the fluctuation pattern (approximately 50%) with "SP-C".

In other words, when a variation pattern with various super reaches is executed, the ratio of "miss" to "jackpot" (jackpot occurrence rate = jackpot / (miss + jackpot)) is the same as the variation pattern with "SP-A". When executed, the ratio is 2(%):15(%)=1:7.5 (88%), and when the variation pattern with "SP-B" is executed, 2(%):30 (%) = 1:15 ratio (93%), and when a variation pattern with "SP-C" is executed, 0.7 (%): 50 (%) = 1:70 (98%) This is the ratio of

Therefore, when a variation pattern with various super reaches is executed, a jackpot is achieved due to the relationship of variation pattern with "SP-A" < variation pattern with "SP-B" < variation pattern with "SP-C". The incidence is increasing. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is high due to the relationship: fluctuation pattern with battle SP < fluctuation pattern with challenge SP < fluctuation pattern with story SP.

<Variation pattern of powerful RUSH mode>
In the variation pattern judgment table for [missing] when the production mode is Powerful RUSH mode, the variation pattern of "non-reach miss", the variation pattern of "normal reach miss", the variation pattern of "SP-X miss", the variation pattern of "SP-X miss", and "SP-X miss" variation pattern. A predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value for the variation pattern of "-Y is off."

[For jackpot] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of "Normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "SP-X jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern of "SP-Y jackpot", the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is A predetermined random value within the range that can be taken is assigned as the determination value.

The fluctuation patterns of "Non-reach out", "Normal reach out", and "Normal reach jackpot" are the same as those explained in the fluctuation pattern in the normal mode, so their explanation will be omitted here.

<Liss/Jackpot with super reach>
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern with super reach ("SP-X misses", "SP-Y misses", "SP-X jackpot", "SP-Y jackpot"), is it possible to win a "jackpot"? The final display result is fixed and stopped by executing the super reach effect that informs whether or not the result is reached. The fluctuation pattern of "SP-Y is wrong" and the fluctuation pattern of "SP-Y jackpot" is the same as the fluctuation pattern of "SP-B is wrong" and "SP-B1 jackpot" mentioned above. The explanation will be omitted here.

(Extermination SP production)
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns that involve super reach, in the variation patterns of "SP-X is off" and "SP-X jackpot", the variation display result is a decoration that indicates that the variation display result will be "lost" after the reach state is established. The symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary failure notification), then develops into a super reach, and attacks to annihilate a group of enemy characters Y (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "enemy character Y group"). Accordingly, a super reach performance (hereinafter referred to as "extermination SP performance" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not the player has won the "jackpot" (see FIG. 133-68).

Here, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-X misses", an effect in which enemy character Y group remains (residual effect) is executed (see Figure 133-68 (3A)), and the final display result is "SP-X misses". ” will be announced. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is "SP-X jackpot", a production (annihilation production) to annihilate enemy character Y is executed (see Figure 133-68 (3B)), and the final display result is "Jackpot". It will be announced that something will happen.

FIG. 133-5 is a variation pattern determination table in the powerful RUSH mode. As shown in Figure 133-5 (A), in the [for miss] variation pattern judgment table in powerful RUSH mode, out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, 1 to 950 are "non-reach miss". , 951 to 980 are assigned to each variation pattern: "Normal reach is off," 981 to 985 is "SP-X is off," and 986 to 997 is "SP-Y is off."

In addition, as shown in Figure 133-5 (B), in the [Jackpot] fluctuation pattern judgment table in Powerful RUSH mode, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 500 are “Normal reach jackpot”. ”, 501 to 600 are assigned to the “SP-X jackpot”, and 601 to 997 are assigned to the “SP-Y jackpot”.

[Scratch processing of production sound]
In this embodiment, it is possible to reproduce and output performance sounds (music, speech sounds, sound effects, error notification sounds, etc.) from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this embodiment, it is possible to perform special processing (referred to as "scratch processing" in this example) on a part of the effect sound and to reproduce and output the result. Scratching is when an analog record is played back on a turntable, and the record is forcibly moved by hand to drastically change the playback speed, producing a special sound (hereinafter referred to as "scratch sound"). It refers to the technique of creating. Scratch processing does not involve using an analog record, but by using the sound data (for example, waveform data such as a Wave file) in the storage part of the audio control board, to create a sound similar to the scratch sound on an analog record. This is a process that is generated in a pseudo manner. Hereinafter, the scratch processing will be referred to as "scratch processing" as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the scratch process generates a pseudo effect sound similar to the scratch sound by continuously playing and outputting the same sound data (hereinafter referred to as "scratch sound data") at short intervals. let

Scratch sound data is sound data that includes sounds of one or more sounds (speech sounds, sound effects, music sounds, etc.), and the sounds of the initial letters of words (one or more sounds) related to various effects that appear in this gaming machine. This is sound data consisting of. In this embodiment, the scratch sound data is sound data that includes the sound of one sound (speech sound, sound effect, music sound, etc.), and is one sound of the initial letter of a word related to various effects that appear in this gaming machine. It is sound data composed of eyes.

For example, it is possible to perform scratch processing on sound data corresponding to the initial letter (first syllable) of the word "V stock" related to the V stock performance described below. In addition, the sound data corresponding to the initial letter (first syllable) of the word "Welcome" in part of the lyrics related to song X among the songs played and output during the jackpot game described later will be scratched. It is possible to perform processing.

In this embodiment, scratch processing is not performed on sound data of a word in which the same sound (second sound and subsequent sounds) as the sound of the initial letter of the word (first sound) is repeated multiple times or more. For example, the scratch process is not performed on the sound data corresponding to the initial letter (first sound) "o" of the word "big hit". If scratch processing is performed on the sound data corresponding to the first letter (one sound) of the word "Oatari", the first sound "O" will be scratched and the playback will be output. This is to prevent the player from being confused as to whether the second note "O" is being played back or output.

Note that the scratch process is not limited to the above embodiment, and the scratch process may be performed on a word in which the same sound (second sound and subsequent sounds) as the sound of the initial letter of the word (first sound) is repeated multiple times or more. For example, after executing scratch processing on the sound data corresponding to the first letter (first syllable) "o" of the word "Oatari" and reproducing and outputting "o" four times in a row, The second note "o" may be reproduced and output.

In this embodiment, the effect sound (sound data) is composed of a first effect sound (first sound data) and a second effect sound (second sound data) that is played back and output after the first effect sound. There may be cases where In this embodiment, the number of sounds included in the first effect sound is smaller than the number of sounds included in the second effect sound. For example, the sound data corresponding to the word "V stock" is the first sound data corresponding to the initial letter "bu" (one sound), and the second and subsequent letters "istok" (four sounds). and second sound data corresponding to. In this case, it is possible to perform scratch processing and playback output on the first sound effect "B" and then play and output the second sound effect "Istock" without performing scratch processing. be.

In this embodiment, in the scratch process, the number of consecutive times of the same sound data (scratch sound data) is set to two or more times. For example, in the scratch process, depending on which effect is executed, the number of consecutive scratch sound data may be set to two times or four times.

In this embodiment, the scratch sound data may be reproduced and output at any interval. For example, when scratch sound data is played back and output four times in a row (that is, when there are three playback output intervals), the scratch sound data may be played back and output at 0 second intervals all three times, and all three times the scratch sound data is played back and output at 0 second intervals. It may be played back and output at 1 second intervals, the first time at 1 second intervals, the second time at 2 second intervals, the third time at 3 second intervals, the first time at 3 second intervals, and the second time at 2 second intervals. The data may be reproduced and output at intervals of seconds, and the third time at intervals of one second. Hereinafter, the reproduction output interval of scratch sound data will be referred to as a "scratch interval".

In this way, by continuously reproducing and outputting the scratch sound data at short intervals, it is possible to give the player an effect (refrain effect) that leaves an impression and memory of the sound effect in which the scratch process has been performed, and The production effect can be improved. Furthermore, the greater the number of consecutive scratch sound data, the better the refrain effect.

Note that the sound data to be subjected to the scratch processing is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be sound data composed of two or more sounds. For example, after performing scratch processing on the sound data corresponding to "buoy" (first and second notes) of "V (buoy) stock" and outputting it, scratching is performed on "stock". The data may be reproduced and output without performing any processing.

[Example of playback output of scratch-processed production sound]
FIG. 133-6(A) is a specific example of the effect sound type table in this embodiment. The sound effect type table is a storage area for reproducing sound data, and is provided in a storage section included in the audio control board.

As shown in Figure 133-6 (A), as a performance sound type, a performance sound corresponding to the word "powerful" is stored, and this performance sound is the first performance sound corresponding to the initial letter "pa". It consists of a sound and a second effect sound corresponding to the second and subsequent characters "waffle".

FIG. 133-6(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reproduction output when the effect sound in this embodiment is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

FIG. 133-6 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a playback output when the effect sound for which the scratch processing is not performed in this embodiment is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 133-6 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound "powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R without executing the scratch process. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first performance sound "Pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R, and reproduces and outputs the second performance sound "Waffle" from the speakers 8L and 8R without executing the scratch process.

FIG. 133-6 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reproduction output when the effect sound subjected to the scratch processing in this embodiment is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 133-6 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the scratch process and reproduces and outputs the effect sound "powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the production control CPU 120 executes a scratch process to reproduce and output the first production sound "Pa" four times in a row from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputs the first production sound and the second production sound "Powerful" from the speakers. Play and output from 8L and 8R.

Further, when the effect sound is scratch-processed and reproduced and output, other effect devices may also perform the effect in conjunction with each other. For example, when executing the scratch process and playing and outputting the first effect sound "Pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the game effect lamp 9 emits light (blinks) in time with the playback output timing of the first effect sound. ). In addition, when executing the scratch process and reproducing and outputting the first effect sound "Pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the light guide plate provided in the image display device 5 is set to the timing at which the first effect sound is played back and output. The light may be emitted (flashing) according to the time. Furthermore, when executing the scratch process and reproducing and outputting the first effect sound "Pa" four times in a row from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is also possible to vibrate the stick controller 31A in accordance with the playback output timing of the first effect sound. good.

[Impact of sound]
In this embodiment, the "impact of sound" refers to the momentum when the playback of audio starts (hereinafter referred to as "start" or "rise" as appropriate). Hereinafter, this will be referred to as "impact" as appropriate. 133-7 (1) to (3) show graphs in which the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is output volume (%).

As shown in FIG. 133-7 (1), the portion where the audio output volume reaches from the minimum value (0%) to the maximum value (100%) becomes the impact. Hereinafter, the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the audio output volume will be appropriately referred to as an "output absolute value." Further, the period from the minimum value (0%) to the maximum value (100%) of the audio output volume is referred to as "impact time", and in this example, the impact time is the period from t0 to t1.

<Strength of sound impact>
In this embodiment, the impact is
IM=output absolute value/impact time...(Formula 1)
It is possible to determine the strength of the impact based on the IM value (hereinafter referred to as "impact value" as appropriate) calculated by the formula. The larger the impact value, the stronger the impact, and the smaller the impact value, the weaker the impact. That is, the impact value is the same as the slope of the graph shown in FIG. 133-7.

As shown in equation (1), the larger the output absolute value, the larger the impact value, and the smaller the output absolute value, the smaller the impact value (not shown). For example, when the value of impact time is constant, the case where output absolute value: maximum value (100%) - minimum value (0%) = 100 is better than output absolute value: maximum value (50%) - minimum value ( The impact value is larger than when 0%)=50.

Also, as shown in equation (1), the smaller the impact time value, the larger the impact value (see Figure 133-7 (2A)), and the larger the impact time value, the larger the impact value. becomes smaller (see Figure 133-7 (2B)). For example, when the absolute output value is constant, impact time: tb (1) - t0 (0) = 1 is better than impact time: ta (10) - t0 (0) = 10. , the impact value becomes larger.

Note that the stronger the impact (the larger the impact value), the more powerful and vigorous the sound will be, and the weaker the impact (the smaller the impact value), the more gentle and gentle the sound will be. gives the impression of a unique voice.

[Production sound type table]
FIGS. 133-8 and 133-9 are explanatory diagrams of specific examples of the effect sound type table in this embodiment. The performance sound type table is a storage area for reproducing sound data, and is provided in a storage section included in the audio control board. In FIGS. 133-8 and 133-9, "CH", "effect sound type", "effect sound composition", "playback output content", "impact strength", and "related effects, related status" are provided. ing. In addition, in the explanation of FIGS. 133-8 and 133-9, various effects, effect modes, etc. that are not explained in detail will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 133-8 and 133-9, the effect sound type table is composed of 42 channels "CH01" to "CH42".

Here, the sound data of the effect sounds output by the speakers 8L and 8R includes "stereo data" which has a relatively large amount of data, and "monaural data" which has a relatively small amount of data. In this example, the music is "stereo data", and the performance sounds other than the music (dialogue sounds, sound effects, error notification sounds) are "monaural data".

Note that in the audio reproduction area, a "pair CH" may or may not be configured by two consecutive channels for storing "stereo data." In this case, "monaural data" is stored in one channel of this "pair CH".

<Production sound related to production>
In this embodiment, the sound data related to the performance (performance sound) is set to be reproduced and output at any of "CH01" to "CH40". Note that the sound data of the effect sound is stored in a designated channel from "CH01" to "CH40" when the time comes to reproduce and output the effect sound, and is deleted from that channel when the playback ends.

"CH01" includes production sound type: "Song A", production sound composition: "Music data A", playback output content: "Singing sound A", "Accompaniment sound A", impact strength: "Weak", related production , Related status: "BGM for powerful RUSH" and "BGM for jackpot round" (music that can be selected when not in V stock) are stored.

"CH02" includes production sound type: "Song B", production sound composition: "Music data B", playback output content: "Singing sound B", "Accompaniment sound B", impact strength: "Weak", and related productions. , Related status: "BGM for powerful RUSH" and "BGM for jackpot round" (music that can be selected when not in V stock) are stored.

"CH03" includes production sound type: "Music C", production sound composition: "Music data C", playback output content: "Singing sound C", "Accompaniment sound C", impact strength: "Weak", related production , Related status: "BGM for powerful RUSH" and "BGM for jackpot round" (music that can be selected when not in V stock) are stored.

"CH04" includes production sound type: "Song X", production sound composition: "Music data X1", playback output content: "Singing sound X1", "Accompaniment sound X1", impact strength: "Strong", related production , Related status: "BGM for powerful RUSH" and "BGM for jackpot round" (music that can be selected when V stock) is stored.

"CH05" includes production sound type: "Song X", production sound composition: "Music data X2", playback output content: "Singing sound X2", "Accompaniment sound X2", impact strength: "Weak", related production , Related status: "BGM for powerful RUSH" and "BGM for jackpot round" (music that can be selected when V stock) is stored.

"CH06" includes production sound type: "Production sound A "buoy stock"" production sound composition: "1st production sound A" (1st production sound A1: 10R jackpot compatible, 1st production sound A2: 3R jackpot Compatible), Playback output content: "1st dialogue sound A 'bu'", "1st sound effect A" (1st sound effect A1, 1st sound effect A2), Impact strength: "strong", Related production, Related Status: "1st V stock performance" is memorized.

"CH07" includes production sound type: "Production sound A "Buy stock"" production sound composition: "Second production sound A" (Second production sound A1: 10R jackpot compatible, 2nd production sound A2: 3R jackpot Compatible), Playback output content: “Second line sound A “Istok””, “Second sound effect A” (Second sound effect A1, Second sound effect A2), Impact strength: “Weak”, Related effects, Related state: "1st V stock performance" is stored.

"CH08" includes production sound type: "Production sound B", playback output content: "Sound effect B", impact strength: "Strong", related production, related status: "CU production (first movable body production)" is memorized.

"CH09" includes production sound type: "Production sound C1 "Complete"" production sound composition: "First production sound C1", playback output content: "First dialogue sound C1 "Ko" (Character B voice)" , "first sound effect C", impact strength: "strong", related effects, related state: "first normal jackpot notification effect" are stored.

For "CH10", production sound type: "Production sound C1 "Complete"", production sound composition: "Second production sound C1", playback output content: "Second line sound C1 "Complete" (Character B voice)" , "Second sound effect C", Impact strength: "Weak", Related production, Related state: "First normal jackpot notification production" are stored.

For "CH11", production sound type: "Production sound C2 "Victory"", production sound composition: "1st production sound C2", playback output content: "1st dialogue sound C2 "V" (Character A voice)" , "first sound effect C", impact strength: "strong", related effects, related state: "second normal jackpot notification effect (second movable body effect)" are stored.

"CH12" includes production sound type: "Production sound C2 "Victory"" production sound composition: "Second production sound C2", playback output content: "Second line sound C2 "Victory" (Character A voice)" , "Second sound effect C", Impact strength: "Weak", Related performance, Related state: "Second normal jackpot notification performance (Second movable body performance)" are stored.

"CH13" includes production sound type: "Production sound C3 "Congratulation"" production sound composition: "First production sound C3", playback output content: "First dialogue sound C3 "Ko" (Character A voice )", "first sound effect C", impact strength: "strong", related effects, related state: "third normal jackpot notification effect (third movable body effect)'' are stored.

"CH14" includes production sound type: "Production sound C3 "Congratulation", production sound composition: "Second production sound C3", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound C3 "Congratulation" ( ``Character A voice)'', ``Second sound effect C'', Impact strength: ``Weak'', Related effects, Related state: ``Third normal jackpot notification effect (Third movable body effect)'' are stored.

"CH15" includes production sound type: "Production sound D1 "Victory"" production sound composition: "First production sound D1", playback output content: "First dialogue sound D1 "V" (Character A voice)" , "1st sound effect D", Impact strength: "Strong", Related production, Related state: "Jackpot notification performance when hitting the first right", "Special jackpot notification performance when hitting the first right" (Powerful RUSH: Yumemu mode) is memorized.

"CH16" includes production sound type: "Production sound D1 "Victory"" production sound composition: "Second production sound D1", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound D1 "Victory" (Character A voice)" , "Second sound effect D", Impact strength: "Weak", Related productions, Related states: "Jackpot notification performance when hitting the first right", "Special jackpot notification performance when hitting the first right" (Powerful RUSH: Yumemu mode) is memorized.

For "CH17", production sound type: "Production sound D2 "Victory"", production sound composition: "1st production sound D2", playback output content: "1st dialogue sound D2 "V" (Character B voice)" , "1st sound effect D", Impact strength: "Strong", Related production, Related state: "2nd right hit jackpot notification performance", "2nd right hit special jackpot notification performance" (Powerful RUSH: Nana mode) is memorized.

"CH18" includes production sound type: "Production sound D2 "Victory"" production sound composition: "Second production sound D2", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound D2 "Victory" (Character B voice)" , "Second sound effect D", Impact strength: "Weak", Related production, Related status: "2nd right hit jackpot notification performance", "2nd right hit special jackpot notification performance" (Powerful RUSH: Nana mode) is memorized.

For "CH19", production sound type: "Production sound D3 "Victory"", production sound composition: "1st production sound D3", playback output content: "1st dialogue sound D3 "V" (Character C voice)" , "1st sound effect D", Impact strength: "Strong", Related production, Related state: "Jackpot notification performance when hitting the 3rd right", "Special jackpot notification performance when hitting the 3rd right" (Powerful RUSH: Jam mode ) is memorized.

"CH20" includes production sound type: "Production sound D3 "Victory"" production sound composition: "Second production sound D3", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound D3 "Victory" (Character C voice)" , "Second sound effect D", Impact strength: "Weak", Related production, Related status: "Jackpot notification performance when hitting the 3rd right", "Special jackpot notification performance when hitting the 3rd right" (Powerful RUSH: Jam mode ) is memorized.

"CH21" includes production sound type: "Production sound EA "Ready Go"" production sound composition: "First production sound E", playback output content: "First dialogue sound E "Ready", "First "Sound effect E", impact strength: "weak", related production, related state: "change precursor production: success pattern" are stored.

"CH22" includes production sound type: "Production sound EA "Ready Go"" production sound composition: "Second production sound EA", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound EA "Go"", "Second production sound EA" "Sound effect EA", impact strength: "strong", related production, related state: "change precursor production: success pattern" are stored.

"CH23" includes production sound type: "Production sound EA "Ready Go"" production sound composition: "Third production sound EA", playback output content: "Third dialogue sound EA "Go", "Third "Sound effect EA", impact strength: "weak", related production, related state: "change precursor production: success pattern" are stored.

"CH24" includes production sound type: "Production sound EB "Lady..."" production sound composition: "First production sound E", playback output content: "First dialogue sound E "Lady", " "First sound effect E", impact strength: "weak", related production, related state: "change precursor production: failure pattern" are stored.

"CH25" includes production sound type: "Production sound EB "Ready..."" production sound composition: "Second production sound EB", playback output content: "Second effect sound EB", impact strength: " "Weak", related performance, related state: "change precursor performance: failure pattern" is stored.

"CH26" includes the production sound type: "Production sound F "3.2.1 start", production sound composition: "1st production sound F1", playback output content: "1st dialogue sound F1 "1 (One )'', ``first sound effect F1'', impact strength: ``weak'', related effects, and related status: ``time-saving rush effect'' are stored.

“CH27” includes the production sound type: “Production sound F “3.2.1 start””, the production sound composition: “1st production sound F2”, and the playback output content: “1st dialogue sound F2 “2 (2 )'', ``first sound effect F2'', impact strength: ``weak'', related effects, and related status: ``time-saving effect'' are stored.

“CH28” includes the production sound type: “Production sound F “3.2.1 start””, the production sound composition: “1st production sound F3”, and the playback output content: “1st dialogue sound F3 “3 (3 )'', ``first sound effect F3'', impact strength: ``weak'', related effects, and related status: ``time-saving rush effect'' are stored.

For "CH29", production sound type: "Production sound F "3.2.1 start"" Production sound composition: "Second production sound F" Playback output content: "Second dialogue sound F "S" , "Second sound effect F", Impact strength: "Strong", Related effects, Related state: "Time-saving effect" are stored.

For "CH30", production sound type: "Production sound F "3.2.1 start"" Production sound composition: "3rd production sound F" Playback output content: "3rd dialogue sound F "Tart"" , "Third sound effect F", impact strength: "weak", related production, related state: "time-saving rush production" are stored.

"CH31" includes production sound type: "Production sound G "Powerful"" production sound composition: "First production sound G", playback output content: "First dialogue sound G "Pa"", "First effect "Sound G", impact strength: "strong", related production, related state: "story SP development production" are stored.

"CH32" includes production sound type: "Production sound G "Powerful"" production sound composition: "Second production sound G", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound G "Waffle"", "Second effect "Sound G", impact strength: "weak", related production, related state: "story SP development production" are stored.

"CH33" includes production sound type: "Production sound H "Kurae", playback output content: "Serif sound H "Kurae", "Sound effect H", impact strength: "Strong", related production, Related state: "When the operation unit is operated during annihilation SP" is stored.

For "CH34", production sound type: "Production sound I1 "Press"", playback output content: "Serif sound I1 "Press" (Character A voice)", "Sound effect I1", impact strength: "Strong", Related performance, related state: "Operation promotion display" is stored.

For "CH35", production sound type: "Production sound I2 "Press"", playback output content: "Serif sound I2 "Press" (Character B voice)", "Sound effect I2", impact strength: "Strong", Related performance, related state: "Operation promotion display" is stored.

For "CH36", production sound type: "Production sound I3 "Press"", playback output content: "Serif sound I3 "Press" (Character C voice)", "Sound effect I3", impact strength: "Strong", Related performance, related state: "Operation promotion display" is stored.

"CH37" includes production sound type: "Production sound I4 "Press"", playback output content: "Serif sound I4 "Press" (3 character voices of Character A, Character B, and Character C)", "Sound effect I4'', impact strength: ``strong'', related effects, related state: ``operation promotion display'' are stored.

"CH38" includes the production sound type: "Production sound J "Fever"", production sound composition: "1st production sound J", playback output content: "1st dialogue sound J "Fi", "1st effect "Sound J", impact strength: "strong", related production, and related status: "resurrection production" are stored.

"CH39" includes production sound type: "Production sound J "Fever"", production sound composition: "Second production sound J", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound J "(Fever)", " "Second sound effect J", impact strength: "weak", related production, related state: "resurrection production" are stored.

"CH40" stores performance sound type: "performance sound K", playback output content: "sound effect K", impact strength: "strong", related production, and related status: "premier production". In the present embodiment, in the variable display, it is possible to perform a premium performance that notifies the user that the display result is a "big hit" at a timing that should not be notified (at the start of the variation, when the reach is established, etc.).

<Error notification sound>
The error notification sound in this embodiment includes an abnormal winning error sound and a magnetic detection error sound. The abnormal winning error sound (error notification sound A) is an error sound that is detected when a game ball wins at a time other than a predetermined time, such as when the special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is opened. The magnetic detection error sound (error notification sound B) is an error sound that is detected when a magnetic detection sensor connected to the main board 11 detects a magnetic force of a predetermined value or more.

Here, the error notification sound has a higher priority to be notified to the player than other performance sounds such as music. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 133-9, "CH41" and "CH42" are secured as fixed channels for reproducing each error notification sound.

"CH41" stores performance sound type: "Error notification sound A", playback output content: "Error sound effect A", impact strength: "Strong", related performance, related status: "Abnormal winning" .

"CH42" stores performance sound type: "Error notification sound B", playback output content: "Error sound effect B", impact strength: "Strong", related performance, related state: "Magnetic detection" .

If any of these errors is detected, a specific channel is specified for the error notification sound based on the instruction to output the error notification sound for the error that occurred, and the specified channel is In the channel, monaural data of the error notification sound is reproduced and output.

In addition, each channel from "CH01" to "CH42" in the audio playback area shown in Figures 133-8 and 133-9 has "basic volume", "channel setting ratio", "volume value", and "output volume". is set.

The "basic volume" is a value indicating the loudness of the sound data itself. The basic volume can be set according to the priority to be notified to the player. In this example, the basic volume can be set between "1" and "5". The larger the value of the basic volume, the higher the sound pressure level of the output sound (the output sound is emphasized).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 133-8 and 133-9, the basic volume differs depending on the type of sound effect. Specifically, the basic volume of "error notification sound A (abnormal winning)" and "error notification sound B (magnetism detection)" is the maximum, "5". On the other hand, the basic volume of the sound data of the performance sound related to the performance is "4" or less ("3" or "4"). This is because the effect sound is less likely to be directly related to fraudulent activity by the player and has a lower priority in notifying the player than abnormal winning errors and magnetic detection errors.

Further, among the sound data of the effect sound, the basic volume differs depending on the type of effect sound. In this example, the basic volume of the production sounds related to the songs "CH01" to "CH05" is "3". On the other hand, the basic volume of production sounds related to productions other than the music "CH06" to "CH40" is "4".

Note that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a plurality of basic volumes may be set for the sound data of the effect sound.

For example, "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as the basic volume of the [first effect sound A] "b" of the effect sound A. When [first effect sound A] is played back with scratch processing four times in a row, [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 1) for the first time and [first effect sound A] for the second time. (Basic volume: 2), the third [1st effect sound A] (basic volume: 3), the fourth [1st effect sound A] (basic volume: 4), and the basic volume increases as the number of outputs increases. The output volume may also be increased. Also, the first [1st production sound A] (basic volume: 4), the second [1st production sound A] (basic volume: 3), and the third [1st production sound A] (basic volume: 2) As the number of outputs increases from the fourth [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 1), the basic volume may become smaller and the output volume may also become smaller.

It can also be applied to production sounds related to music, and for example, "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as the basic volume of [music data X1] of music X. When [music data X1] is played back and output with scratch processing four times in a row, the first [music data , the third [music data X1] (basic volume: 3), the fourth [music data It's okay. Also, the first [music data X1] (basic volume: 4), the second [music data X1] (basic volume: 3), the third [music data [Music data X1] (basic volume: 1) Each time the number of outputs increases, the basic volume becomes smaller and the output volume also becomes smaller.

“Channel setting ratio” is the volume value specified for each channel. The channel setting ratio can be set for each channel from a maximum volume of "1" which is 100% of the reference output volume to a total mute of "0" which is 0%.

The “volume value” is the upper limit value (volume value) of the volume that can be output by the pachinko game machine 1. In this example, the master volume can be set between "1" and "5". This volume value can be set to any value by the player performing a predetermined operation (for example, operating the up and down buttons of the performance keys provided in the pachinko game machine 1).

"Output volume" is the volume of sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output volume is determined based on the "basic volume", "channel setting ratio", and "volume value" of the sound data. The output volume is a numerical value obtained by multiplying the "basic volume", the "channel setting ratio", and the "volume value". In this example, the output volume can be set between "0" and "25".

As shown in FIG. 133-9, error notification sounds with high priority to be notified to the player are reproduced and output using fixed "CH41" and "CH42". These fixed channels "CH41" and "CH42" are reproduced and output with the output volume set to a fixed value of "5", which is the maximum value, unlike the other channels ("CH01" to "CH40"). Specifically, in "CH41" and "CH42", the volume value is always set to the maximum value without accepting a predetermined operation by the player (for example, operating the up and down buttons of the performance key provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is fixed at "5".

<Fade, Mute>
Next, fade (fade out, fade in) and mute, which are processes for changing the "output volume", will be explained. These fade-outs, fade-ins, and mutes are executed by changing the "output volume" in conjunction with changing the "channel setting ratio" shown in FIGS. 133-8 and 133-9.

Here, in the fade-out, the output volume is gradually decreased by gradually decreasing the channel setting ratio of the performance sound being played and output from "1 (100%)" to "0 (0%)". A process of reducing the number to "0" is executed. In addition, during fade-in, the output volume is gradually increased by gradually increasing the channel setting ratio of the production sound being played back from "0 (0%)" to "1 (100%)". Processing is performed to increase the value to the maximum value.

For example, change the channel setting ratio of the production sound (second production sound) played after the scratch-processed production sound (first production sound A) from "1 (100%)" to "0 (0%)". It is also possible to gradually decrease and fade out.

In addition, when muting, by executing the process of setting the channel setting ratio of the production sound being played back to "0 (0%)", the output volume of the production sound being played back is set to "0". executed. Note that while the mute is being executed, the output volume is "0", but the performance sound itself is being reproduced. Note that if an error notification sound with a high priority to be notified to the player is output, all of the other channels "CH01" to "CH40" may be muted.

In this way, with fade-out, the output volume of the production sound being played back gradually decreases and finally reaches "0" (for example, 1 (100%) → 0.5 (50%) → 0 ( On the other hand, in mute mode, the output volume of the performance sound being reproduced and output immediately becomes "0" (for example, from 1 (100%) to 0 (0%)). That is, muting is a control that reduces the output volume of the performance sound (to zero) in a shorter time than fade-out, and is a control that reduces the output volume per unit of time to a high degree.

[Complementary color contrast]
In this embodiment, when the display colors of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are in a complementary color relationship, the saturation of each display color becomes stronger and the phenomenon appears even more vivid is referred to as "complementary color contrast". ” (hereinafter appropriately referred to as “complementary color inversion”). Complementary colors are colors that are opposite to each other when expressed on a hue wheel, which will be described later, and include black with respect to white (white with respect to black) in addition to the colors on the hue wheel.

<Hue wheel>
A hue wheel is a ring-shaped arrangement of hues, and is one of the methods used to systematize colors. Colors are perceived as changing continuously, such as red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and violet, depending on the wavelength of light. A continuous ring-shaped arrangement of these is called a hue ring.

In order to convey colors accurately, a regular color notation method is required. In this embodiment, this color display system is called a color order system (color system), and can be represented by a hue wheel. As shown in FIG. 133-10 (1), the color system in this embodiment includes six basic hues (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and violet), and intermediate hues (red-orange, red-orange, and purple). It is composed of 12 hues including yellow-orange, yellow-green, blue-green, blue-violet, and red-violet).

In this embodiment, the colors that are complementary to the specific color on the hue wheel are the color on the opposite side of the hue wheel to the specific color, and its approximate colors (one color on each side). For example, colors that are complementary to yellow include violet, which is on the opposite side of yellow on the hue wheel, and its approximate colors (red-purple and blue-violet on both sides).

<Black and white>
In this embodiment, it is assumed that white and black, which are not included in the hue circle, are also complementary colors. As shown in FIG. 133-10(2), in this embodiment, the color that is complementary to white is black, and the color that is complementary to black is white.

Note that in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which complementary color contrast is used as a method of increasing the saturation of the displayed color of the image displayed on the image display device 5 to make it appear even more vivid, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. First, the following method may be used to increase the saturation of the display color of the image displayed on the image display device 5 and make the image appear more vivid.

- Brightness inversion Brightness inversion is a method of inverting the brightness and darkness of the displayed colors of an image. For example, bright areas of the display color become dark, and dark areas of the display color become bright.

- Gradation inversion Gradation inversion is a method in which the brightness and darkness of the displayed colors of an image are inverted. For example, the brightness is inverted and complementary colors are inverted.

[Movable body]
In this embodiment, a movable body YM, which is an accessory, is provided near the image display device 5 (at the upper center). The movable body YM is set to an initial position, a first operating position (a position where a part of the movable body overlaps with the area of the image display device 5), and a second operating position (the entire movable body overlaps) according to the control of the production control board 12. (a position overlapping the area of the image display device 5). Hereinafter, the first action position and the second action position will be appropriately referred to as "acting positions."

For example, the movable body YM operates as follows: initial position → first operating position → initial position, initial position → second operating position → initial position, initial position → first operating position → second operating position → It may operate from the initial position, or from the second operating position to the first operating position to the initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 133-11(1), when the movable body YM is at the initial position, the movable body YM is not located in front of the image display device 5. That is, in this embodiment, when the movable body YM is at the initial position, the structure is such that it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and does not affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It has become.

On the other hand, in the process of moving the movable body YM from the initial position to the production position (first operation position, second operation position), or when the movable body YM is in the production position, the movable body YM moves to the direction of the image display device 5. It is positioned at the front. That is, in this embodiment, when the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the production position or when the movable body YM is in the production position, the image overlaps the area of the image display device 5 and is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The configuration affects the visibility of images displayed.

As shown in FIG. 133-11 (2), when the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the first operation position or when the movable body YM is in the first operation position, the movable body YM moves to the image display device 5. It overlaps with the upper center area of the screen and affects the visibility of a part of the video displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 133-11 (3), when the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operation position or when the movable body YM is in the second operation position, the movable body YM moves to the image display device. The image overlaps with the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, and affects the visibility of a part of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the movable body YM is assumed to move to the performance position when a CU performance suggesting that the expectation level of a jackpot is high or a jackpot notification performance that notifies a jackpot is executed during the battle SP.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movable body YM has a regular hexagonal shape including a design imitating the ally character A. The ally character A of this movable body YM is a common character with the ally character A appearing in the super reach performance (in this example, the battle SP performance and the story SP performance).

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be explained. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the production mode when the first flag and the second flag, which will be described later, are not set is the [normal mode]. When the state is controlled to either the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) or the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) and the first flag described below is set, the production mode is [Challenge mode] ], the game state is controlled to either the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) or the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the second flag described later is set. The mode is set to [Rush Mode].

In the example of the game flow shown in Figure 133-12, a jackpot occurs when the performance mode is [Normal mode], and after the jackpot game state ends, the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled, and the [Challenge Mode] (Time saving 1 rotation + Holding 4 rotations) or [Rush mode] (Time saving 99 rotations + Holding 4 rotations) If a jackpot occurs, [Rush mode] (Time saving 7 rotations + Holding 4 rotations, or 99 rotations for time saving + 4 rotations for reservation), and if no jackpot occurs, the mode shifts to [normal mode].

(1) When the gaming state is controlled to be a normal state (low accuracy/low base state) and a first flag and a second flag, which will be described later, are not set, the production mode is set to [normal mode].

(2) In the above-mentioned state (1), when a variable display in which the display result is a "jackpot" is executed, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types of the first special symbol include "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", and (2A) as an example of production when the jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", The characters "BONUS" are displayed on the image display device 5 to inform that it is a 3R jackpot, and (2B) as an example of the production when the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", it is shown that it is a 10R jackpot. The words "MAX BONUS" to be notified are displayed on the image display device 5.

(3) When the above-mentioned (2A) jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", when the jackpot ends, the performance control CPU 120 sets the first flag (3A-I) and the gaming state is changed to the time-saving state ( (3A-II) When the first flag is set and the gaming state becomes the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) The effect mode is set to [ Challenge mode]. As an example of a performance when the performance mode is [Challenge Mode], the words "RUSH Challenge" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the performance mode will shift to [Challenge Mode].

In state (3), one variable display in the time-saving state in which all display results are "lost" and a pending memory (execution is pending (in this example, up to 4 When variable display) is executed, the state is controlled to state (1). In this example, when the state (3) is controlled to the state (1), the state is controlled to the state (1A) (the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

(4) When the jackpot ends when the jackpot type is (6A) "3R jackpot B" or (6B) "10R jackpot B", which will be described later, the production control CPU 120 sets the (4A-I) second flag is set, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), and seven variable displays are executed, and (4A-II) the second flag is set and the gaming state is normal. The suspended memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred at (4A-I) is controlled by the state (low accuracy/low base state). The presentation mode at the time of execution is [rush mode]. As an example of a performance when the performance mode is [Rush Mode], the words ``POWERFUL RUSH'' are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the performance mode will shift to [Rush Mode].

In state (4), all display results are "lost", 7 variable displays in the time saving state, and a pending memory (execution is pending (in this example, up to 4 When variable display) is executed, the state is controlled to state (1).

(5) When the above-mentioned (2B) jackpot type is "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and the jackpot ends, or when the jackpot is (6C) "10R jackpot A" described later, the performance control The second flag (5B-I) is set in the CPU 120, the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), and variable display is executed 99 times (1st rotation to 99th rotation). (5B-II), the second flag is set, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the hold corresponding to the starting winning that occurred at (5B-I) is set. The production mode when the memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (maximum of 4 in this example)) is executed is set to [rush mode] (with V stock).

Also, a jackpot when the above-mentioned (6A) jackpot type is "3R jackpot B" or (6B) "10R jackpot B" with the V stock flag (see Figure 133-47) described later set. When this is completed, control is performed as in (5B-I) and (5B-II) described above.

As an example of a production when the production mode is [Rush Mode] (with V stock), a rainbow-colored caption display indicating that the production mode is transitioning to [Rush Mode] (V stock) and the words "Powerful RUSH" are displayed. is displayed on the image display device 5.

In state (5), 99 variable displays in the time-saving state in which all display results are "lost" and pending memory (execution is pending (in this example, up to 4 When variable display) is executed, the state is controlled to state (1). However, in the present embodiment where a small hit occurs with a probability of about 1/7 in the variable display of the second special symbol, the state (5) where the time saving control number is 99 is the variable display of the second special symbol. When this is executed, it can be said that the jackpot via the next small win is substantially determined, so an example of control from state (5) to state (1) is not shown. .

(6) When the production mode is [Challenge Mode] (see (3)) or when the production mode is [Rush Mode] (see (4) and (5)), in any of the variable displays When the display result becomes a "big win" or "small win", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (including a jackpot game state via a small win). In this embodiment, when the display result is a "jackpot", the jackpot types of the second special symbol are "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", and the display result is "small hit". In this case, the jackpot types via small hit of the second special symbol include "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small hit".

(6A) As an example of the production when the jackpot type is "3R jackpot", the characters "BONUS" which essentially notify that it is a 3R jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5, and (6B) jackpot type As an example of production when is "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B" out of "10R jackpot", the words "MAX FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 10R jackpot. (6C) As an example of a performance when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot A" out of "10R jackpot", the words "VSTOCK BONUS" which essentially informs that it is a 10R jackpot are displayed on the image display device. It is displayed in 5. At this time, among the jackpot types of "10R time-saving jackpot", "10R jackpot A" in which the number of time-saving controls is 99 times, and "10R jackpot B" in which the number of time-saving controls is 7 times are set.

[Start winning performance decision process]
When a starting winning occurs, the CPU 103 sends a symbol designation command indicating the determination result of whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results, the determination result of the type of jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern among the winning determination results. A fluctuation category command that indicates the determination result of , and a pending memory number addition specification command (first pending memory number addition specification command, second pending memory number addition specification command) that specifies that the number of pending memories has increased by 1. It is transmitted to the control CPU 120.

FIG. 133-13 is a flowchart showing the start-up winning performance determination process. The performance control CPU 120 executes the start winning performance determination process in the pre-read notice setting process (step S161) of the performance control process shown in FIG.

In the start-winning performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first issues a set of start-win commands (for example, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and , the first or second pending storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S05TM1010).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a set of symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, and first or second reserved memory number addition designation commands are newly stored in the start winning command storage area. Determine whether or not. When the command at the time of one set of starting winnings is not newly received (step S05TM1010: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If a new command has been received for one set of starting winnings (step S05TM1010: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether a change pre-reading prohibition flag, which will be described later, is set (step S05TM1020). If the change pre-reading prohibition flag is set (step S05TM1020: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

In the present embodiment, the change pre-reading prohibition flag is set based on the fact that it has been determined that either the change performance (pending change performance, active change performance) described later or the R pending performance described below will be executed at least once or more. This is a type of flag that is set. Since the process of steps S05TM1030 to S05TM1070 is skipped by setting the change prefetching prohibition flag, change effects and R pending effects cannot be applied to the pending memory whose execution is pending or the active display currently being executed. It is possible to restrict the execution of the change performance or the R-retention performance that changes the pending display or active display with respect to the variable display corresponding to a new starting winning in a state that has been decided to be executed. This change pre-reading prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning performance determination process when the change pre-reading prohibition flag is set is completed.

If the change pre-reading prohibition flag is not set (step S05TM1020: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display based on the table for determining the final display mode of the active display (FIG. 133-14 (A). )) (step S05TM1030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and the active display based on the change pattern determination table (see FIG. 133-14 (B1) to FIG. 133-15 (B4)) (step S05TM1040). .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance type of the change performance, which will be described later, based on a table for determining the performance type of the change performance (see FIG. 133-16(A)) (step S05TM1050).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute a change precursor performance to be described later (step S05TM1060). If it is determined not to perform the change precursor effect (step S05TM1060: NO), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM1080.

If it is determined to execute the change precursor effect (step S05TM1060: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the R hold effect, and the table for determining whether to execute the R hold effect (FIG. 133- 16(B)) (step S05TM1070).

After step S05TM1070 or after step S05TM1060: NO, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has been decided to execute either the change performance or the R reservation performance (step S05TM1080).

If it is determined not to execute either the change performance or the R hold performance (step S05TM1080: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If it is determined to execute either the change effect or the R hold effect (step S05TM1080: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a change look-ahead counter (step S05TM1090), which will be described later, and sets a change look-ahead prohibition flag. is set (step S05TM1100), and the process is immediately terminated.

In this embodiment, a prefetch counter is set that indicates the number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch preview effect is executed. In this example, the prefetch counter that indicates the number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the change effect or the R hold effect among the prefetch preview effects is executed is referred to as a "change prefetch counter."

[Table referenced in process for determining performance at start-up winning]
FIGS. 133-14 to 133-16 are specific examples of tables that are referred to in any one of the starting winning performance determination processes. FIG. 133-14(A) is an example of an active display final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the active display final display mode in step S05TM1030. FIGS. 133-14 (B1) to 133-15 (B4) are examples of change pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining change patterns of the pending display and active display in step S05TM1040. FIG. 133-16(A) is an example of a performance type determination table for a changing performance that is referred to when determining the performance type of a changing performance in step S05TM1050. FIG. 133-16(B) is an example of an execution/non-execution determination table for the R pending effect that is referred to when determining whether to execute the R pending effect in step S05TM1070.

<Final display mode determination table for active display>
FIG. 133-14(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 133-14(A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display is any one of "normal mode", "blue mode", "red mode", and "gold mode". It can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects.

As shown in Figure 133-14 (A), if the judgment result at the time of the starting prize is "miss" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting prize is The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on (new pending memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 90%, and the blue mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 5%. ), and at a rate of 3% it becomes a red mode (displayed in a red circle), and at a rate of 2% it becomes a golden mode (displayed in a golden circle).

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "jackpot"), a variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) The final display mode of the active display corresponding to this is a normal mode at a rate of 75%, a blue mode at a rate of 6%, a red mode at a rate of 9%, and a golden mode at a rate of 10%.

In this way, the final display mode of the active display has the jackpot expectation level set in the relationship of normal mode<blue mode<red mode<gold mode.

<Change pattern determination table>
FIGS. 133-14 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 133-15 (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of change pattern determination tables for pending display and active display. When the number of pending memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to a starting prize, (i) the timing at which the n-th pending display corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the pending display area (at the time of starting winning (timing), (ii) the timing at which the pending display corresponding to the starting winning is shifted to a higher position (active display area side) in the pending display area (in the case of n≧2), and (iii) the At the timing when the pending display corresponding to the starting prize shifts to the active display area (the timing at which the active display corresponding to the starting winning is displayed), the display information corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (pending display or active display) may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In addition, in the explanation of FIGS. 133-14 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 133-15 (B3) and (B4), active shift means that the pending display shifts from the pending display area to the active display area. (As a result, an active display corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of determination at the time of starting winning is displayed).

In Figures 133-14 (B1) and (B2) and Figures 133-15 (B3) and (B4), the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. It shows how the information (pending display or active display) will be displayed. In the change pattern shown in the figure, "normal" indicates a normal mode with a white round display, "blue" indicates a blue mode with a blue circle display, and "red" indicates a blue mode with a blue circle display. "" indicates a red mode, which is a red round shape, and "golden" indicates a golden mode, which is a golden circle display.

([For 1 pending item] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of pending memories stored in the number of pending memories storage area is "1", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one pending item shown in FIG. 133-14 (B1). . A determination value is assigned to any of the change patterns 101 to 108 in accordance with the determined final display mode of active display.

The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display of the notice target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, a change pattern from normal to normal. be.

Similarly, the change pattern 102 is from normal to blue, the change pattern 103 is from blue to blue, the change pattern 104 is from blue to red, the change pattern 105 is from red to red, the change pattern 106 is from blue to gold, and the change pattern 107 is red →Gold color change pattern 108 is a gold color → gold color change pattern.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, "miss", "big hit", or "small hit"), the final display mode of the determined active display is In the case of the normal mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the determination value is set so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 at 30%, and the change pattern 103 at a rate of 30%. has been allocated.

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is a red mode, the change pattern 101 is 20%, the change pattern 102 is 20%, the change pattern 103 is 20%, the change pattern 104 is 20%, the change pattern The determination values are allocated such that 105 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Furthermore, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 65%, and the change patterns 102 to 108 are determined at a rate of 5% each. It is.

([For 2 pending items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of pending memories stored in the number of pending memories storage area is "2", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for two pending items shown in FIG. 133-14 (B2). . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 201 to 211 in accordance with the determined final display mode of active display.

Change pattern 201 is such that the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, then the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display remains unchanged in the normal mode, that is, a change pattern from normal to normal to normal.

Similarly, the change pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, the change pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, the change pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, the change pattern 205 is normal → blue red, the change pattern 206 is blue → Blue → red, change pattern 207 is blue → red → red, change pattern 208 is red → red → red change pattern, change pattern 209 is blue → red → gold change pattern, change pattern 210 is red → gold → gold The change pattern 211 is a change pattern from gold to gold to gold.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, "miss", "big hit", or "small hit"), the final display mode of the determined active display is In the case of the normal mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that each of the change patterns 201 to 204 is determined at a rate of 25%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is a red mode, the determination values are allocated so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 30% and the change patterns 202 to 208 are determined at a rate of 10% each. It is.

Furthermore, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the golden mode, the determination values are allocated so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the change patterns 202 to 211 are determined at a rate of 5% each. It is.

([For 3 pending items] Change pattern determination table)
If the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory number storage area is "3", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 3 pending items shown in FIG. 133-15 (B3). . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 301 to 309 in accordance with the determined final display mode of active display.

In the change pattern 301, after displaying the pending display of the preview target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the preview target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, and the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, a change pattern of normal→normal→normal→normal.

Similarly, the change pattern 302 is normal → normal → blue → blue, the change pattern 303 is normal → blue → blue → blue, the change pattern 304 is blue → blue → blue → blue, and the change pattern 305 is normal → blue → red →red, change pattern 306 is blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 307 is blue → red → red → red, change pattern 308 is red → red → red → red, change pattern 309 is gold → gold → It is a gold to gold change pattern.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, "miss", "big hit", or "small hit"), the final display mode of the determined active display is In the case of the normal mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Furthermore, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that each of the change patterns 301 to 304 is determined at a rate of 25%.

Furthermore, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is a red mode, the determination values are allocated such that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change patterns 302 to 308 are each determined at a rate of 10%. It is.

Furthermore, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the golden mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 60% and the change patterns 302 to 309 are determined at a rate of 5% each. It is.

([For 4 pending items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory number storage area is "4", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 4 pending items shown in FIG. 133-15 (B4). . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 401 to 413 in accordance with the determined final display mode of active display.

In the change pattern 401, after displaying the pending display of the preview target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the preview target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. At the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in the normal mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal mode. This is a change pattern that does not change as it is, that is, a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 402 is normal → normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 403 is normal → normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 404 is normal → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 405 is blue → blue → blue → blue → blue The change pattern 406 is normal → normal → blue → red → red, the change pattern 407 is normal → blue → blue → red → red, and the change pattern 408 is normal → blue → red → red → Red, change pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, change pattern 412 is red → The change pattern 413, which is a change pattern of red → red → red → red, is a change pattern of gold → gold → gold → gold → gold.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, "miss", "big hit", or "small hit"), the final display mode of the determined active display is In the case of the normal mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that each of the change patterns 401 to 405 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Furthermore, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the determination values are allocated so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 12% and the change patterns 402 to 412 are determined at a rate of 8% each. It is.

Furthermore, in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the golden mode, the determination values are allocated such that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 40%, and the change patterns 402 to 413 are determined at a rate of 5% each. It is.

[Production type determination table for change production]
FIG. 133-16(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production type determination table for a change production. As shown in FIG. 133-16(A), in this embodiment, the performance types of the change performance are "normal change performance (change precursor performance: none)", "special change performance (change precursor performance: success pattern)" ”, “No change performance (change precursor performance: failure pattern)”, and “No change performance (change precursor performance: none)”, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these. It is. Note that the normal change performance, special change performance, and change precursor performance (success pattern, failure pattern) will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 133-16(A), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) is the normal mode, and the change pattern is the change pattern 101, 201, 301. , or 401, the performance type of the change performance is determined at a rate of 2% for no change performance (change precursor performance: failure pattern) and 98% for no change performance (change precursor performance: none). Judgment values are assigned so that

In addition, if the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) is the normal mode, and the change pattern is not one of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the change As the performance type of the performance, determination values are assigned such that no change performance (change precursor performance: none) is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, if the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize (new pending memory) is a blue mode, no matter which change pattern the change pattern is, as the production type of the change production, The determination values are assigned so that the normal change performance (change precursor performance: none) is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, if the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize (new pending memory) is a red mode, and the change pattern is any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, As for the performance type of change performance, judgment values are assigned so that normal change performance (change precursor performance: none) is determined at a rate of 30% and special change performance (change precursor performance: success pattern) is determined at a rate of 70%. .

In addition, if the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) is a red mode, and the change pattern is not one of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the change As the performance type of the performance, determination values are assigned such that a normal change performance (change precursor performance: none) is determined at a rate of 100%.

Furthermore, the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize winning (new pending memory) is a golden mode, and the change pattern is any one of change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401. In this case, the judgment value is assigned so that the performance type of the change performance is determined at a rate of 10% for normal change performance (change precursor performance: none) and 90% for special change performance (change precursor performance: success pattern). ing.

In addition, if the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize (new pending memory) is the golden mode, and the change pattern is not one of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the change As the performance type of the performance, determination values are assigned such that a normal change performance (change precursor performance: none) is determined at a rate of 100%.

[Table for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead preview performance (R hold performance) of the change precursor performance]
FIG. 133-16(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table of the R reservation performance. As shown in FIG. 133-16(B), in this embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the R hold effect (“no execution” or “with execution”), and , a judgment value is assigned to each.

As shown in FIG. 133-16(B), the determination values are assigned so that 50% of the time it is decided not to perform the R-holding effect, and 50% of the time it is decided that the R-holding effect is to be executed. It is.

[Change production]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. A change effect is a corresponding display (pending display or active display) that corresponds to the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of starting winnings, and is displayed in a blue, red, or gold color that is different from the normal display. This is an example of a preview performance.

Specifically, among the change effects, the hold change effect that displays the hold display in a display mode different from the normal display mode (any display mode of blue mode, red mode, or gold mode) is difficult to execute. This is a look-ahead preview that suggests the display results of the pending memory. In addition, among the change effects, the active change effect that displays the display mode of the active display in a display mode different from the normal mode (either the blue mode or the red mode) is the display result of the variable display being executed. It is a preview performance that suggests that there will be changes. Further, in this embodiment, as the change performance, a normal change performance and a special change performance, which have different performance modes, can be executed.

[Normal change effect]
In this embodiment, a normal change effect can be executed as a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display or the active display. The normal change effect consists of (i) the timing at which the n-th pending display corresponding to the starting prize is displayed in the pending display area (timing at the starting winning), (ii) the pending display corresponding to the starting winning, (iii) Timing at which the fluctuation ranking in the display area shifts to a higher position (active display area side) (in the case of n≧2), (iii) Timing at which the pending display corresponding to the starting prize shifts to the active display area (when the starting prize (iv) At a predetermined timing during the fluctuating display of the special symbol (corresponding decorative symbol), a corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuating display based on the starting prize ( This is an effect that changes the display (on hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode.

<Example of normal change production>
FIG. 133-17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image and effect sound of each effect related to the normal change effect. This example shows an example in which a normal change effect is executed in which the active display changes to a blue color while a variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state.

In the diagrams of this embodiment, for the sake of explanation of the example of the effect, effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R below the image display device 5 are shown for convenience. The actual positional relationship of each device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R) in this embodiment is as shown in FIG. 132-1.

Furthermore, although these figures may illustrate examples in which specific performance sounds are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, this is not intended to illustrate a characteristic example in this embodiment. However, even if the illustration shows an example in which a specific effect sound is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, another effect sound different from the specific effect sound may be reproduced and output. Even if the illustration shows an example in which neither of the effect sounds is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is assumed that any of the effect sounds may be reproduced and output. These are similarly applicable to the following figures.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-17 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the image in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Start the variable display of decorative patterns. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not reproduce and output any performance sound related to the normal change performance from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-17 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal change effect and changes the active display in the normal mode in the active display area ACE to the active display AC1 in the blue mode.

[Showing signs of change]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change precursor effect that suggests that a special change effect may be executed. There are success patterns and failure patterns in the change precursor performance. When a change precursor performance of a successful pattern is executed, a special change performance is executed, and when a change precursor performance of a failure pattern is executed, none of the change performances are executed. Hereinafter, the change precursor performance of the success pattern will be referred to as "change precursor performance (success pattern)" or "change precursor performance: success pattern", and the change precursor performance of the failure pattern will be referred to as "change precursor performance (failure pattern)" as appropriate. ”, ``Changing harbinger performance: failure pattern''. The change precursor performance is a series of performances consisting of (1) to (3) shown below.

(1) Production of signs of change (first stage)
As shown in FIG. 133-18(1), the change precursor effect (first stage) is an effect in which the active display moves from the active display area to the center of the screen and is enlarged. The enlarged active enlarged display EAC at this time is appropriately referred to as an "enlarged active display." At this time, the effect sound EA (success pattern) or the effect sound EB (failure pattern) is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, sound effects are reproduced and output. Regardless of whether the change precursor performance is a success pattern or a failure pattern, the change precursor performance (first stage) has a common performance mode.

(2) Production of signs of change (second stage)
As shown in FIG. 133-18 (2), the change precursor effect (second stage) is an effect in which the characters "READY" are superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen. At this time, the first effect sound E "ready" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, regardless of whether it is the effect sound EA (success pattern) or the effect sound EB (failure pattern). Regardless of whether the change precursor performance is a success pattern or a failure pattern, the change precursor performance (second stage) has a common performance mode. The letters "READY" and the first production sound E "Ready" are information that suggests that it will be announced whether or not a special change production will be executed from now on, and can give players a sense of anticipation. .

(3) Production of signs of change (3rd stage)
As shown in FIG. 133-18 (3A), the success pattern change precursor effect (third stage) is an effect in which the letters "GO" are superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen. At this time, the second effect sound EA (scratch processing) and the third effect sound EA "gogogogo, go" are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 133-20 (4)). The letters "GO", the second performance sound EA (scratch processing), and the third performance sound EA "Gogogogo, go" are information that informs the player that a special change performance is about to start, and the special change performance You can further improve your interest.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays the characters "GO" superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the reproduction output of the second production sound EA and the third production sound EA. . In this example, the second effect sound EA is played four times and the third effect sound EA is played once, so the word "GO" is displayed in the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 a total of five times. Superimposed display.

Specifically, at the timing when the reproduction output of the second effect sound EA (first time) starts, the characters "GO" are displayed for the first time, and at the timing when the reproduction output of the second effect sound EA (first time) ends, "GO" is displayed. The display of the characters "GO" ends. At the timing when the second production sound EA (second time) starts playing, the letters "GO" are displayed for the second time, and at the timing when the playback output of the second production sound EA (second time) ends, the letters "GO" are displayed. The display ends. At the timing when the second production sound EA (3rd time) starts playing, the letters "GO" are displayed for the third time, and at the timing when the playback output of the second production sound EA (3rd time) ends, the letters "GO" are displayed. The display ends. At the start timing of the second production sound EA (4th time), the characters "GO" are displayed for the fourth time, and at the end timing of the reproduction output of the second production sound EA (4th time), the characters "GO" are displayed. The display ends. Then, at the timing when the reproduction output of the third effect sound EA starts, the characters "GO" are displayed for the fifth time, and at the timing when the reproduction output of the third effect sound EA ends, the display of the characters "GO" ends.

As shown in FIG. 133-18 (3B), the failure pattern change precursor performance (third stage) is a performance in which a crack image CI is superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC over the entire screen. At this time, the second effect sound EB is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

[Special change production]
In this embodiment, a special change effect can be executed as a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display. The special change performance is executed after the change precursor performance (success pattern). The special change performance is a series of performances consisting of the first stage, second stage, and final stage shown below.

(1) Special change production (first stage)
A course display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, which is an object imitating an arrow extending from the active display area toward the upper left of the screen, the center of the screen, and the upper right of the screen. Of the route displays, the route display that extends from the active display area toward the top left of the screen is called the left route section, the route display that extends from the active display area toward the center of the screen is called the center route section, and the route display that extends from the active display area toward the top right of the screen is called the left route section. The route display that extends from the right is called the right route section.

Furthermore, an active candidate display (for example, in a blue form), which is a candidate for changing the active display, is displayed ahead of the left path section, and an active candidate display (for example, in a red form) is displayed beyond the right path section. In addition, beyond the central route section, there is a "NEXT" button that notifies you of the display mode of the active display at this stage, but notifies you that you will proceed to the next stage (the stage where the active candidate display with higher jackpot expectation becomes the change candidate). An icon will be displayed. By emitting light from one of the respective course sections, the player is informed of which course the player has taken. The mode of the route section at this time is appropriately referred to as the "progress mode."

(1st stage → final stage)
When the vehicle advances to a route section where there is an active candidate display ahead of the route section, it is notified that the active display will change to the display mode of that active candidate display. Specifically, by changing the display mode of the active enlarged display to the active candidate display, the active enlarged display is changed to the normal size active display after emphasizing and informing which display mode the active display will change to. The special change performance is ended by reducing the size and displaying it in the active display area.

(1st stage → 2nd stage)
Further, when the user advances to a route section that has a "NEXT" icon ahead of the route section, it is notified that the player will proceed to the second stage of the special change effect. Specifically, the "NEXT" icon is displayed surrounded by a rectangular object (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "surrounding mode") that indicates that the process has proceeded to the "NEXT" icon.

(2) Special change production (second stage)
A course display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The route display at this time consists of only the left route section and the right route section, and does not include the center route section. An active candidate display (for example, in a red form) is displayed ahead of the left course part, and an active candidate display (for example, in a gold form) is displayed ahead of the right course part.

At this time, change candidates with higher jackpot expectations are displayed in the second stage than in the first stage. Specifically, in the first stage, the red aspect and below (blue aspect, red aspect) were candidates for change, but in the second stage, the red aspect and above (red aspect, golden aspect) were change candidates. There is. Further, since the "NEXT" icon is not displayed, the process does not proceed to the next stage, and at this stage, it is notified that the active display will change to the display mode of one of the active candidate displays.

(Second stage → final stage)
When the vehicle advances to a route section with any active candidate display, it is notified that the active display will change to the display mode of that active candidate display. Specifically, by changing the display mode of the active enlarged display to the active candidate display, the active enlarged display is changed to the normal size active display after emphasizing and informing which display mode the active display will change to. The special change performance is ended by reducing the size and displaying it in the active display area.

<Series of production examples from change harbinger production to special change production>
FIGS. 133-19 to 133-22 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the special change effect. This example shows an example in which a special change performance in which the active display changes to a golden mode is executed while a variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-19 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the image in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Start the variable display of decorative patterns. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not reproduce and output any performance sound related to the normal change performance from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 133-19 (2) to 133-20 (4), the performance control CPU 120 executes the change precursor performance (success pattern). The effect images and effect sounds in FIGS. 133-19 (2) to 133-20 (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 133-18 (1) to (3A) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-20 (5), the performance control CPU 120 executes a special change performance (first stage), displays the route display RI on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the left route section. An active candidate display CAC1 in a blue format is displayed ahead of , a "NEXT" icon is displayed ahead of the center route section, and an active candidate display CAC2 is displayed in a red format ahead of the right route section.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-20 (6), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the special change performance (first stage), and changes the central route section of the route display RI of the image display device 5 into a traveling mode. , and change the "NEXT" icon to an encircling mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-21 (7), the performance control CPU 120 ends the special change performance (first stage), executes the special change performance (second stage), and controls the image display device 5. The course display RI is continuously displayed on the entire screen, and an active candidate display CAC2 in a red form is displayed ahead of the left course part, and an active candidate display CAC3 in a gold form is displayed ahead of the right course part. At this time, the route display RI does not include the central route section.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-21 (8), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the special change performance (second stage), and changes the right route section of the route display RI of the image display device 5 into a traveling mode. change to

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-21 (9), the performance control CPU 120 ends the special change performance (second stage), executes the special change performance (final stage), and displays the screen of the image display device 5. The active enlarged display EAC3 in the center is changed to a gold color mode, which is the display mode of the active candidate display finally notified in the course display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-22 (10), the performance control CPU 120 ends the special change performance and displays a golden active display AC3 corresponding to the display mode of the active enlarged display in the active display area ACE. .

[R hold performance]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the R reservation performance based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The R hold display is a type of look-ahead preview effect that notifies you that a change precursor effect will be executed in the variable display that is the subject of judgment at the time of start-up winning by displaying the display mode of the hold display in the R mode. . In this embodiment, when a variable display corresponding to a pending memory that is a preview object (target) of an R pending presentation is executed, a change precursor presentation (success pattern or failure pattern) is executed. The R mode of hold display is a mode in which the letter "R" is displayed in the normal mode of hold display. When the R hold effect is executed, when the variable display corresponding to the hold memory that is the preview target of the R hold effect is executed, the active display is displayed in the R mode until the change precursor effect is executed. be done.

In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the R hold effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the hold display is displayed in the normal mode from the time of starting winning to the next holding shift, and the hold display is displayed in the normal mode from the starting winning to the next holding shift. Change the hold display to the R mode at the appropriate timing. The hold display is not limited to this form, and the hold display may be changed to the R form at a timing different from the above timing.

<Example of R hold performance>
FIG. 133-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the R pending performance. This example shows an example in which an R-retention performance in which the reservation display changes to the R mode is executed while a variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-23 (1), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "246") that results in a "miss" is fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "246") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 does not display the active display AC in the active display area ACE in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed, and displays the first display in the normal mode in the first pending display area PD1E. Three pending displays PD1 are displayed. Among these first suspension displays PD1, the suspension memory in which the variable display is performed third is the preview target of the R suspension effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-23 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the image display based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the fact that the number of first pending memories has become 2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to newly display an active display AC in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. , the first pending display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first pending display area PD1E is shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE. Further, the performance control CPU 120 changes the first reservation display PD1R, which is the target of the preview of the R reservation performance, to the R mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-23 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "132") that results in a "miss" is fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "132") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-23 (4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the image display based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the fact that the first pending storage number has become 1, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to newly display an active display AC in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. , the first pending display PD1R in the R mode displayed in the first pending display area PD1E is shifted by one position toward the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-23 (5), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "462") that results in a "miss" is fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "462") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-23 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the image display based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the fact that the first pending memory number has become 0, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to newly display an active display ACR in the R mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. , the first hold display PD1R in the R mode displayed in the first hold display area PD1E is erased.

[Process for determining performance at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result specification command that specifies a display result, a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern, and a pending memory number subtraction specification command (first pending memory number subtraction specification). command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) to the production control CPU 120.

When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number subtraction designation command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the number of pending memories has been subtracted. memory number subtraction designation command or second pending memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot, loss, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, etc.), and the variation time and amount of special symbols. A variable display of special symbols is executed based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, such as a variable pattern designation command that specifies production contents (reach, pseudo-run, etc.); , it is possible to specify the variation time of the special symbol and the content of the performance (reach, pseudo-run, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is determined, the performance control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and receives the special symbol (the first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIGS. 133-24 and 133-25 are flowcharts showing the effect determination process executed at the start of variation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start effect determination process shown in FIGS. 133-24 and 133-25 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. 131. Specifically, upon receiving the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. A production control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern is set based on the specified variation pattern. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIGS. 133-24 and 133-25.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is the normal mode (step S05TM2010). If the production mode is not the normal mode (step S05TM2010: NO), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2170.

If the production mode is the normal mode (Step S05TM2010: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with super reach (Step S05TM2020) . When the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern without super reach (step S05TM2020: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with super reach (step S05TM2020: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is "SP-A1" or It is determined whether the variation pattern involves any one of "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030). If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not involve "SP-A1" or "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030: NO), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2070.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with either "SP-A1" or "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030: YES), the production control CPU 120 uses the display result specification command to It is determined whether the designated display result is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2040). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "jackpot" (step S05TM2040: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2040: YES), the production control CPU 120. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is not a variation pattern with "SP-A1" (step S05TM2050: NO), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2260.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern with “SP-A1” (step S05TM2050: YES), the performance control CPU 120 executes the first normal jackpot notification performance (FIG. 133-32), which will be described later. and FIG. 133-33) (step S05TM2060), and ends the process.

Step S05TM2030: After NO, it is decided to execute the SP branch effect (see the mountain (4) in Figure 133-27) to be described later (Step S05TM2070), and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is "SP-B1". ” or “SP-B2” is determined (step S05TM2080). If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not involve "SP-B1" or "SP-B2" (step S05TM2080: NO), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2130.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern with either "SP-B1" or "SP-B2" (step S05TM2080: YES), the production control CPU 120 executes the CU production (described later). (see Figure 133-31) is determined based on the table (see Figure 133-26 (A)) for determining whether or not to execute the CU effect (see Figure 133-26 (A)). It is determined whether the displayed result is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2100). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "jackpot" (step S05TM2100: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2100: YES), the performance control CPU 120 changes the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command to a variation pattern with "SP-B1". It is determined whether or not (step S05TM2110). If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern without "SP-B1" (step S05TM2110: NO), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2260.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern with "SP-B1" (step S05TM2110: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the second normal jackpot notification performance. (Step S05TM2120), the process ends immediately.

After Step S05TM2080: NO, the production control CPU 120 decides to execute the story SP development production (see Figures 133-28 to 133-30), which will be described later (Step S05TM2130), and specifies the result specified by the display result specification command. It is determined whether the displayed result is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2140). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "jackpot" (step S05TM2140: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2140: YES), the performance control CPU 120 changes the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command to a variation pattern with "SP-C1". It is determined whether or not (step S05TM2150). If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern without "SP-C1" (step S05TM2150: NO), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2260.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern with "SP-C1" (step S05TM2150: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the third normal jackpot notification performance. (Step S05TM2160), the process ends immediately.

After Step S05TM2010: NO, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the production mode is the rush mode (Step S05TM2170). If the production mode is not the rush mode (step S05TM2170: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the process.

When the production mode is rush mode (step S05TM2170: YES), the production control CPU 120 sets the production mode to rush mode: dream dream mode (see Figures 133-59 (1), (2A), and (3A)), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not (step S05TM2180). If the production mode is not rush mode: dream dream mode (step S05TM2180: NO), production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2210.

When the performance mode is rush mode: dream dream mode (step S05TM2180: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2190 ). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "jackpot" (step S05TM2190: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2190: YES), the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance when hitting right in the dream dream mode to the right hit notification performance in the dream dream mode. It is determined based on the table (see FIG. 133-26 (B1)) for determining the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance at the time of winning, and the process is immediately terminated.

After step S05TM2180: NO, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the production mode is rush mode: Nana mode (see FIGS. 133-59 (1), (2B), and (3B)) (step S05TM2210). If the performance mode is not rush mode:nana mode (step S05TM2210: NO), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2235.

When the performance mode is rush mode: Nana mode (step S05TM2210: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2220). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "jackpot" (step S05TM2220: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2220: YES), the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance mode of the right-hit jackpot notification performance in Nana mode to the right-hit jackpot notification performance in Nana mode. It is determined based on the table for determining the performance mode (see FIG. 133-26 (B2)), and the process is immediately terminated.

After step S05TM2210: NO (that is, when the production mode is the rush mode: jam mode (see FIGS. 133-59 (1), (2C), and (3C)) described later), the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode. It is determined that the is rush mode: jam mode (step S05TM2235), and it is determined whether the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2240). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "jackpot" (step S05TM2240: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2240: YES), the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance when hitting right when in jam mode to when hitting right when hitting right in jam mode. The performance mode of the jackpot notification performance is determined based on the table (see FIG. 133-26 (B3)) (step S05TM2250), and the process is immediately terminated.

Further, after step S05TM2050: NO, step S05TM2110: NO, or step S05TM2150: NO, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute a revival performance to be described later (step S05TM2260), and ends the process as is.

[Table referenced in the production determination process at the start of fluctuation]
FIG. 133-26 is a specific example of a table that is referred to in any process of the variation start effect determination process. FIG. 133-26(A) is an example of a CU performance execution/non-execution determination table that is referred to when determining whether to perform a CU performance in step S05TM2090. FIG. 133-26 (B1) is referred to when determining the performance mode of the right-handed hit jackpot notification performance for the dream dream mode in step S05TM2200 [for dream dream mode] Determining the performance mode of the right-handed hit jackpot notification performance This is an example of a table. FIG. 133-26 (B2) is an example of the performance mode determination table for the right-handed hit jackpot notification performance [for Nana mode] that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the right-handed hit jackpot notification performance for Nana mode in step S05TM2230. be. FIG. 133-26 (B3) shows the performance mode determination table for the right-handed hit jackpot notification performance [for jam mode] that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the right-handed hit jackpot notification performance for the jam mode in step S05TM2250. This is an example.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute CU production>
FIG. 133-26(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform a CU effect. As shown in FIG. 133-26(A), in this embodiment, the judgment value is assigned so that the execution rate of the CU effect differs depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". It is.

When the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided not to perform the CU effect 90% of the time, and 10% of the time the CU effect is not executed. It is decided to execute the CU effect based on the ratio.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), it is decided that the CU effect will not be executed at a rate of 30%, It is decided to execute the CU effect at a rate of %.

In this way, the execution rate of CU effects is higher when the display result is a "jackpot" than when the display result is a "miss", so the execution of the CU effect increases the jackpot expectation level. It can be suggested to the player that there is a high fluctuation.

<[For dream dream mode] Performance mode determination table for jackpot notification performance when hitting right-handed>
FIG. 133-26 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode determination table for the jackpot notification performance when hitting right [for dream dream mode]. As shown in FIG. 133-26 (B1), in this embodiment, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance when hitting right is selected depending on whether the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentages differ.

When the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" or "3R time-saving jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 100%. It is decided to execute the first right hit jackpot effect (see FIG. 133-70), which will be described later.

When the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" or "10R time-saving jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the first right hit jackpot effect, and it is decided to execute the first right hit special jackpot effect (see FIG. 133-71) to be described later at a rate of 50%.

In this way, only when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot", the special jackpot notification performance for the first right hit can be executed, so at the timing when the special jackpot notification performance for the first right hit is executed, that is, the jackpot Before the type notification performance is executed, the player can recognize that a "10R jackpot" will occur due to the fluctuation.

<[For Nana mode] Performance mode determination table for jackpot notification performance when hitting right-handed>
FIG. 133-26 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode determination table for the right-handed jackpot notification performance [for Nana mode]. As shown in FIG. 133-26 (B2), in this embodiment, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance when hitting right is selected depending on whether the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentages differ.

When the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" or "3R time-saving jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 100%. It is decided to execute the second right hit jackpot effect (see FIG. 133-72), which will be described later.

When the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" or "10R time-saving jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the second right hit jackpot performance, and it is decided to execute the second right hit special jackpot performance (see FIG. 133-73) to be described later at a rate of 50%.

In this way, only when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot", the special jackpot notification performance for the second right hit can be executed, so at the timing when the special jackpot notification performance for the second right hit is executed, that is, the jackpot Before the type notification performance is executed, the player can recognize that a "10R jackpot" will occur due to the fluctuation.

<[For jam mode] Performance mode determination table for jackpot notification performance when hitting right-handed>
FIG. 133-26 (B3) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode determination table for the right-handed jackpot notification performance [for jam mode]. As shown in FIG. 133-26 (B3), in this embodiment, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance when hitting right is selected depending on whether the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentages differ.

When the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" or "3R time-saving jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 100%. It is decided to execute the third right hit jackpot effect (see FIG. 133-74) which will be described later.

When the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" or "10R time-saving jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the third right hit jackpot effect, and it is decided to execute the third right hit special jackpot effect (see FIG. 133-75) to be described later at a rate of 50%.

In this way, only when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot", the special jackpot notification performance for the third right hit can be executed, so at the timing when the special jackpot notification performance for the third right hit is executed, that is, the jackpot Before the type notification performance is executed, the player can recognize that a "10R jackpot" will occur due to the fluctuation.

[Development flow of SP reach production]
Next, the development flow of SP reach performance in this embodiment (hereinafter referred to as "SP development flow" as appropriate) will be explained. The example of the SP development flow shown in FIG. 133-27 shows a flow that develops into a challenge SP, a flow that develops into a battle SP, and a flow that develops into a story SP after a reach state is established.

In this state, the flow advances to a flow that develops into a challenge SP shown in FIGS. 133-27 (2) and (3), or a flow that develops into a battle SP or a story SP shown after FIG. 133-27 (4).

As shown in FIG. 133-27 (1), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern involving various super reach is to be established, the performance control CPU 120 displays "2" in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. By stopping and displaying the decorative pattern "", a ready-to-reach state is established, and the characters "ready-to-reach" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner. Further, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

(Flow that develops into Challenge SP)
As shown in FIG. 133-27 (2), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the fluctuating pattern involving the challenge SP should be temporarily stopped, the performance control CPU 120 displays the symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. A combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "232") indicating a "miss" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 continues to display the special symbols in a variable manner, the production control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. . Further, the active display AC in the normal mode is continuously displayed in the active display area ACE.

As shown in FIG. 133-27 (3), at the timing when the variation pattern involving the challenge SP should be developed into a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 executes the challenge SP performance and displays the challenge SP start screen on the image display device 5. Display AI. The challenge SP start screen AI is an image including a rock image and the words "Nana Challenge".

(Flow that develops into battle SP or story SP)
As shown in FIG. 133-27 (2), after establishing a reach state in a variable pattern involving battle SP or story SP, the performance control CPU 120 executes the SP branch performance and displays the SP on the image display device 5. Display the branch screen DI. The SP branch screen DI is an image including an effect display.

The SP branching performance is a performance in which an SP branching screen DI is displayed before the development of either the battle SP or the story SP to a super reach, thereby encouraging which super reach the SP will develop into.

(Flow that develops into battle SP)
As shown in FIG. 133-27 (5), after the SP branch performance in the variable pattern involving battle SP is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the battle SP development performance and displays the battle SP on the image display device 5. Display the development screen BDI. The battle SP development screen BDI is an image including an effect display and the word "battle".

As shown in FIG. 133-27 (6), the performance control CPU 120 executes the battle SP performance and displays the battle SP start screen on the image display device 5 at the timing when the fluctuation pattern involving the battle SP should be developed into a super reach. Display BSI. The battle SP start screen BSI is an image that includes a character A, an enemy character X, and the word "battle".

(Flow that develops into story SP)
As shown in FIG. 133-27 (7), after the SP branch effect in the variation pattern involving the story SP is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the story SP development effect, and displays the story SP on the image display device 5. Display the development screen SDI. The story SP development screen SDI is an image including an effect display and character A. Details of the story SP development effect will be explained in FIGS. 133-28 to 133-30, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 133-27 (8), the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP performance and displays the story SP start screen on the image display device 5 at the timing when the variation pattern involving the story SP should be developed into a super reach. Display SSI. The story SP start screen SSI is an image that includes a story title display (in this example, "Yumemu-chan Story").

[Story SP development production]
In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a story SP, a story SP development effect can be executed after an SP branch effect. The story SP development performance is a series of performances consisting of (1) to (4) shown below.

(1) Story SP development production (first stage)
In the story SP development production (first stage), the character A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with an effect display. At this time, the display color of the character A is the normal character color (for example, the hair is green, the skin is flesh-colored, the cloak is red, etc.). At this time, the effect sound G [first effect sound G and second effect sound G] "powerful" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(2) Story SP development production (second stage)
In the story SP development performance (second stage), a blackout image BOI is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, although the performance sound G is being reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, muting processing is being executed.

Note that, not limited to the above embodiments, the effect sounds that are played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the story SP development effects (first stage), (third stage), and (fourth stage) are executed. While the channel setting ratio for G is set to 100%, the channel setting ratio for the performance sound G to be reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R when the story SP development performance (second stage) is executed is set to 20%. As a result, the clarity of the performance sound G in the story SP development performance (second stage) may be reduced.

(3) Story SP development production (3rd stage)
In the story SP development production (third stage), the character A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. At this time, the display color of the entire character A is yellow. Further, the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "Pa" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the character A is continuously displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. At this time, the display color of the entire character A has changed from yellow to purple, which is complementary to yellow. Further, the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "Pa" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the character A is continuously displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. At this time, the display color of the entire character A has changed from purple to yellow, which is complementary to purple. Further, the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "Pa" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the character A is continuously displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. At this time, the display color of the entire character A has changed from yellow to purple, which is complementary to yellow. Further, the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "Pa" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(4) Story SP development production (4th stage)
In the story SP development performance (fourth stage), an enlarged character A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 along with an effect display. At this time, the display color of character A is the normal character color. At this time, the effect sound G [first effect sound G and second effect sound G] "powerful" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the story SP development production (third and fourth stages), after executing the scratch process and playing and outputting the first production sound G "Pa" four times in a row from the speakers 8L and 8R, The first effect sound G and the second effect sound G "powerful" are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Furthermore, each time the yellow character A and the purple character A are alternately displayed on the image display device 5, the first effect sound G "Pa" is scratch-processed and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row. has been done.

As shown in Figure 133-4, in the variation pattern with super reach, the expectation of jackpot is high due to the relationship of variation pattern with challenge SP < variation pattern with story SP, so after the SP branch performance A development route with higher expectations for a jackpot is when the SP branches out and then the story SP develops, rather than when it develops into a battle SP. That is, the case where the story SP development effect is executed after the SP branch effect is a development route with higher jackpot expectation than the case where the battle SP development effect is executed after the SP branch effect. In this way, the story SP development performance is a type of fluctuating preview performance that informs that the reach performance will develop into a super reach with the highest jackpot expectation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are displayed alternately in the story SP development performance. In the SP development performance, a character A having a different display mode from the two types of characters A, the yellow character A and the purple character A, may be displayed.

For example, in the story SP development performance, three types of characters A, a yellow character A, a red character A, and a blue character A, may be displayed in order.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are displayed alternately in the story SP development performance, an example is shown in which the display size of the character A is the same. However, not limited to this form, when two types of characters A, yellow character A and purple character A, are displayed alternately in the story SP development production, the display size of character A is not common. It's okay.

For example, in the story SP development production, when two types of characters A, yellow character A and purple character A, are displayed alternately, the display size of yellow character A is small, and the display size of purple character A is small. It can be large.

In addition, in the story SP development production, when two types of characters A, yellow character A and purple character A, are displayed alternately, an example was shown in which character A has the same display pose. Regardless of the form, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed in the story SP development performance, the display poses of the characters A may not be the same.

At this time, in the story SP development performance, when the characters are displayed alternately, it was possible to display characters in different display poses, but in the story SP development performance, when the characters are displayed alternately, It is assumed that different types of characters cannot be displayed.

<Example of story SP development production>
FIGS. 133-28 to 133-30 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the story SP development effect. This example shows an example in which the story SP development effect is executed while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-28 (1), at the timing when the story SP development performance should be started after the SP branch performance in the variation pattern is executed, the performance control CPU 120 starts the story SP development performance (first Step) is executed to display the story SP development screen SDI on the image display device 5. The story SP development screen SDI is an image including an effect display and character A. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the character (A) in a normal character color (for example, green hair, skin color, red cloak, etc.). Further, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G and second performance sound G] "powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-28 (2), the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP development performance (second stage) at the timing when the story SP development performance (second stage) in the variation pattern should be started. Then, the blackout image BOI is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, although the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound G from the speakers 8L and 8R, it executes a mute process.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-28 (3), the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP development performance (third stage) at the timing when the story SP development performance (third stage) in the variation pattern should be started. Then, the blackout image BOI is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and the character (A) CA is displayed together with the effect display EFI. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire character (A) in a yellow display color. Further, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-29 (4), the production control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development production (third stage) and continues to display the character (A) CA along with the effect display EFI. let At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire character (A) in the display color of purple, which is complementary to yellow. Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" to be continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-29 (5), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development performance (third stage) and continues to display the character (A) CA along with the effect display EFI. let At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire character (A) in a yellow display color that is complementary to purple. Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" to be continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-29 (6), the production control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development production (third stage) and continues to display the character (A) CA along with the effect display EFI. let At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire character (A) in the display color of purple, which is complementary to yellow. Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" to be continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-30 (7), the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP development performance (fourth stage) at the timing when the story SP development performance (fourth stage) in the variation pattern should be started. Then, the enlarged character (A) CA is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display EFI. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the character (A) in the display color of the normal character color. Further, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G and second performance sound G] "powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-30 (8), the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP performance and displays the story SP start screen SSI on the image display device 5 at the timing when the fluctuation pattern should be developed into a super reach. Display. The story SP start screen SSI is an image that includes a story title display (in this example, "Yumemu-chan Story").

In this way, as shown in Figures 133-28 (3) to 133-29 (6), when the story SP development effect is executed, character A whose display color is yellow and character A whose display color is yellow and complementary colors contrast. Every time the related purple character A is displayed, a scratch process is executed to scratch the first effect sound G "pa" four times, and the effect sound G is reproduced and output.

[CU production]
In this embodiment, in the battle SP performance, the period from the start of the battle SP performance to the timing of the victory/defeat branch is referred to as the "first half of the battle SP", and the period from the timing of the victory/defeat branch to the end of the battle SP performance is referred to as the "first half of the battle SP". It is called "Battle SP Second Half". In this embodiment, it is suggested that the expectation level of the variable display is high for a jackpot at a timing (a predetermined timing in the first half of the battle SP) before the display result is announced while the battle SP performance is being performed. It is possible to perform a CU effect. The CU performance is a performance in which the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operation position on the battle start screen in the battle SP performance. At this time, the effect sound B is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Hereinafter, the CU effect will be appropriately referred to as "first movable object effect."

<Example of CU performance>
FIG. 133-31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image and effect sound of each effect related to the CU effect. This example shows an example in which a CU effect is executed while a battle SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-31 (1), the performance control CPU 120 executes the battle SP performance at the timing when the fluctuation pattern should be developed into a super reach (battle SP), and displays the battle SP on the image display device 5. Display the start screen BSI. The battle SP start screen BSI is an image that includes a character (A) CA, an enemy character (X) CX, and the words "Battle".

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-31 (2), at the timing when the CU effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the CU effect and moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second operation position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When the movable body YM is in the second operating position, the image display device 5 is located on the rear side (gaming machine side) of the movable body YM, so the battle SP displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 The visibility of the related effect image is in a reduced state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-31 (3), at the timing when the CU effect should be ended, the effect control CPU 120 ends the CU effect and moves the movable body YM from the second operation position to the initial position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the battle SP start screen BSI on the image display device 5, and displays the in-battle screen BEI. The battle screen is an image including the character (A) CA and the enemy character (X) CX.

[Jackpot notification performance]
In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a jackpot notification effect that notifies the player that the display result is a "jackpot" in the variable display. In this embodiment, the jackpot notification performance includes a normal jackpot notification performance that can be executed in the normal mode, and a right-hand hit jackpot notification performance that can be executed in the rush mode.

[Normal jackpot notification performance]
In this embodiment, the normal jackpot notification performances include a first normal jackpot notification performance, a second normal jackpot notification performance, and a third normal jackpot notification performance.

[First normal jackpot notification performance]
The first normal jackpot notification performance is a type of jackpot notification performance that is executed when notifying the display result when the performance mode is the normal mode and the fluctuation pattern is "SP-A1 jackpot". The first normal jackpot notification performance is a performance included in the success performance. The first normal jackpot notification performance notifies you that the challenge has been successful (that is, the displayed result is a "jackpot") at a predetermined opportunity during the challenge SP (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) A success notification screen is displayed on the image display device 5. The success notification screen is an image containing the words "Jackpot" and the words "COMPLETE." On the success notification screen, the display color of white and the display color of black, which is complementary to white, are alternately displayed.

In the first normal jackpot notification effect, after executing the scratch process and reproducing the first effect sound C1 "ko" four times in a row from the speakers 8L and 8R, the first effect sound C1 and the second effect sound C1 are output. "Complete" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the display color of the success notification screen is switched between white and black, the first effect sound C1 is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R (Figs. 133-32 and 133-33). ), the performance sound C1 is reproduced and output as "ko, ko, ko, ko, complete."

<Example of the first normal jackpot announcement performance>
FIGS. 133-32 and 133-33 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the first normal jackpot notification performance. This example shows an example in which the first normal jackpot notification effect is executed while the challenge SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-32 (1), at the timing when the operation promotion display in the variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation section (in this example, a push button) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An operation promotion display BT prompting the player to operate the button 31B) is displayed.

In this example, the operation promotion display BT includes the words "Press!!" and a downward arrow added above the object imitating the push button 31B, and the text "Press!!" and a downward arrow are added below the object imitating the push button 31B. It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period. Here, since the smoke image SMI is displayed in the background of the operation promotion display BT, the player operates the operation section in the hope that the smoke will clear and the challenge will be successful by operating the operation section.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound I2 "Push" (Character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Since the Challenge SP production that is currently being executed is a production in which character (B) mainly appears, the production sound when the operation promotion display is displayed is the production sound related to character (B) (Character (B)'s production sound). character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-32 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the performance control CPU 120 executes the first normal jackpot notification performance (success performance), and displays the success on the image display device 5. A notification screen SNI1 (in this example, an image including the words "Jackpot" and "COMPLETE") is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the success notification screen SNI in black. Further, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first performance sound C1 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-32 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal jackpot notification performance (success performance), and displays a success notification screen SNI2 (in this example) on the image display device 5. Now, an image containing the words "Jackpot" and "COMPLETE" is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the success notification screen SNI in a white display color that is complementary to black. Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the first performance sound C1 "K" to be continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-33 (4), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal jackpot notification performance (success performance), and displays a success notification screen SNI1 (in this example) on the image display device 5. Now, an image containing the words "Jackpot" and "COMPLETE" is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the success notification screen SNI in a black display color which is complementary to white. Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the first performance sound C1 "K" to be continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-33 (5), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal jackpot notification performance (success performance), and displays a success notification screen SNI2 (in this example) on the image display device 5. Now, an image containing the words "Jackpot" and "COMPLETE" is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the success notification screen SNI in a white display color that is complementary to black. Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the first performance sound C1 "K" to be continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-33 (6), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal jackpot notification performance (success performance), and displays a success notification screen SNI1 (in this example) on the image display device 5. Now, an image containing the words "Jackpot" and "COMPLETE" is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first performance sound C1 and the second performance sound C1 "Complete" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 133-32 (2) to 133-33 (5), when the first normal jackpot notification effect is executed and the effect sound C1 is played back, the first effect sound A scratch process in which C1 "ko" is scratched four times is being executed.

[Second normal jackpot notification performance]
The second normal jackpot notification performance is a type of jackpot notification performance that is executed when notifying the display result when the performance mode is the normal mode and the fluctuation pattern is "SP-B1 jackpot". The second normal jackpot notification performance is a performance included in the victory performance. The second normal jackpot notification performance indicates that the battle has been won (that is, the displayed result is a "jackpot") at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) during the second half of the battle SP. A victory notification screen is displayed on the image display device 5. The victory notification screen is an image that includes the word "victory", a character (A), and a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot. In this embodiment. In the second normal jackpot notification performance, a victory notification screen and a blackout image are alternately switched and displayed.

In the second normal jackpot notification performance, after executing the scratch process and reproducing and outputting the first performance sound C2 "V" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the first performance sound C2 and the second performance sound C2 are output. "Victory" is reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the victory notification screen is displayed, the first effect sound C2 is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 133-34 to 133-37). is played back as "V, V, V, V, Victory."

Furthermore, in the second normal jackpot notification performance, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position. When starting the second normal jackpot notification performance, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position, and when ending the second normal jackpot notification performance, the movable body YM moves from the second operating position. Operate to initial position.

<Example of the second normal jackpot announcement performance>
FIGS. 133-34 to 133-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the second normal jackpot notification performance. This example shows an example in which the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed while the battle SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-34 (1), at the timing when the operation promotion display in the variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation section (in this example, a push button) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An operation promotion display BT prompting the player to operate the button 31B) is displayed.

In this example, the operation promotion display BT includes the words "Press!!" and a downward arrow added above the object imitating the push button 31B, and the text "Press!!" and a downward arrow are added below the object imitating the push button 31B. It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period. Here, since the ally character (A) CA and the enemy character (X) CX are displayed in the background of the operation promotion display BT, the player can change the ally character (A) to the enemy character by operating the operation section. Operate the operation unit in hopes of winning against (X).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound I1 "push" (Character A voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Since the currently running battle SP production is a production in which character (A) mainly appears, the production sound when the operation promotion display is displayed is the production sound related to character (A) (character (A)'s production sound). character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-34 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the performance control CPU 120 executes the second normal jackpot notification performance (win performance) and displays the win on the image display device 5. A notification screen WNI (in this example, an image including the words "victory", a character (A), and a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot) is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first performance sound C2 "V" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second operation position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-34 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second normal jackpot notification performance (win performance) and causes the image display device 5 to display the blackout image BOI. . At this time, although the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first performance sound C1 "V" from the speakers 8L and 8R, it executes a mute process. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM at the second operating position.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds in FIGS. 133-34 (4) to 133-36 (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 133-34 (2) and (3) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133-34 (3), the period during which the first blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal jackpot notification effect (hereinafter referred to as the "blackout period" as appropriate) is 0. 5S, and as shown in Figure 133-35 (5), the period during which the second blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal jackpot notification performance is 0.4S, and as shown in Figure 133-36 (7). As shown in Figure 133-36 (9), the period during which the third blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal jackpot notification performance is 0.3S, and as shown in Figure 133-36 (9), the second normal jackpot notification performance The period during which the fourth blackout image BOI is displayed in the performance is 0.2S.

In this way, by gradually shortening the blackout period, that is, by shortening the period until the first performance sound C2 "V" is reproduced and output, the interest of the second normal jackpot notification performance is improved. can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-37 (10), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second normal jackpot notification performance (win performance), and displays the victory notification screen WNI (in this example) on the image display device 5. In this case, an image containing the words "WIN", a character (A), and a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first performance sound C2 and the second performance sound C2 "Victory" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM at the second operating position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-37 (11), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second normal jackpot notification performance (win performance), and displays the victory notification screen WNI (in this example) on the image display device 5. In this case, an image containing the words "WIN", a character (A), and a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the second operating position to the initial position.

[Third normal jackpot notification performance]
The third normal jackpot notification performance is a type of jackpot notification performance that is executed when notifying the display result when the performance mode is the normal mode and the fluctuation pattern is "SP-C1 jackpot". The third normal jackpot notification performance is a performance included in the achievement performance. The third normal jackpot notification performance notifies that the story has been achieved (that is, the display result is a "jackpot") at a predetermined opportunity during the story SP (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) An achievement notification screen is displayed on the image display device 5. The achievement notification screen is an image containing the words "Congratulations" and characters (A) to (C). In this embodiment. In the third normal jackpot notification performance, an achievement notification screen and a blackout image are alternately switched and displayed.

In the third normal jackpot notification effect, after executing the scratch process and reproducing and outputting the first effect sound C3 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the first effect sound C3 and the second effect sound C3 are output. "N Graturation" is reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the achievement notification screen is displayed, the first effect sound C3 is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 133-38 to 133-41). is reproduced and output as "ko, ko, ko, ko, congratulation."

Furthermore, in the third normal jackpot notification performance, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position. When starting the third normal jackpot notification effect, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position, and when ending the third normal jackpot notification effect, the movable body YM moves from the second operating position. Operate to initial position.

<Example of the 3rd normal jackpot announcement performance>
FIGS. 133-38 to 133-41 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the third normal jackpot notification performance. This example shows an example in which the third normal jackpot notification effect is executed while the story SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-38 (1), at the timing when the operation promotion display in the variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation section (in this example, a push button) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An operation promotion display BT prompting the player to operate the button 31B) is displayed. At this time, the spiral effect display UEFI centered on the operation promotion display BT is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and the title of this story SP (in this example, " The words ``Mumemu-chan Story'' are displayed.

In this example, the operation promotion display BT includes the words "Press!!" and a downward arrow added above the object imitating the push button 31B, and the text "Press!!" and a downward arrow are added below the object imitating the push button 31B. It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period. Here, since a spiral effect display UEFI that temporarily interrupts the story video is displayed in the background of the operation promotion display BT, the player operates the operation unit with the expectation that the story will be achieved by operating the operation unit. Manipulate.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound I4 "Push" (three voices of characters A to C) from the speakers 8L and 8R. The currently running story SP production is a production in which character (A) mainly appears, and character (B) and character (C) also appear, so the production sound when the operation promotion display is displayed is A), character (B), and character (C) (character voices of three characters, character (A), character (B), and character (C)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-38 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the performance control CPU 120 executes the third normal jackpot notification performance (achievement performance), and displays the achievement on the image display device 5. A notification screen ANI (in this example, an image including the characters "Congratulations" and characters (A) to (C)) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C3 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second operation position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-38 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the third normal jackpot notification performance (achievement performance) and causes the image display device 5 to display the blackout image BOI. . At this time, although the performance control CPU 120 is reproducing and outputting the first performance sound C3 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is performing a mute process. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM at the second operating position.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds in FIGS. 133-38 (4) to 133-40 (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 133-38 (2) and (3) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

In addition, as shown in Figure 133-38 (3), the blackout period in the third normal jackpot notification performance is 0.5S, and as shown in Figure 133-39 (5), the blackout period in the third normal jackpot notification performance is 0.5S. The blackout period in the performance is 0.4S, as shown in Figure 133-40 (7), and the blackout period in the third normal jackpot notification performance is 0.3S, as shown in Figure 133-40 (9). As shown, the fourth blackout period in the third normal jackpot notification performance is 0.2S.

In this way, by gradually shortening the blackout period, that is, by shortening the period until the first performance sound C3 "ko" is reproduced and output, the interest of the third normal jackpot notification performance is improved. can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-41 (10), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the third normal jackpot notification performance (achievement performance) and causes the image display device 5 to display the achievement notification screen ANI. . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first performance sound C3 and the second performance sound C3 "Complete" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM at the second operating position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-41 (11), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the third normal jackpot notification performance (win performance) and causes the image display device 5 to display the achievement notification screen ANI. . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the second operating position to the initial position.

[Premier performance (sudden jackpot announcement performance)]
In this embodiment, when the special symbol is performing a variable display, a premium is provided to notify that the display result will be a "jackpot" at a timing that should not be notified (at the start of the fluctuation, when a reach is established, etc.) It is possible to perform a performance (sudden jackpot notification performance).

In the premiere performance, the performance sound K is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the start of fluctuation or when a reach is established. This performance sound K includes the performance sounds of the jackpot notification performance in the normal time (performance sound C1, performance sound C2, performance sound C3) and the performance sound of the jackpot notification performance in the case of right-handed hit (performance sound D1, performance sound D2, This effect sound is different from the effect sound D3), and is appropriately referred to as a "sudden jackpot notification sound" or a "premier sound."

[Resurrection performance]
In this embodiment, after it is once reported that the display result will be a "miss" in the SP performance (temporary failure notification), it is possible to execute a revival performance that notifies that the final display result will be a "jackpot". As described in the explanation of the variation pattern, the revival performance can be performed in any variation pattern involving super reach among challenge SP, battle SP, and story SP.

The revival performance is a series of performances shown below.
First, a first restoration display is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The first resurrection display is composed of the characters "FE", which are the first two letters of "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot", and a character (A) is shown inside the first resurrection display. In the first revival display, the display color of the entire first revival display is white. In addition, the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "Fi" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a second resurrection display, which is a larger image than the first resurrection display, is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The second resurrection display is composed of the characters "FE" which are the first two letters of "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot", and a character (A) is shown inside the second resurrection display. In the second revival display, the display color of the entire second revival display is black, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with white. In addition, the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "Fi" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a first restoration display is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the first revival display, the display color of the entire first revival display is white, which is a complementary color contrast to black. In addition, the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "Fi" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a second revival display is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the second revival display, the display color of the entire second revival display is black, which is in a complementary color contrast with white. In addition, the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "Fi" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a third revival display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The third revival display is composed of the characters "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot", and a character (A) is shown inside the third revival display. In the third revival display, the display color of the entire third revival display is white. Further, the effect sound J [first effect sound J and second effect sound J] "Fever" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the first revival display and the second revival display are displayed, the first effect sound J is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R (Fig. 133-42 to Fig. 133- 44), the production sound J is reproduced and output as "Fi, fi, fi, fi, fever."

In this embodiment, the characters "FE" and "FEVER" are made up of only the frame lines of the characters, and the insides of the characters are not filled in. Objects placed in the area become visible. The first resurrection display, second resurrection display, and third resurrection display are configured with the priority of the display layer of character A < the display layer of the characters "FE" and "FEVER", so "FE" and "FEVER" Character A placed in the area inside the characters ``'' is partially visible.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display, which is larger in display size than the first resurrection display, are alternately displayed in the resurrection effect. However, in the resurrection effect, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display, which is larger in display size than the first resurrection display, may not be displayed alternately.

For example, in a resurrection effect, there is a first resurrection display, a second resurrection display that is larger in display size than the first resurrection display, a third resurrection display that is larger in display size than the second resurrection display, and a third resurrection display that is larger in display size than the third resurrection display. A fourth revival display having a larger display size may be displayed in order.

<Example of revival performance>
FIGS. 133-42 to 133-44 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the revival effect. This example shows an example in which a revival performance is performed while a defeat performance is being performed during a battle SP performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-42 (1), at the timing when the defeat performance in the variable pattern should be executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the defeat performance and displays the defeat notification screen LNI (in this example) on the image display device 5. In this case, an image containing the characters "defeat", an enemy character (X), and a decorative pattern combination "323" indicating a loss is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-42 (2), at the timing when the revival effect in the variable pattern should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the defeat effect, executes the resurrection effect, and controls the image display device 5. A first revival display REI1 (in this example, an image including the characters "FE") is displayed in the center of the screen. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire first revival display in white. Further, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound J [first performance sound J] "Fi" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-42 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the revival effect and displays a second revival display REI2 (in this example, “FE ” image) is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire second revival display in black, which is a complementary color to white. Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance sound J [first performance sound J] "F" to be continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds in FIGS. 133-43 (4) and (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 133-42 (2) and (3) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-43 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the revival effect and displays a third revival display REI3 (in this example, "FEVER") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. ” image) is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire third revival display in white. Further, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound J [first performance sound J and second performance sound J] "Fever" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-44 (7), at the timing when the victory performance in the variable pattern should be executed, the performance control CPU 120 ends the revival performance and executes the victory performance. The effect image at this time is the same as that shown in FIG. 133-37 (11), so a description thereof will be omitted.

[Round display]
In this embodiment, in the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the number of rounds of the jackpot round game and the number of rounds of the jackpot round game via the small win including the small win are displayed on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5. It is possible to display the display. Hereinafter, the period of the jackpot round game will be appropriately referred to as the "jackpot round period".

[In case of pattern jackpot]
In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is a symbol jackpot,
Round display = number of jackpot rounds.
For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", the first round of the jackpot game is displayed as round display = "1ROUND", and the 10th round of the jackpot game is displayed as round display = "10ROUND".

[In case of jackpot via small hit]
In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is a jackpot via small hit,
(1) Small winning game: Round display = 1ROUND
(2) Jackpot game: Round display = number of jackpot rounds + 1
It becomes.
For example, if the jackpot type is "10 (9) R time saving jackpot via small hit", the round display = "1ROUND" will be displayed for the small win game, and the round display = "2ROUND" will be displayed for the first round of the jackpot game. In the ninth round of the jackpot game, the round display = "10 ROUND" is displayed.

[Songs during the jackpot round]
In this embodiment, in a jackpot game, a player can select a song to be played and output during a jackpot round. Specifically, if the V stock performance is not executed during the jackpot, the player can arbitrarily select a song from songs A to C to be played back and output during the jackpot round.

In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a special operation section (in this example, a cross key (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1). During a period when music can be selected during a jackpot game, only the left and right keys of the special operation section can be operated, and when the left and right keys of the special operation section are operated by the player, the music is switched.

Additionally, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a special operation promotion display BT2 (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) that prompts the player to operate the special operation section, and information about the currently selected song. The displayed song display (an object imitating a musical note, the name of the song being played (selected)) is displayed.

In this embodiment, even during the jackpot round, there are cases where it is not possible to select a song, such as when a V stock effect described below is executed, and in this case, a special operation promotion display is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. By not displaying BT2, the player is made aware that music cannot be selected.

In this embodiment, only the left and right keys of the special operation unit can be operated, so the special operation promotion display BT2 is in a form indicating that only the left and right keys of the special operation unit can be operated (only the left and right keys are colored). It is displayed in the form marked with ).

<Example of round display>
FIGS. 133-45 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images of each effect related to the round display.

<Example of round display for symbol jackpot>
FIG. 133-45(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the round display when a symbol jackpot occurs. This example shows an example in which a round display is displayed when the jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot".

First, as shown in FIG. 133-45(A):(1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the normal A jackpot round game image OAI is displayed. This jackpot round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "1ROUND"), a prize ball number display indicating the total number of awarded balls (in this example, the characters "00000pt"), and a normal jackpot. This is an image that includes a background image (a background image that includes a mountain, the sun, and musical notes).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed hitting promotion image at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. This always-right-hitting promotion image includes the words "Right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs players to hit right in order to win into the second starting winning hole, the big winning hole, or the V winning hole (here, the big winning hole). This is an image containing.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the characters "Song A") at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

<Example of round display of jackpot via small win>
FIG. 133-45(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the round display when a small hit and a jackpot via small win occur. This example shows an example in which a round display is displayed when a small hit, a V prize, and a jackpot with the small hit type of "symbol 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot" occur.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-45(B):(1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small win game image KI. . This small winning game image includes a round display (in this example, the words "1 Round"), the words "Aim for the V Attacker!!" to win the prize in the V winning hole, and an arrow image instructing to hit to the right. This is an image that includes a jackpot right-hitting promotion image that includes the player, and an image that includes the ally character (A).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed hitting promotion image at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. This always-right-hitting promotion image includes the words "Right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs players to hit right in order to win into the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, or the V winning opening (here, the V winning opening). This is an image containing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-45(B):(2), at the timing when a game ball wins in the V winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the performance control CPU 120 changes the image A V winning prize occurrence display VI (in this example, the characters "V GET") is displayed in the center of the screen of the display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-45(B):(3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the normal A jackpot round game image OAI is displayed. This jackpot round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "2ROUND"), a prize ball number display indicating the total number of awarded balls (in this example, the characters "00600pt"), and a normal jackpot. This is an image including a background image.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed hitting promotion image at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the characters "Song A") at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

[Holding continuous performance]
In the present embodiment, a case where pending information determined to be controlled to be a "win" (either a "big hit" or a "small hit") is stored in the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is referred to as a "pending series". It is called. In this embodiment, among the pending information stored when a jackpot occurs, there is pending information that will become a "win" in the future, and the pending information that was stored when a jackpot occurred during a jackpot gaming state or a time saving state. It is possible to execute a holding continuous performance that notifies that the next "win" will occur consecutively within the range of . In addition, if the display result of the pending information is "small win", it will be a jackpot via small win based on the occurrence of V winning, so the pending information of the small win is the pending memory information of the hit that will become a jackpot in the future. I can say that there is.

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period is appropriately referred to as the "jackpot FF period", the jackpot round period is appropriately called the "jackpot RD period", and the jackpot ending period is appropriately called the "jackpot ED period".

The suspended continuous performance includes a first suspended continuous performance and a second suspended continuous performance. The first pending continuous performance is a performance that notifies you that successive hits will occur at a predetermined timing (in this example, the jackpot FF period or the jackpot RD period) when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. be. The second hold continuous performance is performed at a predetermined timing when the time saving state is controlled (in this example, the period from when the time saving state is controlled until the winning fluctuating display that is the target of the held continuous performance starts) ) to notify you that successive hits will occur.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of second pending memories is "4", so if the display results of all pending memories are "win", the maximum value of the number of pending series, which is the number of pending series, is "4". 4".

[Next production confirmed]
In this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot type is "next confirmed jackpot"("symbol 10R time saving jackpot" (99 times) or "10 (9) time saving via small hit" where the time saving control number is 99 times). "Jackpot" (99 times)), and the next "hit" will be notified that the next "hit" will occur continuously in the time-saving state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state or time-saving state during the jackpot gaming state or time-saving state. It is possible to execute a confirmed performance. Hereinafter, the case where the next "win" occurs continuously will be referred to as "next series".

The next confirmed performance includes a first confirmed performance and a second confirmed performance. The first confirmed performance notifies that hits will occur substantially continuously at a predetermined timing (in this example, the jackpot FF period or the jackpot RD period) when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It is a performance that The second confirmed performance is performed virtually continuously at a predetermined timing when the time-saving state is controlled (in this example, the period from when the time-saving state is controlled until the next winning fluctuation display starts). This is a performance to notify you that a hit will occur.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of second pending memories is "4", so if the jackpot type of the relevant jackpot and the jackpot types of all pending memories are "next confirmed jackpot", the number of the next series is The maximum value of the next consecutive number is "5".

[V stock production]
In this embodiment, the case where there is at least one of the "reserved series" and the "next series" is appropriately referred to as "V stock" and "wins are stocked." In this embodiment, the performance mode of the suspended continuous performance and the next confirmed performance is the same, and the execution timing of the suspended continuous performance and the next confirmed performance is also the same, so the suspended continuous performance and the next confirmed performance are called "V stock performance" It is called.

In this embodiment, since the upper limit value of the second pending storage number is "4", the maximum value of the V stock number (pending series number or next series number), which is the number of V stocks, is "5".

As shown in FIG. 133-46, the first pending consecutive performance and the first confirmed performance executed in the jackpot gaming state are referred to as the "first V stock performance", and the second pending continuous performance executed in the time saving state is referred to as the "first V stock performance". The second confirmed performance will be referred to as the "second V stock performance."

<1st V stock performance>
Among the V stock performances, the first V stock performances (first pending continuous performance, first confirmed performance) are a series of performances shown below.

First, a first V stock display is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing when the jackpot game state is controlled. The first V stock display is composed of the initial letter "V" of "V STOCK" indicating that the vehicle is in V stock, and a character (A) is shown inside the first V stock display. In the first V stock display, the display color of the entire first V stock display is white. At this time, the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "b" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] "We, we, we, we, welcome lucky (hereinafter omitted)" is also reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, by setting the channel setting ratio of the production sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 100%, and setting the channel setting ratio of the music X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 20%, The clarity of music X is reduced, and the clarity of production sound A is improved. Furthermore, if any of the songs (songs A to C) is being played back and output before the first V stock performance is executed, the playback and output of that song is ended, and the playback and output of song X is started. That is, song X, which is a song related to the first V stock performance, is played back and output giving priority to other songs.

Next, a second V stock display, which is a larger image than the first V stock display, is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The second V stock display is composed of the initial letter "V" of "V STOCK" indicating that the vehicle is in V stock, and a character (A) is shown inside the second V stock display. In the second V stock display, the display color of the entire second V stock display is black, which is complementary to white. At this time, the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "b" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the music X [music data X2] is also continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the first V stock display is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the first V stock display, the display color of the entire first V stock display is white. At this time, the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "b" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the music X [music data X2] is also continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a second V stock display is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the second V stock display, the display color of the entire second V stock display is black, which is complementary to white. At this time, the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "b" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the music X [music data X2] is also continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a third V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The third V stock display is composed of the characters "V STOCK" indicating that the vehicle is in V stock, and a character (A) is shown inside the third V stock display. In the third V stock display, the character "V" is displayed in white, and the character "STOCK" is displayed in black. In addition, the effect sound A [first effect sound A and second effect sound A] "buoy stock" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the music X [music data X2] is also continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the first V stock display and the second V stock display are displayed, the first effect sound A is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. , bu, bu, bu stock' is played back and output. (See Figures 133-51 and 133-52).

Next, an operation promotion display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the music X [music data X2] is continuously being reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.), a V stock number display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The V stock number display is composed of a rainbow-colored character "V", a black character "STOCK", and a character "x[V stock number]". In the [Number of V stocks] part of "×[Number of V stocks]", numbers from "1" to "5" are shown depending on the number of V stocks. At this time, the music X [music data X2] is continuously being reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the special jackpot round game image OBI is displayed on the image display device 5. This jackpot round game image includes a round display, a prize ball number display, a special jackpot background image (background image including character A, character B, and character C), a rainbow-colored caption display, and a reduced V stock. This is an image that includes a number display.

At this time, the song X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] "We, we, we, we, welcome lucky (hereinafter omitted)" is continuously being played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R. . At this time, the clarity of the song X is improved by setting the channel setting ratio of the song X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 100%.

Then, the first V stock performance ends when the jackpot game state ends. In the first V stock performance during the jackpot RD period, the special jackpot round game image OBI is continuously displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the first V stock performance of the final round in the jackpot RD period, a rainbow telop display and a V stock number display are superimposed on the jackpot final round game image OLI. In the first V stock of the jackpot ED period, only rainbow-colored telops are continuously displayed at the upper right and lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Since the jackpot ED period is a period in which a time-saving rush performance to be described later is executed, a rainbow-colored telop display is superimposed on the performance image of the time-saving rush performance.

<2nd V stock performance>
Among the V stock performances, the second V stock performance (second pending continuous performance, second confirmed performance) is a series of performances shown below.

First, at the timing when control to the time saving state is started, a special time saving background image is displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 133-63). This special time-saving background image includes the words "Powerful RUSH", production mode emblems ("Yumemu Mode" emblem, "Nana Mode" emblem, "Jam Mode" emblem), a rainbow-colored caption display, and a reduced V stock. This is an image including a number display and each character (Character A, Character B, Character C). The special time-saving background images include a first special time-saving background image (compatible with dream mode), a second special time-saving background image (compatible with Nana mode), and a third special time-saving background image (compatible with jam mode).

At this time, a special active display guide ACG for displaying an active display is displayed in the active display area ACE, and a special second pending display guide PD2G for displaying a second pending display is displayed in the second pending display area PD2E. Is displayed.

Next, when the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of V stock is started, the second V stock effect is finished, the reduced V stock number display of the special time saving background image is consumed (erased), A V stock release effect (not shown) is executed to notify that a "win" corresponding to the V stock will occur in the fluctuating display. In this embodiment, even after the second V stock performance is finished and the V stock release performance is executed, the special time saving background image other than the reduced V stock number display is continued to be displayed on the image display device 5. It should be noted that during the "win" small win game and jackpot game corresponding to the V stock, only the rainbow-colored telop display continues to be displayed superimposed on the performance image.

In addition, in the second V stock performance, the song X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] that has been scratched from speakers 8L and 8R is "We, We, We, We, Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted)" is played back and output. However, during the period when the special symbol variable display is not being executed, a mute process is executed in which the channel setting ratio of song X is set to 0%, so that the player cannot recognize the playback output of song X. On the other hand, by setting the channel setting ratio of song X to 100% during the period in which the variable display of the special symbols is being executed, the player can recognize the playback output of song X.

[Process for determining performance at the start of jackpot]
FIG. 133-47 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the jackpot. The performance control CPU 120 executes the jackpot start performance determination process shown in FIG. 133-47 in the jackpot performance process (step S176) of the performance control process shown in FIG. 131. Specifically, upon receiving the jackpot start designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance to be executed (and the performance not to be executed) during the jackpot by the jackpot start performance determination process shown in FIG. 133-47.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot is a jackpot that occurs during the rush challenge or powerful rush performance mode (step S05TM3010). If the jackpot is not a jackpot that occurred during the rush challenge or powerful rush performance mode (step S05TM3010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot is a jackpot that occurred during the rush challenge or powerful rush production mode (step S05TM3010: YES), the production control CPU 120 decides to execute a jackpot type notification production to be described later (step S05TM3020), it is determined whether any display result of the pending memory is a "small hit" or a "big win" (step S05TM3030).

If the display result of any of the pending memories is "small hit" or "big hit" (step S05TM3030: YES), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM3050.

If none of the display results in the suspended memory is a "small hit" or "big hit" (step S05TM3030: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A". (Step S05TM3040). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is not "10R jackpot A" (step S05TM3040: NO), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM3080.

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A" (step S05TM3040: YES), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM3050.

After step S05TM3030: YES or step S05TM3040: YES, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first V stock performance, and determines whether or not to execute the first V stock performance (see FIG. 133-48 (A)). (see) (step S05TM3050), and determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the first V stock performance (step S05TM3060). If it is determined not to execute the first V stock performance (step S05TM3060: NO), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM3080.

If it is determined to execute the first V stock performance (step S05TM3060: YES), the performance control CPU 120 sets a V stock flag to be described later (step S05TM3070), and advances the process to step S05TM3080.

After step S05TM3040: NO, step S05TM3060: NO, or step S05TM3070, the performance control CPU 120 determines the jackpot type notified in the jackpot type notification performance, and the jackpot type notified in the jackpot type notification performance. The determination is made based on the table (see FIG. 133-48(B)) (step S05TM3080), and the process is immediately terminated.

In this embodiment, the V stock flag is a type of performance flag that is set based on the fact that it has been determined that the first V stock performance will be performed. By setting the V stock flag, it becomes possible to decide to execute the second V stock performance in the fluctuation start waiting performance determination process described later, and the second V stock performance can be determined in the fluctuation start performance determination process described later. It becomes possible to decide to continue execution. This V stock flag is erased when the winning fluctuation display corresponding to the V stock (reserved series, next series) that is the target when the V stock flag is set is completed.

[Table referenced in the production determination process at the start of jackpot]
FIGS. 133-48 (A) and (B) are specific examples of tables that are referred to in any of the jackpot start performance determination processes. FIG. 133-48(A) is an example of a first V stock performance execution/non-execution determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to perform the first V stock performance in step S05TM3050. FIG. 133-48(B) is an example of a jackpot type determination table notified in the jackpot type notification performance that is referred to when determining the jackpot type notified in the jackpot type notification performance in step S05TM3080.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute the 1st V stock production>
FIG. 133-48(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table of the first V stock performance. As shown in FIG. 133-48 (A), in this embodiment, the items for whether or not to execute the first V stock performance are "no execution", "execution (jackpot FF period)", and "execution (jackpot FF period)". RD period)" can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these items. “Executed (Jackpot FF period)” means that it is decided to execute the 1st V stock performance during the jackpot FF period, and “Executed (Jackpot RD period)” means that the 1st V stock performance is decided to be executed during the jackpot RD period. It is what you decide to do during the period.

As shown in Figure 133-48 (A), 50% of the time it is determined that there is no execution, 25% of the time it is determined that there is execution (jackpot FF period), and 25% of the time it is determined that there is no execution. Yes (Jackpot RD period)” is decided.

<Jackpot type determination table notified in the jackpot type notification performance>
FIG. 133-48(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the jackpot type determination table notified in the jackpot type notification performance. As shown in FIG. 133-48(B), in this embodiment, the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A", "10R jackpot B", or "3R jackpot B", and the V stock Depending on whether the flag is set or not, the type of jackpot to be notified in the jackpot type notification performance is determined.

As shown in Figure 133-48 (B), when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A", when the V stock flag is not set (when the V stock flag is not set), the following 2. When the jackpot type "MAX BONUS" is determined and the V stock flag is set (when the V stock flag is set), and the execution timing of the 1st V stock performance is during the jackpot FF period, as described below. When the third jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" is determined and the V stock flag is set, and the execution timing of the first V stock performance is during the jackpot RD period, the second jackpot type "MAX BONUS" decided on.

In addition, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R Jackpot B", when the V stock flag is not set, the second jackpot type is determined as "MAX BONUS", and when the V stock flag is set, When the execution timing of the 1st V stock performance is during the jackpot FF period, the 3rd jackpot type is determined as “V STOCK BONUS”, and the V stock flag is set, and the execution timing of the 1st V stock performance is When is the jackpot RD period, the second jackpot type "MAX BONUS" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "3R Jackpot B", when the V stock flag is not set, the first jackpot type is determined as "BONUS", and when the V stock flag is set, , when the execution timing of the 1st V stock performance is during the jackpot FF period, the 3rd jackpot type is determined as "V STOCK BONUS", and the V stock flag is set, and the execution timing of the 1st V stock performance is When it is the jackpot RD period, the first jackpot type "BONUS" is determined.

In this way, since the third jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" is announced only when the V stock flag is set, the third jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" will be announced from now on. It can be said that this is a performance that notifies that a stock performance will be executed.

[Jackpot type notification performance]
In this embodiment, during the jackpot FF period in the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot type notification effect that notifies the jackpot type of the jackpot. The first jackpot that informs that the jackpot type notified in the jackpot type notification performance is "3R jackpot B" (that is, "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" or "3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via small hit"). type and the second jackpot type that informs that it is “10R jackpot B” (that is, “symbol 10R time-saving jackpot” (7 times) or “10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit” (7 times)) and a third jackpot type that informs that it is "10R jackpot A" (that is, "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (99 times) or "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" (99 times)). , is provided.

The first jackpot type is shown with the words "BONUS," the second jackpot type is shown with the words "MAX BONUS," and the third jackpot type is shown with the words "V STOCK BONUS."

The jackpot type notification performance is a series of performances shown below.
First, as shown in FIG. 133-49 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot FF period, the first jackpot type candidate OSA is displayed at the top center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the second jackpot type candidate is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Display OSB and a third jackpot type candidate display OSC are displayed at the lower right corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-49 (2), an operation promotion display BT is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B). The type candidate display OSA, the second jackpot type candidate display OSB, and the third jackpot type candidate display OSC are displayed in a superimposed manner.

Next, when the player operates the operation unit, the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start performance determination process is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133-49 (3A), if the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start performance determination process is the first jackpot type, the characters "BONUS" are displayed as an image. Displayed on the entire screen of the device 5, as shown in FIG. 133-49 (3B), if the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start performance determination process is the second jackpot type, "MAX BONUS" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 133-49 (3C), when the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start performance determination process is the third jackpot type. , "V STOCK BONUS" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

<Example of jackpot (no 1st V stock effect)>
FIG. 133-50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to a jackpot in which the first V stock performance is not executed. In this example, it is assumed that a V winning prize occurs in a small winning game, and a jackpot whose jackpot type is "10 (9) R time saving jackpot via small winning" occurs.

First, the effect images in FIGS. 133-50 (1A) and (1B) are the same as those in FIGS. 133-49 (3A) and (3B) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-50 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal jackpot round game image on the image display device 5. Display OAI. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "2ROUND"), a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "00600pt"), and a normal jackpot background image. . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed hitting promotion image at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the characters "Song A") at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to reproduce and output the performance sound A [music data A] "Powerful Power (hereinafter omitted)" which has not been subjected to scratch processing.

<Jackpot (1st V stock performance available during jackpot FF period)>
FIGS. 133-51 to 133-53 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the jackpot in which the first V stock performance is executed during the jackpot FF period. In this example, it is assumed that a V winning prize occurs in a small winning game, and a jackpot whose jackpot type is "10 (9) R time saving jackpot via small winning" occurs.

First, the effect image in FIG. 133-51 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 133-49 (3C) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-51 (2), at the timing to execute the first V stock performance during the jackpot FF period, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first V stock display VSI1 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Display. The first V stock display is composed of the initial letter "V" of "V STOCK" indicating that the vehicle is in V stock, and a character (A) is shown inside the first V stock display. In the first V stock display, the display color of the entire first V stock display is white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound A [first performance sound A] "b" from the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 also causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output the song X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and song data X2] "We, we, we, we, welcome lucky (hereinafter omitted)" .

In this example, by setting the channel setting ratio of sound production sound A to 100% and setting the channel setting ratio of music X to 20%, the clarity of music X is reduced and the channel setting ratio of sound production sound A is set to 20%. Improves clarity.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-51 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first V stock effect and displays an image larger than the first V stock display in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Display the second V stock display VSI2. The second V stock display is composed of the initial letter "V" of "V STOCK" indicating that the vehicle is in V stock, and a character (A) is shown inside the second V stock display. In the second V stock display, the display color of the entire second V stock display is black, which is complementary to white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to continuously reproduce and output the performance sound A [first performance sound A] "b". Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 continues to reproduce and output the music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds in FIGS. 133-52 (4) and (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 133-51 (2) and (3) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Note that FIG. 133-52 (4) is the same as FIG. 133-51 (2) except that the song X [music data X2] is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-52 (6), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third V stock display VSI3 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The third V stock display is composed of the characters "V STOCK" indicating that the vehicle is in V stock, and a character (A) is shown inside the third V stock display. In the third V stock display, the character "V" is displayed in white, and the character "STOCK" is displayed in black.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound A [first performance sound A and second performance sound A] "buoy stock" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 continues to reproduce and output the music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, each time the first V stock display VSI1 and the second V stock display VSI2 are displayed, the first effect sound A is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R, so the effect sound A is "b, "Boo, bu, bu, bu stock" is being played back and output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-53 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion display in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to reproduce and output the music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-53 (8), at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of V stocks in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The VNI (in this example, "V STOCK x 1") is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to reproduce and output the music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-53 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special jackpot round game image on the image display device 5. Display OBI. This jackpot round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "2ROUND"), a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "00600pt"), a special jackpot background image, and a rainbow telop display TI. This is an image including a reduced V stock number display VNI.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues the song X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] "We, we, we, we, welcome lucky (hereinafter omitted)" from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is output for playback. Note that the clarity of the song X is improved by setting the channel setting ratio of the song X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 100% at the timing when the jackpot round game starts.

<Jackpot (1st V stock performance available during jackpot RD period)>
FIGS. 133-54 to 133-57 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the jackpot in which the first V stock performance is executed during the jackpot RD period. In this example, it is assumed that a V winning prize occurs in a small winning game, and a jackpot whose jackpot type is "10 (9) R time saving jackpot via small winning" occurs.

First, the effect images and effects in Figures 133-54 (1A), (1B), and (2) are the same as those in Figures 133-50 (1A), (1B), and (2), so we will explain them. Omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-54 (3), the performance control CPU 120 executes the first V stock performance, erases the normal jackpot round game image OAI on the image display device 5, and displays the first V stock performance in the center of the screen. Display stock display VSI1. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the round display (in this example, the characters "3ROUND") and the prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "00750pt").

Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to reproduce and output the performance sound A [first performance sound A] "b". In addition, the performance control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of the song A [music data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also causes the music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data Start playing and outputting "We, We, Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted)".

In this example, by setting the channel setting ratio of sound production sound A to 100% and setting the channel setting ratio of music X to 20%, the clarity of music X is reduced and the channel setting ratio of sound production sound A is set to 20%. Improves clarity.

Moreover, although the music X is being reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the performance control CPU 120 does not display any information related to the music at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-54 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first V stock effect and displays an image larger than the first V stock display in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Display the second V stock display VSI2. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the round display (in this example, the characters "3ROUND") and the prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "00750pt").

Further, the performance control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to continuously reproduce and output the performance sound A [first performance sound A] "b". Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 continues to reproduce and output the music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds in FIGS. 133-55 (5) and (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 133-54 (3) and 133-55 (4) described above, so the explanation will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 133-54 (3) and FIG. 133-55 (4), it is assumed that the round display and the prize ball number display have been updated as shown in the figures. 133-55(5) is the same as FIG. 133-54(3) except that music X [music data X2] is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect images and effects in Figures 133-56 (7) to 133-57 (10) are the same as those in Figures 133-52 (6) to 133-53 (9), so they will be explained below. Omitted. Note that in FIGS. 133-56 (7) to 133-57 (10), it is assumed that the round display and the prize ball number display have been updated as shown in the figures.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133-57 (10), the performance control CPU 120 outputs music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data , Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted)" is continuously played and output. The clarity of the song X is improved by setting the channel setting ratio of the song X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 100% at the timing when the jackpot round game starts. Along with this, the performance control CPU 120 causes a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the characters "Song X") to be displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. However, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the special operation promotion display BT2 at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this way, when the 1st V stock performance is executed during the jackpot RD period, various performances related to the jackpot round game that was being executed before the 1st V stock performance (usually the display of the jackpot round game image, the music This is different from the various performances related to the jackpot round game that were being executed first (display of the normal jackpot round game image, playback output of song A) after the first V stock performance was interrupted and the playback output of song A) was interrupted. The various production modes (display of special jackpot round game image, reproduction output of song X) are restarted.

[Performance decision processing at the end of jackpot]
FIG. 133-58 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the jackpot. The performance control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end performance determination process shown in FIG. 133-58 in the jackpot performance process (step S176) of the performance control process process shown in FIG. 131. Specifically, upon receiving the jackpot end designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance to be executed (and the performance not to be executed) at the end of the jackpot using the performance determination process at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 133-58.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode after the end of the jackpot is the rush mode (step S05TM4010). If the performance mode after the end of the jackpot is not the rush mode (step S05TM4010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the performance mode after the end of the jackpot is the rush mode (step S05TM4010: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute a time-saving rush performance to be described later (step S05TM4020), and ends the process as it is.

[Production mode in rush mode]
In this embodiment, "dream mode", "nana mode", and "jam mode" are provided as production modes when the rush mode is controlled. "Dream mode" is a production mode in which character A mainly appears, "Nana mode" is a production mode in which character B mainly appears, and "Jam mode" is a production mode in which character C mainly appears. mode.

In this embodiment, the player can select which performance mode to play in the rush mode. Specifically, in the final round of the jackpot round game (3rd round for a 3R jackpot, 10th round for a 10R jackpot), a jackpot final round game image is displayed on the image display device 5. This jackpot final round game image has a first selection section (dream mode) on the left side of the screen, a second selection section (nana mode) on the center of the screen, and a third selection section (jam mode) on the right side of the screen. , is provided. By operating the operation section, the player can select any of the production modes shown in the first to third selection sections of this jackpot final round game image.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot final round game image displayed on the image display device 5, the selection part in the selected state among each selection part is the normal color (the normal character color of each character (Character A: green hair, skin color (skin color, cloak red, etc.)), and this state is called the "selection mode", and the production mode that is not selected among each selection section is displayed entirely in gray; This is called a "non-selected mode."

In this embodiment, when the final round of the jackpot round game is started and the display of the jackpot final round game image is started on the image display device 5, the first selected part (dream mode) of the jackpot final round game image is displayed. is displayed in a selected mode, and the second selection section (Nana mode) and the third selection section (jam mode) are displayed in a non-selection mode. Then, when the final round of the jackpot round game is finished and the display of the jackpot final round game image is finished on the image display device 5, an effect corresponding to the selection part of the jackpot final round game image that is in the selection mode is provided. The mode is determined as the production mode to be executed in rush mode.

<Production example of production mode in rush mode>
FIG. 133-59 is an explanation showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the case where a performance mode in the rush mode is selected in the final round of the jackpot round period and the performance mode is controlled by the rush mode of the selected performance mode. It is a diagram.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-59 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (last round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot final round game image on the image display device 5. Display OLI. This jackpot final round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Final ROUND"), a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "00300pt"), and the first to third selection parts. This is an image containing . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first selection section in a selected mode, and displays the second selection section and the third selection section in a non-selected mode. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the letters "Song A") at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this state, when the CPU 103 ends the round game (last round) in the jackpot game state, the pattern determined in the first selection part (dream mode) shown in FIG. 133-59 (2A), FIG. 133-59 (2B) or the pattern determined in the third selection section (jam mode) shown in FIG. 133-59 (2C).

(Pattern determined in the first selection part (dream mode))
As shown in FIG. 133-59 (2A), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (last round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the first The selection section is displayed in a selected mode, and the second selection section and the third selection section are displayed in a non-selected mode. At this time, the round display (in this example, the characters "Final ROUND") and the prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the dream-dream mode corresponding to the first selection section as the effect mode of the rush mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-59 (3A), when the time saving state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to rush mode: dream dream mode, the production control CPU 120 displays a background image on the image display device 5. 1 Display the normal time-saving background image. This first normal time saving background image includes the words "POWERFUL RUSH", the remaining time saving number display (in this example, the words "6 times remaining"), the "Dream Mode" emblem EMI1, and the character (A) CA. This is an image containing .

At this time, based on the fact that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the performance control CPU 120 is executing the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. . Further, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

(Pattern determined by the second selection part (Nana mode))
As shown in FIG. 133-59 (2B), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (last round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the second The selection section is displayed in a selected mode, and the first selection section and the third selection section are displayed in a non-selected mode. At this time, the round display (in this example, the characters "Final ROUND") and the prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the Nana mode corresponding to the second selection section as the effect mode of the rush mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-59 (3B), when the time saving state is controlled and the presentation mode is controlled to rush mode: nana mode, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a second normal image on the image display device 5 as a background image. Display a time-saving background image. This second normal time saving background image includes the words "POWERFUL RUSH", the remaining time saving number display (in this example, the words "6 remaining times"), the "Nana mode" emblem EMI2, and the character (B) CB. This is an image containing .

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 causes the variable display of the small symbol to be displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Running. Further, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

(Pattern determined by the third selection part (jam mode))
As shown in FIG. 133-59 (2C), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (last round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the third The selection section is displayed in a selected mode, and the first selection section and the second selection section are displayed in a non-selected mode. At this time, the round display (in this example, the characters "Final ROUND") and the prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the jam mode corresponding to the third selection section as the effect mode of the rush mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-59 (3C), when the time saving state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to rush mode: jam mode, the production control CPU 120 displays the third background image on the image display device 5. Display the normal time-saving background image. This third normal time saving background image includes the words "POWERFUL RUSH", the remaining time saving number display (in this example, the words "6 times remaining"), the "JAM MODE" emblem EMI3, and the characters (C) and CC. This is an image containing .

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 causes the variable display of the small symbol to be displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Running. Further, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

[Process for determining performance while waiting for fluctuation to start]
FIG. 133-60 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed while waiting for the start of variation. The performance control CPU 120 executes the variation start waiting performance determination process shown in FIG. 133-60 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) of the performance control process process shown in FIG. 131. Specifically, upon receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the production control CPU 120 selects the production to be executed (and the production not to be executed) during the waiting period for the variable display start, through the variation start waiting production determination process shown in FIG. 133-60. Determined by.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is the rush mode (step S05TM5010). If the production mode is not the rush mode (step S05TM5010: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the process.

When the production mode is the rush mode (step S05TM5010: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the V stock flag is set (step S05TM5020). If the V stock flag is not set (step S05TM5020: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V stock flag is set (step S05TM5020: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the second V stock performance (step S05TM5020), and ends the process.

In this way, as shown in step S05TM5020: YES to step S05TM5030 of the variation start waiting performance determination process, when the V stock flag is set, it is determined to execute the second V stock performance.

[Processing to determine whether or not to execute the 2nd V stock effect at the start of fluctuation]
FIG. 133-61 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of variation. The performance control CPU 120 executes the second V stock performance execution/nonexecution determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 133-61 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process shown in FIG. 131. Specifically, upon receiving the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. In addition to setting the effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command, it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the second V stock effect. It is determined by the process for determining whether or not to execute the second V stock effect at the start of variation shown in 133-61.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is the rush mode (step S05TM6010). If the production mode is not the rush mode (step S05TM6010: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the process.

When the production mode is the rush mode (step S05TM6010: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the V stock flag is set (step S05TM6020). If the V stock flag is not set (step S05TM6020: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V stock flag is set (step S05TM6020: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuating display is a winning fluctuating display that is subject to the V stock flag (step S05TM6030).

If the fluctuation display is not a hit fluctuation display that is subject to the V stock flag (step S05TM6030: NO), the performance control CPU 120 decides to continue executing the second V stock performance (step S05TM6040), and continues processing. end.

If the fluctuation display is a winning fluctuation display that is subject to the V stock flag (step S05TM6030: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines to end the second V stock performance (step S05TM6050), and ends the process as is. do.

In this way, as shown in step S05TM6020: YES → step S05TM6030: NO → step S05TM6040 of the second V stock effect execution/nonexecution determination process at the start of fluctuation, the V stock flag is set, and the fluctuation display is set to V. If the winning fluctuation display is not the target of the stock flag, it is decided to continue executing the second V stock performance. In addition, as shown in step S05TM6020: YES → step S05TM6030: YES → step S05TM6050 of the second V stock performance execution/nonexecution determination process at the start of fluctuation, the V stock flag is set, and the fluctuation display is set to the V stock flag. In the case of a win fluctuation display subject to the above, it is decided to end the second V stock performance.

[Production mode depending on the presence or absence of V stock for time saving (rush mode)]
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state (rush mode) is controlled, the presentation mode related to the presentation image and presentation sound during the rush mode differs depending on whether or not the V stock flag is set. That is, the presentation mode of the rush mode differs depending on whether the second V stock presentation is being executed.

In this embodiment, the player can select a song to be played back and output during the rush mode. Specifically, if the V stock effect is not being executed during the rush mode, the player can arbitrarily select a song from songs A to C to be played back and output during the rush mode. Additionally, if the V stock effect is being executed during rush mode, the player cannot arbitrarily select the song to be played back and output during rush mode from songs A to C, and , the song X is fixed and reproduced.

<Example of production in case of time saving (no 2nd V stock production)>
FIG. 133-62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance image and sound of each performance related to when the second V stock performance is not executed when the gaming state is the time saving state and the performance mode is the rush mode. . This example shows an example in which the second V stock performance is not executed based on the fact that the V stock flag is not set when the performance mode is controlled to the dream dream mode.

As shown in FIG. 133-62, when the time saving state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to rush mode: dream dream mode, the production control CPU 120 displays a first normal time saving background image on the image display device 5 as a background image. Display. This first normal time saving background image includes the words "POWERFUL RUSH", the remaining time saving number display (in this example, the words "6 times remaining"), the "Dream Mode" emblem EMI1, and the character (A) CA. This is an image containing .

At this time, based on the CPU 103 executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display AC in the normal mode in the active display area ACE, and displays four second pending displays PD2 in the normal mode in the second pending display area PD2E.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the letters "Song A") at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the song A [music data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of production in case of time saving (with 2nd V stock production)>
FIG. 133-63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance image and sound of each performance related to when the second V stock performance is executed when the gaming state is the time saving state and the performance mode is the rush mode. be. This example shows an example in which the second V stock performance is executed based on the fact that the V stock flag is set when the performance mode is controlled to the dream dream mode.

As shown in FIG. 133-63, when the time saving state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to rush mode: dream dream mode, the production control CPU 120 displays a first special time saving background image on the image display device 5 as a background image. Display. This first special time-saving background image includes the words "Powerful RUSH", the "Dream Mode" emblem EMI1, the character (A) CA, the rainbow telop display TI, and the reduced V stock number display VNI. This is an image containing.

At this time, based on the CPU 103 executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the special active display guide ACG in the active display area ACE to display the active display AC in the normal mode, and displays the active display AC in the normal mode in the special second pending display guide PD2G in the second pending display area PD2E. Four 2-pending displays PD2 are displayed.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 causes a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the characters "Song X") to be displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the time-saving state where the second V stock performance is not being executed, the player can arbitrarily select the song for the rush mode from among multiple types of songs (in this example, songs A to C). Since this is possible, a special operation promotion display BT2 is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the time-saving state where the second V stock performance is being executed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the song in the rush mode from among multiple types of songs (in this example, songs A to C). Therefore, the special operation promotion display BT2 is not displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, the fixed effect image (hereinafter referred to as "interface" as appropriate) displayed on the image display device 5 indicates that the second V stock effect is being executed, rather than in the time saving state where the second V stock effect is not being executed. The display mode is even more gorgeous in the time saving state. The interface in this embodiment refers to an area for displaying a corresponding display (active display area, second pending display area) and a background image.

Specifically, in the time saving state where the 2nd V stock effect is not being executed, a simple active display guide is displayed in the active display area, and while no guide is displayed in the second pending display area, the 2nd V stock effect is displayed in the active display area. In a time saving state where stock performance is being executed, a gorgeous special active display guide ACG is displayed in the active display area, and a gorgeous special second pending display guide PD2G is displayed in the second pending display area. In addition, in the time-saving state where the second V stock effect is not being executed, the background image does not include the rainbow-colored caption TI, while in the time-saving state where the second V-stock effect is being executed, the background image does not include the rainbow-colored caption TI. Display TI is included.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time saving state where the second V stock performance is not executed, the remaining time saving number display is displayed, while in the time saving state where the second V stock performance is being executed, the remaining time saving number display is displayed. Not displayed. This is because in the time-saving state where the next "win" is not determined and the second V stock effect is not being executed, the player must generate a "win" before the rush mode ends. Since the remaining time saving number display is information necessary for the player to recognize the remaining time saving number, the remaining time saving number display is displayed. On the other hand, in the time-saving state where the second V stock performance is being executed, in which the next "win" is determined, the player is aware that the "win" will occur before the rush mode ends. Therefore, the remaining time saving number display that allows the player to recognize the remaining time saving number is unnecessary information for the player, so the remaining time saving number display is not displayed.

In addition, in the time saving state where the second V stock effect is being executed, the remaining time saving number display may be displayed. In this case, the remaining time reduction count display will be displayed as "∞ times remaining." In the time saving state where the 2nd V stock effect is being executed, in which the next "win" is confirmed, the remaining time saving number is infinite (remaining time saving number display "∞ times remaining") to suggest. This can suggest that the time-saving state will continue until the next "win" occurs, and can reassure the player. However, in reality, infinite time saving control is not performed, and by displaying "∞ times remaining" as the number of remaining time saving times, it is suggested that the time saving control is on hold or will be continued next time.

[Round display after V stock performance]
In this embodiment, when a "win" that is the target of the V stock performance occurs after the V stock performance is executed, the round display for the "win" is displayed inheriting the round display for the previous jackpot. . Specifically, if the jackpot type of the previous "jackpot" when the V stock performance was executed was "10R jackpot" (that is, the round display of the jackpot round game was displayed from "1ROUND" to "10ROUND") In case), in a small win game or a jackpot round game corresponding to a "win" that is the target of the V stock performance that occurs thereafter, the round display is displayed from "11 ROUND".

<Jackpot round after V stock performance>
FIG. 133-64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the round display corresponding to the "win" that occurs after the V stock performance. In this example, the jackpot type of the "jackpot" for which the V stock performance was executed is "10 (9) R time saving jackpot via small hit", and the jackpot type of the "hit" targeted by the V stock performance is "small hit". An example of "10 (9) R time saving jackpot" is shown.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-64 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing a round game (last round) in a jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot final round game image on the image display device 5. Display OLI. This jackpot final round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Final ROUND"), a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "01950pt"), and the first to third selection parts. This is an image containing . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first selection section in a selected mode, and displays the second selection section and the third selection section in a non-selected mode. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 causes a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the characters "Song X") to be displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes the first V stock performance, and causes the rainbow color telop display TI and the V stock number display VNI to be displayed in a superimposed manner on the jackpot final round game image OLI on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect image in FIG. 133-64(2) is the same as that in FIG. 133-63 described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Then, after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed one or more times, a variable hit display that is subject to V stock is executed. In this variation, it is assumed that the V stock release effect is executed and the V stock number display VNI at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-64 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the production control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command changes the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At 5L, 5C, and 5R, the final decorative pattern combination (in this example, "333") is determined and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols (in this example, "333") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern whose display result is a "small win" is determined and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-64 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small win game image KI. This small winning game image includes a round display (in this example, the words "11 Round"), the words "Aim for the V Attacker!!" to win the prize in the V winning hole, and an arrow image instructing to hit to the right. This is an image that includes a jackpot right-hitting promotion image that includes the player, and an image that includes the ally character (A).

Next, at the timing when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the performance control CPU 120 displays a V winning occurrence display VI in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-64 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special jackpot round game image on the image display device 5. Display OBI. This jackpot round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "12ROUND"), a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "02100pt"), a special jackpot background image, and a rainbow telop display TI. This is an image containing . At this time, based on the fact that the V stock number is 0, the reduced V stock number display VNI is not displayed in the jackpot round game image. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 causes a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the characters "Song X") to be displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

[Time-saving rush performance]
In this embodiment, when the performance mode controlled after a jackpot is rush mode, it is possible to execute a time-saving entry performance that notifies that the rush mode will be controlled during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot. The time-saving rush performance is a series of performances shown below.

First, when the time-saving rush effect is executed, a rush mode explanation image JRI is displayed on the image display device 5. The rush mode explanation image includes information explaining the rush mode playing method, a demo icon that indicates to the player that the player is not currently controlled to save time and does not need to operate the batting operation handle 30, and a character. This is an image containing A. At this time, the effect sound F is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the third countdown image CDI3 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the display of the third countdown image is started, the third countdown image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. The third countdown image is an image that includes the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" on the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen. A color is added (hereinafter appropriately referred to as a "colored aspect"), and no color is added to the numbers "2" and "1" (hereinafter referred to as a "colorless aspect"). By displaying the numbers in a colored manner, the player can recognize that the countdown to that number is progressing. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown has progressed to "3" out of the "321" countdown. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F3] "Three" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the second countdown image CDI2 is displayed on the image display device 5. The second countdown image is an image that includes the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" on the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen. '' is displayed in a colored manner, and the number ``1'' is displayed in a colorless manner. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown has progressed to "2" out of the "321" countdowns. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F2] "Two" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the first countdown image CDI1 is displayed on the image display device 5. The first countdown image is an image that includes the number “3” on the left side of the screen, the number “2” on the center of the screen, and the number “1” on the right side of the screen. ", and the number "1" are displayed in a colored manner. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown has progressed to "1" out of the "321" countdown. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F1] "One" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the start image JSI is displayed on the image display device 5. The start image is an image that includes the characters "START" and a rightward arrow object. When the display of the start image is started, the start image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. At this time, the effect sound F [second effect sound F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second effect sound F and third effect sound F] "s, s, s, s, start" are heard from speakers 8L and 8R. It is played back and output.

<Example of time-saving rush performance>
FIGS. 133-65 to 133-67 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the time-saving rush effect. In this example, an example is shown in which the time-saving entry effect is executed during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot game state, and then the time-saving state is controlled.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-65 (1), the performance control CPU 120 executes the time-saving entry effect at the timing when the time-saving entry effect should be executed in the jackpot ED period of the jackpot game state, and displays the information on the image display device 5. Display the rush mode explanation image JRI. The rush mode explanation image contains information that explains how to play rush mode (in this example, "Keep hitting right until there are no powerful RUSH left!") and information that explains the rush mode game method (in this example, "Keep hitting right until there are 0 powerful RUSHs left!") and information that explains the rush mode game method. First, it is an image that includes a demo icon (in this example, an icon showing the letters "DEMO") that suggests to the player that there is no need to operate the ball-hitting operation handle 30, and the character A. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound F [sound effect] (not shown) from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-65 (2), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the time-saving entry performance and causes the image display device 5 to display the third countdown image CDI3. When the display of the third countdown image is started, the third countdown image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. The third countdown image is an image that includes the number “3” on the left side of the screen, the number “2” on the center of the screen, and the number “1” on the right side of the screen, and the number “3” is It is displayed in a colored manner, and the numbers "2" and "1" are displayed in a colorless manner. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound F [first performance sound F3] "Three" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-65 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the time-saving entry performance and causes the image display device 5 to display the second countdown image CDI2. The second countdown image is an image that includes the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" on the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen. '' is displayed in a colored manner, and the number ``1'' is displayed in a colorless manner. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound F [first performance sound F2] "Two" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-66 (4), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the time-saving entry performance and causes the image display device 5 to display the first countdown image CDI1. The first countdown image is an image that includes the number “3” on the left side of the screen, the number “2” on the center of the screen, and the number “1” on the right side of the screen. ", and the number "1" are displayed in a colored manner. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound F [first performance sound F1] "One" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-66 (5), the start image JSI is displayed on the image display device 5. The start image is an image that includes the characters "START" and a rightward arrow object. When the display of the start image is started, the start image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 outputs the performance sound F [second performance sound F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second performance sound F and third performance sound F] "S, S, S..." from the speakers 8L and 8R. ,S,Start' is output live.

In this way, when the start image in the time-saving rush effect is displayed, the second effect sound F is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance sound F is reproduced and output as "S, S, S, S, Start."

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-66 (6), when the time saving state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to rush mode: dream dream mode, the production control CPU 120 displays a background image on the image display device 5. 1 Display the normal time-saving background image. This first normal time-saving background image is an image that includes the words "POWERFUL RUSH", the remaining time-saving number display (in this example, the words "7 times remaining"), and the "Yume Yume Mode" emblem EMI1. . At this time, the character (A) CA is not displayed in the first normal time saving background image.

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has not executed the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the variation in which the previous jackpot occurred in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The final decorative pattern combination (in this example, "333") to be displayed is fixed and stopped, and the small pattern combination (in this example, "333") is permanently stopped. Moreover, the production control CPU 120 displays four second suspension displays PD2 in the normal mode in the second suspension display area PD2E.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the letters "Song A") at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. However, at this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not reproduce and output the song A [music data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-67 (7), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the image based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the fact that the second pending memory number has become 3, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to newly display an active display AC in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. , the second pending display PD2 in the normal mode displayed in the second pending display area PD2E is shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the special operation promotion display BT2 and the music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the characters "Song A") at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the song A [music data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 causes the character (A) CA to appear while moving from the left part of the screen to the right part of the screen of the image display device 5. In this example, only the upper body of the character (A) CA is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-67 (8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the character (A) CA to appear while moving from the left part of the screen to the right part of the screen of the image display device 5, and in this example, , the whole body of the character (A) CA is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

[Extermination SP production]
In this embodiment, in the annihilation SP performance of the variation patterns "SP-X miss" and "SP-X jackpot" among the variation patterns that involve super reach, annihilation is used as an indicator of whether or not the enemy character group Y can be annihilated. A gauge is displayed. Here, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "SP-X Jackpot", by operating the operation part (sequentially hitting), you can make the annihilation gauge reach the maximum value (annihilation icon) within the time limit (operation valid period). , an annihilation effect is executed, and it is announced that the final display result is a "jackpot". On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "SP-X is off", by operating the control panel (pressing repeatedly), you can make the annihilation gauge reach the maximum value (annihilation icon) within the time limit (operation valid period). First, the remaining effect is executed, and it is announced that the display result is "miss".

<Example of annihilation SP production>
FIG. 133-68 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the annihilation SP performance. This example shows a pattern example in which a remaining effect is executed while an annihilation SP effect is being executed, and a pattern example in which an annihilation effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-68 (1), at the timing when the fluctuation pattern should develop into a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 executes the annihilation SP performance and displays the annihilation SP start image on the image display device 5. let The annihilation SP start image is an image in which an annihilation gauge in the initial mode and the words "annihilate the enemy by pressing the button repeatedly!" are superimposed on the enemy characters Y group CYG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-68 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the annihilation SP effect and causes the image display device 5 to display an annihilation SP continuous hit image. In the annihilation SP repeated hit image, the annihilation gauge GI in the initial state and the operation promotion display BT that prompts the player to operate (repeatedly hit) the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B) are superimposed on the enemy character Y group CYG. This is the displayed image.

In this example, the operation promotion display BT includes the words "Continuous Hit!!" added to the right side of the object imitating the push button 31B, and a downward arrow above the object, and below the object imitating the push button 31B. , is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period of the operation. Here, since the enemy characters Y group CYG and the annihilation gauge GI are displayed in the background of the operation promotion display BT, the player can annihilate the enemy characters Y group by operating the operation section (by repeatedly pressing the push button 31B). operate the control panel in the hope that it will

Note that even if the player does not operate the operation unit, a performance (residual performance, extermination performance) based on a variation pattern is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In this state, when the operation validity period ends, the process proceeds to a pattern in which a residual effect is executed as shown in FIG. 133-68 (3A) or a pattern in which an annihilation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 133-68 (3B).

(Pattern in which residual effect is executed)
As shown in FIG. 133-68 (3A), the performance control CPU 120 executes the residual performance at the timing when the residual performance in the variation pattern of "SP-X is off" is to be executed, and the remaining performance is displayed on the image display device 5. Display the notification image ZI. The remaining notification image is an image in which an annihilation gauge GI that has not yet reached the annihilation icon and the word "remaining" are displayed superimposed on enemy characters Y group CYG.

(Pattern in which the annihilation effect is executed)
As shown in FIG. 133-68 (3B), the performance control CPU 120 executes the annihilation performance at the timing when the annihilation performance in the variation pattern of "SP-X jackpot" should be executed, and displays the annihilation effect on the image display device 5. Display the notification image DSI. The annihilation notification image is an image in which an annihilation gauge GI that has reached the annihilation icon and the word "annihilation" are superimposed on a flame image showing that the enemy character group Y has been annihilated and is on fire.

[Production sound during annihilation SP]
In this embodiment, when an operation of the operation unit by the player is accepted during the operation validity period of the annihilation SP performance, the performance sound H "Kurae" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. That is, when the operating section is operated once, the performance sound H "Kurae" is reproduced and outputted once from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, the reproduction output period of the effect sound H is 3S.

In this embodiment, the operation of the operation unit by the player (first operation) is accepted during the operation validity period of the annihilation SP performance, and the performance sound when the performance sound H "Kurae" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If the next operation (second operation) on the operating section is accepted before the end of the reproduction output period (3S) of H, the reproduction output of the effect sound H that was previously reproduced is canceled, The reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the second operation is newly started. This also applies to the third operation after the second operation, the fourth operation after the third operation, and so on (hereinafter omitted).

By newly reproducing and outputting the effect sound H each time an operation of the operation unit is accepted by the player, the player can perform a pseudo scratch process at any timing and play the effect sound H from the speakers 8L and 8R. It can be output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the annihilation SP performance which has a game feature of repeatedly hitting the operation unit.

<Example of sound production during annihilation SP production>
FIGS. 133-69 (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of performance sounds of each performance related to the annihilation SP performance.

As shown in FIG. 133-69 (1), at a predetermined timing (timing: T2) during the valid operation period (period T1 to TL) when the annihilation SP performance is executed and the operation promotion display is displayed, the player Upon receiving the operation of the operating section, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound H "Kurae" from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, the reproduction output period of the effect sound H is 3S.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133-69 (2), at a predetermined timing (timing: T2) during the operation valid period (period from T1 to TL) when the annihilation SP effect is executed and the operation promotion display is displayed, Upon receiving the operation (first operation) of the operation unit by the player, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound H from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, while the effect sound H based on the first operation is being played back and output (for example, at a timing of 0.5S after the start of playback output of the effect sound H based on the first operation: T3), the next operation is performed. Upon receiving the operation (second operation), the production control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of the production sound H based on the first operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and starts the reproduction output of the production sound H based on the second operation. start. At this time, as for the effect sound H based on the first operation, only "ku" out of "kurae" is reproduced and output.

Next, while the effect sound H based on the second operation is being played back and output (for example, at a timing of 0.5S after the start of playback output of the effect sound H based on the second operation: T4), the next operation is performed. When receiving the operation (third operation), the production control CPU 120 ends the playback output of the production sound H based on the second operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and starts the reproduction output of the production sound H based on the third operation. start. At this time, as for the effect sound H based on the second operation, only "ku" out of "kurae" is reproduced and output.

Next, while the effect sound H based on the third operation is being played back and output (for example, at a timing when 0.5S has elapsed from the start of playback output of the effect sound H based on the third operation: T5), the next operation is performed. Upon receiving the operation (fourth operation), the production control CPU 120 ends the reproduction output of the production sound H based on the third operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also stops the reproduction output of the production sound H based on the fourth operation. start. At this time, only "ku" out of "kurae" is reproduced and output as the effect sound H based on the third operation.

Next, while the effect sound H based on the fourth operation is being played back and output (for example, at a timing of 0.5S after the start of playback output of the effect sound H based on the fourth operation: T6), the next operation is performed. Upon receiving the operation (fifth operation), the production control CPU 120 ends the reproduction output of the production sound H based on the fourth operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also stops the reproduction output of the production sound H based on the fifth operation. start. At this time, as for the effect sound H based on the fourth operation, only "ku" out of "kurae" is reproduced and output. Then, the performance sound H based on the fifth operation is "Kurae" played for 3 seconds.

In this way, each time the player operates the operation section, the effect sound H is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R, so the effect sound H is "ku, ku, ku, ku, crap!" is played back and output.

[Jackpot notification when hitting right]
In this embodiment, in the fluctuating display when the rush mode is controlled, when the fluctuating pattern is "normal reach jackpot", a right hit jackpot notification effect is executed to notify that the display result is "jackpot". It is possible. The right-handed hit jackpot notification performance includes a first right-handed hit jackpot notification performance, a second right-handed hit jackpot notification performance, and a third right-handed hit jackpot notification performance. In this embodiment, the time when the production mode is controlled to rush mode is appropriately referred to as "right-handed hitting".

[Jackpot notification performance for the first right hit]
The first right hit jackpot notification performance is when the performance mode is rush mode: dream dream mode and the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and it varies. This is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the pattern is "normal reach jackpot." The first right hit jackpot notification effect is a decorative pattern indicating that the display result will be a "hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) The combination will be stopped and displayed.

In the first right hit jackpot notification performance, the non-scratched performance sound D1 [first performance sound D1 and second performance sound D1] "Victory" (Character A voice) is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of the jackpot notification effect for the first right hit>
FIG. 133-70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the first right hit jackpot notification performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-70 (1), the "3" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to establish a reach state, and the operation in the variable pattern is promoted. At the timing when the display should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display BT that prompts the player to operate the operation section (in this example, the push button 31B) at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The other effect images are the same as those shown in FIG. 133-59 (3A), so their explanation will be omitted.

In this example, the operation promotion display BT includes the words "Press!!" and a downward arrow added above the object imitating the push button 31B, and the text "Press!!" and a downward arrow are added below the object imitating the push button 31B. It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound I1 "push" (Character A voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode under control: Yume Yume mode is a performance in which character A mainly appears, so the performance sound when the operation promotion display is displayed is the performance sound related to character A (Character A's character voice) It becomes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-70 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the performance control CPU 120 executes the first right hit jackpot notification performance, and displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. , the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") whose display result is "win" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound D1 [first performance sound D1 and second performance sound D1] "Victory" (Character A voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode under control: Yume Yume mode is a performance in which character A mainly appears, so the performance sound when the display result is announced as a "win" is the performance sound related to character A ( character voice of character A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-70 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols that results in a "win" (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed. Further, the performance control CPU 120 ends the reproduction and output of any performance sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this manner, as shown in FIG. 133-70, when the first right hit jackpot notification effect is executed, the effect sound D1 "Victory" that does not scratch any effect sound is reproduced and output.

[Special jackpot notification for the first right hit]
The special jackpot notification performance for the first right hit is when the production mode is rush mode: dream dream mode, the display result (jackpot type) is "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". This is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying display results in certain cases. The special jackpot notification performance for the first right hit is a decoration that indicates that the display result will be a "win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

In the first right hit special jackpot notification performance, the performance sound D1 [first performance sound D1 (scratch: twice) and second performance sound D1] "V, V, Victory" (Character A voice) is played on speakers 8L and 8R. Play and output from.

<Example of special jackpot notification performance for the first right hit>
FIG. 133-71 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the first right-handed special jackpot notification performance.

First, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 133-71(1) are the same as those in FIG. 133-70(1) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image in FIG. 133-71(2) is the same as that in FIG. 133-70(2) described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. At this time, the production control CPU 120 plays the production sound D1 [first production sound D1 (scratch: twice) and second production sound D1] "V, V, Victory" (Character A voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output. Rush mode under control: Yume Yume mode is a performance in which character A mainly appears, so the performance sound when the display result is announced as a "win" is the performance sound related to character A ( character voice of character A).

Next, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 133-71(3) are the same as those in FIG. 133-70(3) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 133-71, when the first right-handed special jackpot notification effect is executed, the first effect sound D1 is scratched twice and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the production sound D1 is reproduced and output as "V, V, Victory" (Character A voice).

[Jackpot notification performance when hitting second right]
The second right hit jackpot notification performance is when the performance mode is rush mode: Nana mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is This is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result in the case of a "normal reach jackpot." The second right hit jackpot notification effect is a decorative pattern that indicates that the display result will be a "hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) The combination will be stopped and displayed.

In the second right hit jackpot notification performance, the unscratched performance sound D2 [first performance sound D2 and second performance sound D2] "Victory" (Character B voice) is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of the jackpot notification effect when hitting the second right>
FIG. 133-72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the second right hit jackpot notification performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-72 (1), the "3" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to establish a reach state, and the operation in the variable pattern is promoted. At the timing when the display should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display BT that prompts the player to operate the operation section (in this example, the push button 31B) at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The other effect images are the same as those shown in FIG. 133-59 (3B), so their explanation will be omitted.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound I2 "Push" (Character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode under control: Nana mode is a performance in which character B mainly appears, so the performance sound when the operation promotion display is displayed is the performance sound related to character B (character B's character voice). ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-72 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the performance control CPU 120 executes the second right hit jackpot notification performance, and displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. , the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") whose display result is "win" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound D2 [first performance sound D2 and second performance sound D2] "Victory" (Character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode under control: Since Nana mode is a performance in which character B mainly appears, the performance sound when the display result is notified of a "win" is the performance sound related to character B (Character B character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-72 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols that results in a "win" (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 ends the reproduction and output of any performance sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 133-72, when the second right hit jackpot notification effect is executed, the effect sound D2 "Victory" (Character B voice) that does not scratch any effect sound is played back and output. ing.

[Special jackpot notification performance when hitting second right]
The second right hit special jackpot notification performance is when the performance mode is rush mode: Nana mode, the display result (jackpot type) is "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" This is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display results. The special jackpot notification performance when hitting the second right is a decoration that indicates that the display result will be a "win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

In the second special jackpot notification performance when hitting right, the performance sound D2 [first performance sound D2 (scratch: twice) and second performance sound D2] "V, V, Victory" (Character B voice) is played on speakers 8L and 8R. It is played back and output from.

<Example of special jackpot notification performance when hitting the second right>
FIG. 133-73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the second right-handed special jackpot notification performance.

First, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 133-73(1) are the same as those in FIG. 133-72(1) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image in FIG. 133-73 (2) is the same as that in FIG. 133-72 (2) described above, so the explanation will be omitted. At this time, the production control CPU 120 plays the production sound D2 [first production sound D1 (scratch: twice) and second production sound D2] "V, V, Victory" (Character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output. Rush mode under control: Since Nana mode is a performance in which character B mainly appears, the performance sound when the display result is notified of a "win" is the performance sound related to character B (Character B character voice).

Next, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 133-73(3) are the same as those in FIG. 133-72(3) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 133-73, when the second right-handed special jackpot notification effect is executed, the first effect sound D2 is scratched twice and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the production sound D2 is reproduced and output as "V, V, Victory."

[Jackpot notification performance when hitting the third right]
The third right hit jackpot notification performance is when the performance mode is rush mode: jam mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the fluctuating pattern This is a type of jackpot notification performance that is executed when notifying the display result when is a "normal reach jackpot". The third right hit jackpot notification effect is a decorative pattern that indicates that the display result will be a "hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) The combination will be stopped and displayed.

In the third right hit jackpot notification performance, the non-scratched performance sound D3 [first performance sound D3 and second performance sound D3] "Victory" (Character C voice) is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of jackpot notification performance when hitting the third right>
FIG. 133-74 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the third right hit jackpot notification performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 133-74 (1), the "3" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to create a ready-to-reach state, and the operation in the variable pattern is promoted. At the timing when the display should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display BT that prompts the player to operate the operation section (in this example, the push button 31B) at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The other effect images are the same as those shown in FIG. 133-59 (3C), so their explanation will be omitted.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound I3 "Press" (Character C voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode under control: Jam mode is an effect in which character C mainly appears, so the effect sound when the operation promotion display is displayed is the effect sound related to character C (character C's character voice). It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-74 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the performance control CPU 120 executes the third right hit jackpot notification performance, and displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. , the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") whose display result is a "win" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the performance sound D3 [first performance sound D3 and second performance sound D3] "Victory" (character C voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode under control: Jam mode is an effect in which character C mainly appears, so the effect sound when the display result is notified of a "win" is the effect sound related to character C (character C character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-74 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols that results in a "win" (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed. Further, the performance control CPU 120 ends the reproduction and output of any performance sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 133-74, when the third right hit jackpot notification effect is executed, the effect sound D3 "Victory" (Character C voice) that does not scratch any effect sound is played back and output. ing.

[Special jackpot notification performance when hitting third right]
The special jackpot notification performance for the third right hit is when the production mode is rush mode: jam mode, the display result (jackpot type) is "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". This is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display results in the case of a game. The special jackpot notification performance when hitting the second right is a decoration that indicates that the display result will be a "win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

In the special jackpot notification performance for the third right hit, the performance sound D3 [first performance sound D3 (scratch: twice) and second performance sound D3] "V, V, Victory" (Character C voice) is played on speakers 8L and 8R. It is played back and output from.

<Example of special jackpot notification performance when hitting the third right>
FIG. 133-75 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance images and performance sounds of each performance related to the third right-handed special jackpot notification performance.

First, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 133-75(1) are the same as those in FIG. 133-74(1) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image in FIG. 133-75(2) is the same as that in FIG. 133-74(2) described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. At this time, the production control CPU 120 plays the production sound D3 [first production sound D3 (scratch: twice) and second production sound D3] "V, V, Victory" (character C voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output. Rush mode under control: Jam mode is an effect in which character C mainly appears, so the effect sound when the display result is notified of a "win" is the effect sound related to character C (character C character voice).

Next, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 133-75(3) are the same as those in FIG. 133-74(3) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 133-75, when the third right-handed special jackpot notification effect is executed, the first effect sound D3 is scratched twice and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the production sound D3 is reproduced and output as "V, V, Victory."

[Playback output period of performance sound in jackpot notification performance]
FIG. 133-76 is a diagram showing a table for explaining the reproduction output period of the performance sound in the jackpot notification performance (hereinafter appropriately referred to as the "playback output period table of the jackpot notification performance sound"). The playback output period table for the jackpot announcement sound includes, for each type of jackpot notification performance, the type of performance sound, the composition type of the performance sound, the playback output period for each composition type of the performance sound, and the total output for each type of performance sound. The period is indicated. FIG. 133-76 shows specific examples of the type of effect sound, the composition type of effect sound, the playback output period for each effect sound structure type, and the total output period for each effect sound type, as shown below. ing.

・First normal jackpot notification performance:
1st effect sound C1 (0.25S) x 4 + (1st effect sound C1 + 2nd effect sound C1 (5.25S)) = total output period (6.25S)

・Second normal jackpot notification performance:
1st performance sound C2 (0.25S) x 4 + (1st performance sound C2 + 2nd performance sound C2 (5.25S)) = total output period (6.25S)

・Third normal jackpot notification performance:
1st effect sound C3 (0.25S) x 4 + (1st effect sound C3 + 2nd effect sound C3 (5.25S)) = total output period (6.25S)

・Jackpot notification performance for the first right hit:
1st production sound D1 + 2nd production sound D1 (5.25S) = total output period (5.25S)

・Special jackpot notification for the first right hit:
1st performance sound D1 (0.25S) x 2 + (1st performance sound D1 + 2nd performance sound D1 (5.25S)) = total output period (5.75S)

・Jackpot notification performance when hitting the second right:
1st production sound D2 + 2nd production sound D2 (5.25S) = total output period (5.25S)

・Special jackpot notification performance when hitting the second right:
1st performance sound D2 (0.25S) x 2 + (1st performance sound D2 + 2nd performance sound D2 (5.25S)) = total output period (5.75S)

・Jackpot notification performance when hitting the third right:
1st production sound D3 + 2nd production sound D3 (5.25S) = total output period (5.25S)

・Special jackpot notification performance when hitting the third right:
1st performance sound D3 (0.25S) x 2 + (1st performance sound D3 + 2nd performance sound D3 (5.25S)) = total output period (5.75S)

[Series of production examples in this embodiment]
Next, an example of a performance when a jackpot occurs in the challenge mode after the first win occurs in the normal mode and V stock occurs during the jackpot will be described using FIGS. 133-77 to 133-83.

Figures 133-77 to 133-79 are time charts showing the execution timing of each effect related to when a jackpot occurs in the challenge mode after the first hit occurs in the normal mode, and V stock occurs during the jackpot. 133-80 to 133-83 show examples of effect images related to when a jackpot occurs in the challenge mode after the first win occurs in the normal mode, and V stock occurs during the jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to the normal mode, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed in which the display result is "Jackpot" and the variation pattern is "SP-C1 Jackpot", and this variation In the display, a change precursor performance, a special change performance, a story SP development performance, a third normal jackpot notification performance, etc. are executed.

In addition, when the performance mode is controlled to challenge mode, the display result of the first rotation of time saving is "small win", and the display result of one of the pending memories that occurred during this time saving state is also "small win". In the case of a jackpot that occurs during the challenge mode, the first V stock performance, time-saving rush performance, etc. are executed.

Further, when the performance mode is controlled to rush mode, the second V stock performance, the first right hit jackpot notification performance, etc. are executed. Further, it is assumed that a V winning occurs in a small winning game state that is subject to V stock, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and a jackpot type notification performance, etc. is executed.

First, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-77: T1) in FIG. 133-80(1) are the same as those in FIG. 133-19(1) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-77: T2) in FIG. 133-80(2) are the same as those in FIG. 133-19(2) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-77: T3) in FIG. 133-80(3) are the same as those in FIG. 133-20(5) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds (Figure 133-77: T5, T6, T7, T8) in Figures 133-80 (4) to (7) are the same as those in Figures 133-27 (1), (4), ( Since it is the same as 7) and (8), the explanation will be omitted. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a red active display AC2 in the active display area ACE.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds (Figure 133-77: T9, T10) in Figures 133-80 (8) and 133-81 (9) are the same as those in Figures 133-38 (1) and (2) described above. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a red active display AC2 in the active display area ACE.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-77: T11) in FIG. 133-81 (10) are the same as those in FIG. 133-41 (11) described above, so their explanation will be omitted. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a red active display AC2 in the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-81 (11), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the following in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") whose display result is a "jackpot" is fixed and stopped (FIG. 133-77: T12). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 erases the active display AC from the active display area ACE based on the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-78: T13) in FIG. 133-81 (12) are the same as those in FIG. 133-49 (3A) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-78: T14) in FIG. 133-81 (13) are the same as those in FIG. 133-45 (A): (1) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-78: T15) in FIG. 133-81 (14) are the same as those in FIG. 133-12 (3) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds (Figure 133-78: T22, T23) in Figures 133-81 (15) and (16) are the same as those in Figure 133-45 (B): (1) and (2) described above. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-78: T24) in FIG. 133-82 (17) are the same as those in FIG. 133-49 (1) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-78: T25) in FIG. 133-82 (18) are the same as those in FIG. 133-51 (2) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-78: T26) in FIG. 133-82 (19) are the same as those in FIG. 133-53 (9) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-78: T27) in FIG. 133-82 (20) are the same as those in FIG. 133-65 (1) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-78: T28) in FIG. 133-82 (21) are the same as those in FIG. 133-12 (5) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-79: T29) in FIG. 133-82 (22) are the same as those in FIG. 133-64 (2) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays three second pending displays in the normal mode on the special second pending display guide PD2G of the second pending display area PD2E, based on the fact that the second pending memory number is three. I'm letting you do it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133-82 (23), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") that results in a "small win" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 133-79: T32). At this time, the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Further, since the V stock release effect has been executed, the V stock number display VNI at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 has been erased. The other effect images and effect sounds are the same as those shown in FIG. 133-82 (22) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-79: T35) in FIG. 133-82 (24) are the same as those in FIG. 133-64 (4) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-79: T36) in FIG. 133-83 (25) are the same as those in FIG. 133-45 (B): (2) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-79: T37) in FIG. 133-83 (26) are the same as those in FIG. 133-49 (1) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 133-79: T39) in FIG. 133-83 (27) are the same as those in FIG. 133-64 (5) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Effect 1)
As shown in Figures 133-28 to 133-30, in the story SP development performance, character A whose display color is yellow and character A whose display color is purple, which has a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow, are alternately displayed. When displayed twice, a scratch process is executed to scratch the first effect sound G "pa" four times, and the effect sound G "pa, pa, pa, pa, powerful" is reproduced and output.

According to such a configuration, in the story SP development performance, when the first performance sound G is played back and output multiple times, the character A whose display color is yellow is By displaying the character A whose display color is yellow and the purple character in a complementary color contrast relationship multiple times, a sense of unity between audio and video in the game machine is created, and character A is displayed in a complementary color contrast relationship. By displaying the characters in alternating colors, the displayed colors of the character A can be made to appear even more vividly, so that the interest when the story SP development effect is executed can be improved.

(Effect 2)
As shown in Figures 133-50, 133-51 to 133-53, and 133-54 to 133-57, the first V stock performance (first pending continuous performance) is executed in the jackpot game state. When the music A (song B or music C) that has not been scratched is being played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the first V stock effect is being executed in the jackpot game state. , the song X that has been scratch-processed is being played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, when the first pending continuous performance is executed during a jackpot game, what are the normal songs (songs A to C) that are played back and output in the jackpot game in which the first suspended continuous performance is not executed? By playing back and outputting a different special song (song X), the special feeling of the first continuous performance can be improved. In addition, because a part of the song that is played back and output when it is suggested that a suspended sequence is occurring ([music data X1] of song X) is scratch-processed, the first suspended sequence effect is It is possible to impress the player with the music that is played.

(Effect 3)
As shown in Figures 133-50, 133-51 to 133-53, and 133-54 to 133-57, the first V stock performance (first pending continuous performance) is executed in the jackpot game state. When the music A (song B or music C) is being played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the music during the jackpot game, while the first V stock performance is being executed in the jackpot game state. , the song X is being played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the song during the jackpot game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133-62, when the time saving state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to rush mode, when the second V stock production (second hold continuous production) is not executed, the speaker Song A (song B or song C) is being played back and output from 8L and 8R as a song in rush mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 133-63, when the time saving state is controlled and the performance mode is controlled to rush mode, when the second V stock performance (second hold continuous performance) is executed, Song X is being played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R as a song in rush mode.

According to such a configuration, when the first pending continuous performance is executed during a jackpot game, what are the normal songs (songs A to C) that are played back and output in the jackpot game in which the first suspended continuous performance is not executed? By playing back and outputting a different special song (song X), the special feeling of the first continuous performance can be improved. In addition, when a continuous performance on hold (first continuous performance on hold, second continuous performance on hold) is executed, a common song is played from the jackpot game to the time-saving game (rush mode, appropriately referred to as "time-saving game"). By being reproduced and output, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the music being changed when switching from a jackpot game to a time saving state.

(Effect 3-1)
As shown in FIG. 133-50, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock performance (first pending continuous performance) is not executed, any of song A, song B, or song C is selected as the song during the jackpot game. You can choose either.

In addition, as shown in Figure 133-62, when the time saving state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to rush mode, when the second V stock production (second hold continuous production) is not executed, the rush Either music A, music B, or music C can be selected as the music in the mode.

According to such a configuration, during a normal jackpot game period in which a V stock effect is not performed or a normal time-saving game period in which a V stock effect is not performed, a piece of music that is a special music for when a V stock effect is performed. Since X is not reproduced and output, V stock performance is executed, and the special feeling and premium feeling when music X is reproduced and output can be improved.

(Effect 3-2)
As shown in FIGS. 133-51 to 133-53 and FIG. 133-63, the rainbow-colored telop display TI displayed on the image display device 5 when the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot game , the V stock number display VNI, and the music X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R are the rainbow-colored telop display TI displayed on the image display device 5 when the second V stock effect is executed during the time-saving game. This is common to the V stock number display VNI and the song X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to seamlessly show the performance from the jackpot game to the time-saving game, and it is possible to emphasize that "wins" continue to occur, improving the special feeling when a pending series occurs. can.

(Effect 3-3)
As shown in FIG. 133-64, if the jackpot type of the previous "jackpot" when the V stock performance (first pending continuous performance) was executed was "10R jackpot" (that is, the round display of the jackpot round game is displayed from "1ROUND" to "10ROUND"), in small win games and jackpot round games that correspond to "wins" that are subject to V stock effects that occur after that, the round display will be displayed from "11ROUND". ing.

According to this configuration, in this pachinko gaming machine 1 where the maximum number of rounds in one "jackpot" is "10", the number of rounds of "11" or more, which is impossible in a normal jackpot game, is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a special feeling in the reserved series, and it is also possible to seamlessly show the flow from the previous "jackpot" to the "jackpot" based on the reserved series, so that it seems that the jackpot is continuing. This can improve the interest of winning the jackpot when the pending series is executed.

(Effect 3-4)
As shown in FIGS. 133-53 (8) and (9), at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.), the number of V stocks (pending series) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The V stock number display VNI (in this example, "V STOCK x 1") is displayed, which is information suggesting the V stock number (V STOCK x 1). Also, at the timing when the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state is started, a reduced V stock number display VNI (in this example, "V STOCK x 1") is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed.

According to such a configuration, by notifying the number of pending memories that are "wins" among the pending memories, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and a sense of security.

(Effect 3-5)
As shown in FIG. 133-49, the jackpot type notification effect is executed during the jackpot FF period of the jackpot game state, regardless of whether or not the V stock effect (retention continuous effect) is executed. If the 3rd jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" is announced in the jackpot type notification performance, the 1st V stock performance (1st pending continuous performance) will be executed within the jackpot FF period, and the 1st jackpot type in the jackpot type notification performance will be executed. Even if “BONUS” or the second jackpot type “MAX BONUS” is announced, there is a possibility that the first V stock performance will be executed within the jackpot RD period.

In this way, by executing the jackpot type notification performance that incites whether or not the first pending continuous performance is executed before the first pending continuous performance, the player can attract attention, and can improve the interest of the jackpot game state.

(Effect 3-6)
As shown in FIGS. 133-62 and 133-63, in the time saving state where the second V stock effect (second hold continuous effect) is not being executed, a simple active display guide is displayed in the active display area, and the second While no guide is displayed in the hold display area, in the time saving state where the 2nd V stock effect is being executed, a gorgeous special active display guide ACG is displayed in the active display area, and a gorgeous special active display guide ACG is displayed in the second hold display area. A special second hold display guide PD2G is displayed. In addition, in the time-saving state where the second V stock effect is not being executed, the background image does not include the rainbow-colored caption TI, while in the time-saving state where the second V-stock effect is being executed, the background image does not include the rainbow-colored caption TI. Display TI is included.

According to such a configuration, not only the effect image related to the variable display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 but also the interface is changed depending on whether or not the second V stock effect is executed. It is possible to emphasize the special feeling of the occurrence of (retention).

(Effect 3-7)
As shown in Figure 133-8 and Figures 133-51 to 133-53, if the 1st V stock performance (1st pending continuous performance) is being executed during the jackpot game, it will be played from speakers 8L and 8R. The output song X has been subjected to a scratch process in which [music data X1] "We" (impact: strong) is played back and output four times in a row. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 133-50, if the first V stock performance (first pending continuous performance) is not executed during the jackpot game, the music A (music B or Song C) (impact: weak) has not been subjected to scratch processing.

According to such a configuration, when V stock (on hold) is occurring, V stock is generated by playing back and outputting a specially processed (scratch processed) audio that is different from the normal audio configuration. It can make what you do feel special. In addition, by repeatedly playing and outputting [music data This song can impress players, and listening to this song motivates players to play, which can promote play.

(Effect 3-8)
As shown above, when the scratch process is executed and the first effect sound "Pa" is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the game effect lamp 9 is set to the playback output timing of the first effect sound. It is possible to emit light at the same time.

According to such a configuration, the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and the effect using a different effect device (game effect lamp) from the speakers 8L and 8R are related to each other, so that the effect of the scratch processing is improved. At the same time, it is possible to realize a performance that appeals not only to the player's auditory sense but also to his visual sense.

(Effect 3-9)
As shown in FIG. 133-8, the songs X "CH04" and "CH05" are composed of [song data X1] and [song data X2]. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 133-51 to 133-53, when the 1st V stock performance (1st pending continuous performance) is executed during the jackpot game, the music X played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R After the scratch process in which [music data X1] "We" (impact: strong) is played and output four times in a row, [music data ' is being played back and output.

According to such a configuration, by continuously playing back and outputting the first audio data of the first audio data and the second audio data constituting the audio, audio control during scratch processing is performed. Processing burden can be reduced.

(Effect 3-10)
As shown in Figure 133-8, the basic volume of [music data X1] and [music data If [music data X1] and [music data The output volume of each piece of music data constituting X is constant.

According to such a configuration, since the basic volume is constant, the output volume of each piece of music data that makes up the song X is constant, so it is possible to prevent the clarity of only a specific part of the song X from deteriorating. .

(Effect 3-11)
As shown in FIGS. 133-51 to 133-53, when the 1st V stock performance (1st pending continuous performance) is executed during the jackpot game, the performance sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is [First effect sound A] A scratch process in which "b" is played back and output four times in a row is being executed.

In addition, as shown above, when the [first effect sound A] is played back and output with scratch processing four times in a row, the first [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 1), the second [1st performance sound A] (basic volume: 2) for the third time, [1st performance sound A] (basic volume: 3) for the 4th time, and [1st performance sound A] (basic volume: 4) for the 4th time. As the number of outputs increases, the basic volume increases and the output volume also increases.

According to such a configuration, when the first V stock performance (first suspended continuous performance) is executed, the output volume of the performance sound A to be reproduced and output gradually increases, thereby increasing the interest of the first V stock performance. can be improved.

(Effect 3-12)
As shown above, when [second production sound A] is played back after [first production sound A] that involves scratch processing, the channel setting ratio of [second production sound A] "Istock" By gradually decreasing the output volume from "1 (100%)" to "0 (0%)" and fading it out, it is possible to reduce the output volume over time.

According to such a configuration, the output volume of the performance sound reproduced in the first V stock performance (first hold continuous performance) is gradually decreased without suddenly decreasing the output volume, so that the player can enjoy the V stock (holding continuous performance). It is possible to make the player feel the lingering feeling of joy at the occurrence of the series), and it is possible to prevent the first V stock performance from becoming less interesting.

(Effect 4)
As shown in FIG. 133-50, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock performance (first pending continuous performance, first confirmed performance) is not executed, a special An operation promotion display BT2 is displayed, and one of music A, music B, and music C can be selected as the music during the jackpot game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133-53, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first pending continuous effect, first confirmed effect) is being executed, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, The special operation promotion display BT2 is not displayed, and it is not possible to select music other than music X as the music during the jackpot game.

According to such a configuration, when the first V stock performance is being executed, the special feeling of the first V stock performance can be improved by playing back and outputting the music X dedicated to when the V stock occurs. Furthermore, by restricting the selection of songs other than song X when the first V stock presentation is being performed, interest in the first V stock presentation may be reduced by performing the song selection operation. can be prevented.

(Effect 4-1)
As shown in FIG. 133-50, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock performance (first pending continuous performance, first confirmed performance) is not executed, a message appears at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5. A special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (an object imitating a musical note and the name of the music) are displayed. Thereby, the player can select one of music A, music B, and music C as the music during the jackpot game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133-53, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first pending continuous effect, first confirmed effect) is being executed, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, , the special operation promotion display BT2 is not displayed, and only the music display is displayed. As a result, the player cannot select any song other than song X as the song during the jackpot game.

According to such a configuration, when the first V stock performance is being performed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the display of the special operation promotion display BT2, which is information unrelated to the first V stock performance.

(Effect 4-2)
As shown in FIGS. 133-54 to 133-57, in the jackpot round game, when the normal jackpot background image (background image including a mountain, the sun, and musical notes) is displayed on the image display device 5, the first V When the stock performance (first pending continuous performance, first confirmed performance) is executed, the normal jackpot background image is erased, and the performance image related to the first V stock performance (V stock display VSI1, VSI2, VSI3, operation promotion) Display BT, V stock number display VSI) are displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the jackpot round game, by suddenly executing the first V stock performance, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the jackpot game.

(Effect 4-3)
As shown in FIGS. 133-51 to 133-57, when the first V stock effect is executed, the first effect sound A of the effect sound A is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. [Second performance sound A] As information related to "Istock", a first V stock display VSI1 consisting of the letter "V" is displayed on the image display device 5, and a second V stock display consisting of the letter "V" is displayed on the image display device 5. VSI2 and a third V stock display VSI3 consisting of the characters "V STOCK" are displayed.

According to such a configuration, the occurrence of V stock can be appealed not only to the auditory sense but also to the visual sense.

(Effect 4-4)
As shown in Figures 133-54 to 133-57, before the 1st V stock performance of the 1st round (round display = 2ROUND) during the jackpot game is executed, music A is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R. When the first V stock performance of the second round (round display=3ROUND) during the jackpot game is executed, the music X is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even after the display of the V stock number display VNI at the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in the 1st V stock performance of the 3rd round (round display = 4 ROUND) during the jackpot game ends, the music is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. X is being played back and output continuously. At this time, changing the music is restricted.

According to such a configuration, music X that was played back and output when the first V stock effect was started is played back and output, so that the player can continue to be informed that the V stock is occurring. Not only can the notification be made, but also the special feeling of the jackpot round game can be improved.

(Effect 4-5)
As shown above, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%. On the other hand, the channel setting ratio of the song X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 20%.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the clarity of the song X, and improve the clarity of the production sound A, and it is possible to improve the production effect of the characteristic production sound of the first V stock production. .

(Effect 4-6)
As shown in FIG. 133-8, when the production sound A of the first V stock is played back and output, [first sound effect A1] and [second sound effect A1] (hereinafter referred to as "sound effect A1" as appropriate) ) is played back, it suggests that the jackpot type in the reserved memory that is subject to V stock is "10R jackpot", and [first sound effect A2] and [first sound effect A2] 2 sound effect A2] (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "sound effect A2") is played back, the jackpot type of the reserved memory that is subject to V stock is "3R jackpot". Suggests.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention not only to the dialogue sounds but also to the sound effects among the performance sounds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the first V stock performance.

(Effect 5)
As shown in FIG. 133-31, in the first half of the battle SP performance, it is possible to perform a CU performance (first movable body performance) in which the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second movement position, and the CU When the effect is executed, the visibility of the effect image related to the battle SP displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is in a reduced state. At this time, the effect sound B is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R without being subjected to scratch processing.

In addition, as shown in Figures 133-34 to 133-37, in the second half of the battle SP performance, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operation position during the second normal jackpot notification performance (the second half of the battle SP performance). 2), and when the second normal jackpot notification performance is executed, the visibility of the performance image related to the battle SP displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is reduced. It has become. At this time, the effect sound C2 is scratch-processed and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, the image display is performed by the movable body performing a common action between the CU effect that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot and the second normal jackpot notification effect that informs whether or not it is a jackpot. It is possible to perform an effect that reduces the visibility of the device 5. However, by scratch-processing the performance sound only for the second normal jackpot notification performance, the difference between the CU performance and the second normal jackpot notification performance is clarified, and the production cost of the performance and performance control (movable body control ) processing load can be reduced.

(Effect 5-1)
As shown in Figure 133-8, the performance sound B played back and output in the "CH08": CU performance does not include dialogue sounds and consists only of sound effects ([sound effect B]), and is composed of only sound effects ([sound effect B]), ” and “CH12”: The performance sound C2 played and output in the second normal jackpot notification performance is the dialogue sound ([first dialogue sound C2] “V” (impact: strong) and [second dialogue sound C2] “ It consists of a sound effect ([first sound effect C])) and a sound effect ([first sound effect C]).

According to such a configuration, when notifying that the display result is a "jackpot", a scratch-processed performance sound that is different from the normal performance sound is played back, thereby creating a special feeling when notifying a jackpot. can be improved. In addition, by repeatedly playing and outputting the [first dialogue sound C2] "V" (impact: strong) at the beginning of the production sound of the production sound C2, the impact of the sound at the beginning of the production sound is strengthened, and the player can win a jackpot. It is possible to give an impression of the performance sound when the game is announced, and since listening to this performance sound motivates the player to play, it is possible to promote play.

(Effect 5-2)
As shown in Figures 133-34 to 133-38, when the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed, the first [first effect sound C2] "V" and the second [first effect sound C2] The playback output interval of sound C2] "V" is 0.5S (first blackout period), and the second [first effect sound C2] "V" and the third [first effect sound C2] The playback output interval of “V” is 0.4S (second blackout period), and the third [first sound C2] “V” and the fourth [first sound C2] “V” The playback output interval is 0.3S (third blackout period), and the fourth [first production sound C2] "V" and [first production sound C2] and [second production sound C2] " The reproduction output interval of "Victory" is 0.2S (fourth blackout period).

In this way, the production sound C2 is reproduced by scratching the [first production sound C2] "V" several times (4 times) in succession while gradually shortening the scratch interval, and at the same time, the production sound C2 is reproduced and output in 0.2S. After the mute period, [first effect sound C2] and [second effect sound C2] "Victory" are effect sounds that are reproduced and output.

According to such a configuration, when the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed, the scratch-processed effect sound C2 is reproduced and output, thereby improving the special feeling of the second normal jackpot notification effect. Further, by scratch-processing the effect sound C2, it is possible to impress the player with the effect sound when the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed.

In addition, when the scratch processing of the effect sound C2 is executed, the scratch interval becomes gradually shorter, so that the last part of the effect sound C2, [first effect sound C2] and [second effect sound C2] The peak of excitement can be set just before "Victory" is played back and output. Then, after a moment (0.2S mute period) after the peak of the excitement, the last part of the production sound C2, [first production sound C2] and [second production sound C2] "Victory" By being reproduced and outputted, it is possible to reproduce and output an even more impressive performance sound.

(Effect 5-3)
As shown in FIG. 133-31, before the CU effect is executed, the operation promotion display is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player is not allowed to operate the operation unit. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 133-34 to 133-38, before the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed, an operation promotion display is displayed on the image display device 5, prompting the player to perform the operation. The department is being operated.

According to this configuration, when the player operates the operation unit, the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed and the movable body moves, so that the player feels as if he or she has grabbed the jackpot with his or her own hands. It can make you feel like a child and improve your interest.

(Effect 6)
As shown in Figure 133-76, the normal jackpot notification performance (first normal jackpot notification performance, second normal jackpot notification performance, third normal jackpot notification performance) executed during normal times (normal state) In the above, the performance sounds (performance sound C1, performance sound C2, performance sound C3, hereinafter appropriately referred to as "normal jackpot notification sound") are scratch-processed and reproduced. On the other hand, in the right-handed hit jackpot notification performance (first right-handed jackpot notification performance, second right-handed jackpot notification performance, third right-handed jackpot notification performance) that is executed when right-handed hit (rush mode), The performance sounds (performance sound D1, performance sound D2, performance sound D3, hereinafter appropriately referred to as "right hit jackpot notification sound") are reproduced and output without being subjected to scratch processing.

In addition, the reproduction output period of the jackpot notification sound when hitting right is 5.25S, and the reproduction output period of the jackpot notification sound during normal time is 6.25S, so the jackpot notification sound when hitting right is 5.25S. However, the playback output period is shorter than the normal jackpot notification sound.

According to such a configuration, in the normal jackpot notification performance that informs that the display result is a "jackpot" (first win) in the normal time, the scratch-processed performance sound (normal jackpot notification sound) is played back and output. By doing so, you can increase the impact at the first hit. In addition, in the jackpot notification effect when hitting right (rush mode) that informs you that the display result is a "jackpot", scratch processing is not performed and the playback output period is shorter than the normal jackpot notification sound. By reproducing and outputting the sound (big hit notification sound when hitting right), it is possible to prevent the sense of speed and exhilaration during hitting right from being reduced.

(Effect 6-1)
As shown in FIG. 133-76, the playback output period of the right-handed jackpot notification sound is shorter than that of the normal jackpot notification sound. That is, the performance execution period for the right-hand hit notification performance is shorter than the normal jackpot notification performance.

According to such a configuration, by shortening the performance execution period of the right-hand hit jackpot notification performance that is executed while hitting the right hand, the jackpot interval is shorter than when the jackpot notification performance with a long performance execution period is executed. This makes it possible to give continuity to the jackpots, and to provide the player with a game with momentum.

(Effect 6-2)
As shown in FIG. 133-8, the normal jackpot notification sounds are "CH09" and "CH10" production sound C1, "CH11" and "CH12" production sound C2, and "CH13" and "CH14". As jackpot notification sounds when hitting right, there are production sounds D1 for "CH15" and "CH16," production sounds D2 for "CH17" and "CH18," and "CH19" and "CH20'' production sound D3 is provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 133-9, a performance sound K of "CH40" is provided as a performance sound for a sudden jackpot notification performance (premier performance).

According to this configuration, by providing a jackpot notification sound that is different from the normal jackpot notification sound and the right-hand hit jackpot notification sound, it is possible to draw attention to periods other than the super reach in the variable display, and increase interest. You can improve.

(Effect 7)
As shown in Figure 133-16, the final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, and no matter which change pattern there is, the normal change effect is executed at a rate of 100%, and the special change effect is executed at a rate of 100%. has not been executed. Furthermore, when the final display mode of the active display is the red mode and the change pattern is any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, and 401, the normal change effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 70%. A special change effect is being performed at a certain rate. In addition, when the final display mode of the active display is the golden mode and the change pattern is any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, and 401, the normal change effect is executed at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 90%. A special change effect is being performed at a certain rate.

That is, when a normal change effect is executed, the final display mode of the active display may change to a blue mode with low jackpot expectation, but when a special change effect is executed, the final display mode of the active display may change. There is no possibility of changing to a blue color with a low jackpot expectation, but a red color or a gold color with a high jackpot expectation.

As shown in FIG. 133-17, before the normal change effect is executed, no effect is executed, and the effect sound subjected to scratch processing is not reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 133-19 to 133-22, before the special change performance is executed, the change precursor performance: success pattern is executed, and the scratch-processed performance sound EA is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. "Ready, go, go, go, go, go" is being played back and output.

According to such a configuration, by reproducing and outputting the effect sound EA, it can be suggested that a special change effect with higher jackpot expectation than the normal change effect will be executed, so that the effect sound EA is played back to the player. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not it is output, thereby increasing interest.

(Effect 7-1)
As shown in Figure 133-18, it is possible to perform a change precursor effect with a success pattern and a failure pattern, and as shown in Figures 133-19 to 133-22, scratch processing can be performed from speakers 8L and 8R. When the success pattern change precursor performance in which the performance sound EA "Ready, Go, Go, Go, Go, Go" is played back and output is executed, a special change performance is executed.

According to such a configuration, by executing the change precursor performance, it can be suggested that a special change performance with higher jackpot expectation than the normal change performance will be executed, so that the performance sound EA is reproduced and output to the player. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the game will be played, thereby increasing interest.

(Effect 7-2)
As shown in FIG. 133-18 (3A), when the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed, the second effect sound EA is played four times and the third effect sound EA is played once. At the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the letters "GO" are displayed superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC five times in total.

With this configuration, it is possible to appeal to the player's visual and auditory senses of the exhilarating feeling of recognizing that the change precursor performance is a successful pattern and that a special change performance will be executed thereafter.

(Effect 7-3)
As shown in Figure 133-18, when the change precursor performance: success pattern is executed, the words "READY" and "GO" are displayed, indicating that the special change performance will start. ing.

According to such a configuration, before the special change performance is started, it is possible to improve the expectation that the special change performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the change performance that changes the display mode of the active display.

(Effect 7-4)
As shown in Figure 133-18, while the characters "GO" are displayed indicating that a special change performance will start if the change precursor performance: success pattern is executed, the change precursor performance: When the failure pattern is executed, the characters "GO" suggesting that the special change performance will not be started are not displayed, and a crack image CI indicating that the special change performance will not be started is displayed.

According to such a configuration, by displaying the characters "GO", it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the special change performance before the special change performance starts, and to increase the interest of the change performance. You can improve. Moreover, by displaying the crack image without displaying the characters "GO", it is possible to reliably notify that the special change performance will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

(Effect 7-5)
As shown in Figure 133-23, the R hold effect is notified by displaying the display mode of the hold display in the R mode to notify that the change precursor effect will be executed in the variable display that is the subject of judgment at the time of starting winning. is being performed as a preview performance.

According to such a configuration, before the variable display in which the change precursor effect or the special change effect is executed, the R hold effect is executed as the pre-read preview effect, so that the variable display is executed. It is possible to draw attention to the fluctuating display even before it is displayed.

(Effect 7-6)
As shown in FIGS. 133-19 to 133-22, when the special change effect is executed, active candidate displays (for example, blue mode, red mode, A golden mode) is displayed, and a "NEXT" icon is displayed beyond the central route section of the route display to inform you that you are proceeding to the next stage.

According to such a configuration, by displaying two active candidate displays, the player advances to the active candidate display with higher expectation of jackpot, and the display mode of the active display changes to that display mode. You can play the game with the expectation that it will happen. In addition, by displaying the "NEXT" icon, the player plays the game with the expectation that the special change effect will continue and advance to the next stage, and that an active candidate display with even higher expectations for a jackpot will be displayed. can.

Unlike normal change effects, the special change effect presents an active candidate display indicating the active display after the change before the active display changes, increasing the interest before the active display actually changes. can. Moreover, since the active display can actually change and the special change performance can continue and proceed to the next stage, the game can be more interesting than the normal change performance.

(Effect 8)
As shown in FIGS. 133-65 to 133-67, when the time-saving rush effect is executed, the third countdown image CDI3, the second countdown image CDI2, which suggests that the time-saving state (rush mode) is controlled; A first countdown image CDI1 and a start image JSI are displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in response to the display of these effect images, the first effect sound F3 "three", the first effect sound F2 "two", the first effect sound F1 "one", and the second effect sound F (scratch: 4 times) ), as well as the second effect sound F and the third effect sound F "S, S, S, S, START" are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In particular, the characters "START" in the start image, the second sound F (scratch: 4 times), and the second sound F and third sound F "S, S, S, S, START" Related.

According to such a configuration, when the time saving state is controlled, the scratched effect sound is played back and output, so that the player can be appropriately informed of the control timing of the time saving state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(Effect 8-1)
As shown in FIG. 133-65 to FIG. 133-67, when the time saving state (rush mode) is controlled, "S", "T" indicating that the time saving state (rush mode) is being controlled, Start image JSI containing "A", "R", and "T": Countdown image containing the characters "START" and "3", "2", and "1" indicating that the start image JSI will be displayed (First countdown image CDI1 to third countdown image CDI3): A time-saving entry effect that displays the number "321" is being executed.

When the start image is displayed, the second sound F "S" corresponding to the "S" of "START" is scratched and played back four times in a row, and the "S" of "START" is played back. The corresponding third performance sound F "Tart" is reproduced and output without being scratched.

According to such a configuration, as a method for notifying right-handed players, a constant right-handed player promotion image containing the words "right-handed players" and an arrow image instructing right-handed players to enter the second starting prize opening is displayed. By providing not only a method for displaying on the image display device 5 but also a method for reproducing and outputting the scratched performance sound F from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to prevent the player from falling into a disadvantageous situation in a right-handed game. can.

(Effect 8-2)
As shown in FIGS. 133-65 to 133-66 (5), when the time-saving effect is executed in the jackpot game state, the third countdown image CDI3 moves from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. The start image JSI is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. Also, as shown in FIGS. 133-66 (6) to 133-67 (8), when the time saving state is controlled, the character (A) CA moves from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. displayed while moving. That is, the third countdown image CDI3, the start image JSI, and the character (A) CA are moving in the same direction (rightward).

According to such a configuration, by making the movement direction of the character information correspond to the movement direction of the character, it is possible to seamlessly show the performance on the image display device 5 when the game state changes, and also to It can prevent discomfort.

(Effect 8-3)
As shown in FIG. 133-66(5), the start image JSI is an image including the characters "START" and a rightward arrow object. This right-pointing arrow object suggests that a right-handed game is to be started.

According to such a configuration, in a jackpot game state in which a time-saving rush effect is executed by displaying a right-pointing arrow object, a game method in a time-saving state (operating the ball-striking operation handle 30 by turning it clockwise) This can prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Effect 8-4)
As shown in FIG. 133-65 (1), when the time-saving rush effect is executed, the rush mode explanation image JRI is displayed on the image display device 5. The rush mode explanation image contains information explaining how to play rush mode ("Keep hitting right until there are 0 powerful RUSHs left!") and information that explains how to play the rush mode. This is an image that includes a demo icon (an icon showing the letters "DEMO") that suggests to the player that there is no need to operate the handle 30, and a character A.

According to such a configuration, the player can be made aware of the technique of the right-handed game before the right-handed game in the time-saving state is started, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Effect 8-5)
As shown in FIG. 133-78, the time-saving rush effect is executed during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot game state.

According to such a configuration, before the time-saving state is controlled, it is possible to explain the right-handed game and to enliven the start of the right-handed game to be played, thereby improving the interest of the right-handed game.

(Effect 9-1)
As shown in Figures 133-28 to 133-30, in the story SP development performance, character A whose display color is yellow and character A whose display color is purple, which has a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow, are alternately displayed. When displayed twice, the first performance sound G "pa" is scratched four times to reproduce and output "pa, pa, pa, pa (powerful)".

According to such a configuration, by associating the effect image (video) displayed on the image display device 5 with the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a sense of unity between the image and the audio is achieved. This makes it possible to realize a performance that appeals to the player's visual and auditory senses.

(Effect 9-2)
As shown in FIG. 133-28, when the story SP development effect is executed, before the first effect sound G "pa" is scratched and reproduced, the effect sound G is muted and reproduced. has been done.

According to such a configuration, the scratch-processed first performance sound G "pa" is played back and output after the muted performance sound G, thereby making it possible to impress the story SP development performance on the player. .

(Effect 9-3)
As shown in Figures 133-28 to 133-30, in the story SP development performance, character A whose display color is yellow and character A whose display color is complementary to yellow on the color wheel are alternately displayed. It is displayed twice.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the saturation of the display color of the character A that is displayed alternately, and it is possible to make the character A appear even more vivid, thereby improving the interest of the story SP development performance.

(Effect 9-4)
As shown above, in the story SP development production, when character A whose display color is inverted in brightness or gradation is displayed alternately twice each, the scratched production sound G "Pa, Pa, "Pa, Pa, Powerful" may be reproduced and output.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the saturation of the display color of the character A that is displayed alternately, and it is possible to make the character A appear even more vivid, thereby improving the interest of the story SP development performance.

(Effect 9-5)
As shown above, in the story SP development performance, three types of characters A, yellow character A, red character A, and blue character A, may be displayed in order.

According to such a configuration, the saturation of the displayed color of character A can be made stronger than when two colors of character A are displayed alternately, and the color can be made to appear even more vividly, so that the story SP You can improve the interest of the development performance.

(Effect 9-6)
As shown above, in the story SP development performance, when two types of characters A, yellow character A and purple character A, are displayed alternately, the display size of yellow character A is small, and the purple character The display size of A may be large.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the impression of character A stronger than when character A of the same display size is displayed alternately by changing only the display color, and the interest of the story SP development production is made more interesting. You can improve further.

(Effect 9-7)
As shown in Figures 133-28 to 133-30, in the story SP development performance, when character A is displayed alternately in complementary colors, this information is used to confirm the progress of the game. The display colors of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r and the active display AC in the normal mode of the active display area ACE are not inverted to the complementary colors.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused by not changing the display color of information for checking the progress of the game.

(Effect 10)
As shown in FIGS. 133-32 and 133-33, when the first normal jackpot notification effect is being executed as the jackpot notification effect during the challenge SP, the effect sound that has been scratched from speakers 8L and 8R. C1 is being played back and output.

In addition, as shown in Figures 133-34 to 133-37, when the second normal jackpot notification performance is being executed as the jackpot notification performance during the battle SP, scratch processing is performed from speakers 8L and 8R. Performance sound C2 is being reproduced and output.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133-8, "CH09": Of the production sound C1, the [first production sound C1] that is subjected to scratch processing is the first dialogue sound C1 "ko" and the first sound effect C. "CH11": Of the production sounds C2, the [first production sound C2] that is subjected to scratch processing is composed of the first dialogue sound C2 "V" and the first sound effect C, The sound effect C of [first effect sound C1] and [first effect sound C2] is common.

According to such a configuration, multiple types of jackpot notification performances are provided to notify that the display result is a "jackpot", thereby making it more interesting than when only one type of jackpot notification performance is executed. can be improved. In addition, by setting only the dialogue sounds individually and using a common sound effect for multiple types of jackpot notification performances, it is possible to differentiate the jackpot notification performances while reducing the production cost and storage capacity for the performances. .

(Effect 10-1)
As shown in FIGS. 133-32 and 133-33, the first normal jackpot notification performance is executed as the jackpot notification performance in the variable pattern involving the super reach of the challenge SP. Further, as shown in FIGS. 133-34 to 133-37, a second normal jackpot notification performance is executed as a jackpot notification performance in the variable pattern involving the super reach of the battle SP.

According to such a configuration, since the jackpot notification effect differs depending on the type of super reach, executing the jackpot notification effect in a specific super reach becomes a motive for playing the game.

(Effect 10-2)
In this embodiment, in the performance sound C1 that is scratch-processed in the first normal jackpot notification performance, the sound effects (first sound effect C, second sound effect C) are better than the dialogue sounds (first dialogue sound C1, It is assumed that the reproduction output period is longer than that of the two-line sound C1). The same applies to the performance sound C2 that is scratch-processed in the second normal jackpot notification performance and the performance sound C3 that is scratch-processed in the third normal jackpot notification performance.

According to such a configuration, in the scratch-processed performance sound that is played back and output in the normal jackpot notification performance, the playback output period of the sound effect is longer than the dialogue sound, so that the display result in the normal time is You can enjoy the lingering feeling of joy of having achieved the winning result, and the excitement of the jackpot notification performance can be improved.

(Effect 10-3)
As shown in FIGS. 133-32 and 133-33, when the operation promotion display BT is displayed before the jackpot notification effect is executed during the challenge SP, the effect sound I2 "Press" is heard from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Character B voice) is being played back and output. Character B has the same character as the character that mainly appears in the challenge SP and the character voice of the effect sound when the operation promotion display BT is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 133-34 to 133-37, when the operation promotion display BT is displayed before the jackpot notification performance is executed during the battle SP, the performance sound I1 " "Press" (Character A voice) is being played back and output. The character A that mainly appears in the battle SP and the character voice of the production sound when the operation promotion display BT is displayed are common to the character A.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to differentiate the super reach effects by providing a unique effect sound when the operation promotion display is displayed and a unique jackpot notification sound for each super reach effect. . Furthermore, a player who likes a particular character can play a game with the expectation that the character will appear in video or audio.

(Effect 10-4)
As shown in FIG. 133-69, in the annihilation SP performance, the performance sound H is newly reproduced every time an operation of the operation unit by the player is accepted, so that the player can simulate scratching at any timing. The produced sound H is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, by operating the operating section, it is possible to reproduce and output the scratch-processed performance sound, which leads to the promotion of operation of the operating section, and also makes it possible to create an annihilation system that has a gameplay of repeatedly hitting the operating section. It can improve the interest of SP production.

(Effect 11)
As shown in Figures 133-42 to 133-44, when the revival effect is executed, the scratch-processed effect sound J "Fi, Fi, Fi, Fi, Fever" is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. has been done. At this time, the first revival display "FE" and the second revival display "FE", which is larger than the first revival display, are alternately displayed on the image display device 5.

According to such a configuration, in the revival production, the first revival display "FE" and the second revival display "FE" related to the first production sound J "FI" reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed as images. By displaying it on the device 5, it is possible to realize an effect that appeals to the player's visual and auditory senses. In addition, by changing the display size of the letters "FE" in accordance with the playback output timing of the first production sound J "Fi", it is possible to strengthen the sense of unity between video and audio, and improve the interest of the revival production. .

(Effect 11-1)
As shown in FIGS. 133-42 to 133-44, the character A is included inside the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to display characters (because the display area cannot be secured) with normal text information (such as lines displayed in a conversation preview production where characters converse with each other). The special feeling of the resurrection performance can be improved by displaying characters in character information (first resurrection display, second resurrection display) when a performance for notifying a jackpot such as a revival performance is executed.

(Effect 11-2)
As shown in Figures 133-42 to 133-44, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are composed of the letters "FE", which are the first two letters of "FEVER", which indicates a "jackpot". has been done.

According to such a configuration, it becomes clear that a jackpot will occur after the revival effect, and an appropriate game can be realized without confusing the player.

(Effect 11-3)
As shown in FIGS. 133-42 to 133-44, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are "FE" related to "Fi" of [first performance sound J] that has been subjected to scratch processing of the production sound J. It is composed of characters.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to strengthen the sense of unity between video and audio, and it is possible to improve the interest of the revival performance.

(Effect 11-4)
As shown in Figures 133-42 to 133-44, when the revival effect is executed, the first revival display is composed of white display color, and the second revival display is in a complementary color contrast relationship with white. It is composed of a certain black display color, and the revival display of these display colors is alternately displayed twice each.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the saturation of the display color of the resurrection display that is displayed alternately, and it is possible to make the resurrection display appear even more vivid, so that the interest of the resurrection effect can be improved.

(Effect 11-5)
As shown above, the resurrection effect includes a first resurrection display, a second resurrection display whose display size is larger than the first resurrection display, a third resurrection display whose display size is larger than the second resurrection display, and a third resurrection display whose display size is larger than the second resurrection display. A fourth revival display having a larger display size than the third revival display may be displayed in order.

According to such a configuration, in the resurrection performance, it is possible to notify that the jackpot will be a jackpot using the resurrection display while increasing the excitement, and the interest of the resurrection performance can be improved.

This specification may or may not adopt a configuration that combines each embodiment of the present disclosure.

[Other variations]
(1) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the player can select a song to be played and output from multiple types of songs in a jackpot game or a time-saving game when the V stock performance is not executed. The present invention is not limited to this format, and each time a jackpot game or a time-saving game is executed, different songs may be played back and output in a predetermined order, or songs may be played and output at random. In this case, these songs do not include song X, which is a dedicated song when the V stock performance is executed.

(2) In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the player cannot select songs other than song X in the jackpot game or time-saving game when the V stock performance is executed. Regardless of the form, the player may be able to select a song other than song X in a jackpot game or time-saving game when the V stock performance is executed.

For example, in a jackpot game or a time-saving game when a V stock effect is executed, the player can select a song other than song X, but the output volume of the selectable song may be lowered, and the special operation promotion display BT2 (In this example, the icon resembling a cross key) may be made less visible.

(3) In the above embodiment, some elements (rainbow telop display TI, V stock number display VNI, music X) in the suspended continuous performance are different from the first suspended continuous performance and the second suspended continuous performance. Although a common example has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and all elements in the suspended continuous performance may be common to the first suspended continuous performance and the second suspended continuous performance.

In addition, in the held continuous performance, some elements (rainbow telop display TI, V stock number display VNI) executed using the image display device 5 are common between the first held continuous performance and the second held continuous performance. We have shown an example in which some elements (song Not limited to this, some elements executed using the first performance device (for example, the image display device 5) in the suspended continuous performance are common to the first suspended continuous performance and the second suspended continuous performance, Some of the elements executed using the second performance device (for example, the speakers 8L, 8R) may not be the same between the first and second suspended performances.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which "ROUND" is used as the unit of round display, but the format is not limited to this, and units other than "ROUND" may be used as the unit of round display. good.

For example, the round display unit may be a unit such as "round" which is related to a jackpot round, or may be a unit such as "dream dream" or "powerful" which is not related to a jackpot round.

(5) In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of V stocks (pending rows) is notified in the V stock performance, but the number of V stocks (the number of pending series) is not limited to such a form. It is not necessary to notify the number of pending stations).

For example, in a V stock performance, if the number of V stocks (number of pending series) is not announced, the player will not be able to recognize how many "wins" will occur in the pending memory even though the V stock performance has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the unknown number of V stocks while giving the player a sense of security that the V stock performance has been executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the performance after the V stock performance.

(6) In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of V stocks (number of pending series) is notified by operating the operation unit once in the V stock performance, but the present invention is not limited to this form. , In the V stock performance, the number of V stocks (number of pending series) may be notified by other methods.

For example, it is possible to execute a V stock number notification effect that notifies the number of V stocks, and in this V stock number notification effect, the number of V stock is may be notified.

(7) In the above embodiment, the V stock number display in the V stock performance is an example that suggests the number of V stocks, but the V stock number display in the V stock performance is not limited to this form. may suggest factors other than the number of V stocks.

For example, it is assumed that the V stock number display in the V stock performance can be displayed with an effect display around the V stock number display. Depending on the display color of this effect display, the jackpot type of "win" that is the object of the V stock may be suggested. When the effect display on the V stock number display is rainbow colored, it is suggested that it is "10R jackpot A", and when the effect display on the V stock number display is red, it is "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B". If this is suggested and the effect display of the V stock number display is blue, it is suggested that it is "3R jackpot B", "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B".

(8) In the above embodiment, scratch processing is performed by continuously playing back and outputting the first audio data of the first audio data and the second audio data that constitute the audio. Although this example is not limited to this format, it is possible to store audio data in which scratch-processed audio content is recorded in advance in a storage area for playing sound data, and to play back and output this audio data. You may let them.

For example, as [music data It may also be reproduced and output.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the special operation promotion display BT2 is not displayed on the image display device 5 when the first V stock effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. When the first V stock effect is being executed, the image display device 5 may not display a different effect image from the special operation promotion display BT2.

For example, if it is possible to display a light amount display for adjusting the light amount of the screen and a volume display for adjusting the volume value in a predetermined area of the image display device 5, when the first V stock effect is not being executed. In addition, while the image display device 5 displays the light amount display and the volume display, the image display device 5 does not display the light amount display and the volume display when the first V stock effect is being executed.

(10) In addition, in the above embodiment, when the V stock effect is not executed during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, a song can be selected from song A, song B, and song C in any situation. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the selectable songs may be changed depending on the situation when the V stock performance is not being executed during a jackpot game or a time saving game.

For example, each time the number of consecutive jackpots increases by one, the number of songs that can be selected may increase by one. Furthermore, when the number of successive jackpots reaches 10, the songs may be released so that all songs can be selected.

(11) In the above embodiment, when the first V stock performance is executed during the jackpot RD period, the first V stock performance is started in the second round (“3ROUND” in the round display) in the jackpot round game. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when the first V stock performance is executed during the jackpot RD period, the first V stock performance may be started at a timing other than the second round in the jackpot round game.

For example, when the 1st V stock performance is executed during the jackpot RD period, it is decided in advance by lottery which round of the 1st to 10th rounds in the jackpot round game the 1st V stock performance will start, and The first V stock performance may be started in a round depending on the result.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which text information related to the effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first V stock effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and when the first V stock effect is executed, information other than text information related to the effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be displayed on the image display device 5. Good too.

For example, when the first V stock effect is executed, the character A may be displayed on the image display device 5 as information related to the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(13) In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which selection/changing of music is restricted in the jackpot game or time-saving game after the first V stock performance is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to select/change music in a jackpot game or a time-saving game after the first V stock performance is executed.

For example, in a jackpot game or a time-saving game after the first V stock performance is executed, it may be possible to select/change a song from among song A, song B, song C, and song X.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%. , 8R has shown an example in which the channel setting ratio of music X reproduced and output is 20%, but the present invention is not limited to such a form.

For example, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%, while the music X played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The channel setting ratio may be set to 0% (mute processing).

(15) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot type of the reserved memory that is the target of V stock is suggested according to the type of sound effect of the production sound A. The type of sound effect here may be [sound effect A1] and [sound effect A2] having different playback output periods (for example, [sound effect A1]: 3S, [sound effect A2]: 1S ), [Sound effect A1] and [Sound effect A2] may have different playback output contents (for example, [Sound effect A1]: "(Pikin)", [Sound effect A2]: "(Pikin)"). .

(16) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the performance sound B reproduced and output in the CU performance does not include dialogue sounds and is composed only of sound effects, but the present invention is not limited to this form. , the performance sound B may include dialogue sounds.

For example, the effect sound B may be composed of [dialogue sound B] and [effect sound B]. However, when the CU effect is executed, the effect sound B is reproduced and output without being subjected to scratch processing.

(17) In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the performance sound C2 reproduced and output in the second normal jackpot notification performance is composed of a dialogue sound and a sound effect. However, the production sound C2 may have a configuration other than the dialogue sound and the sound effect.

For example, the effect sound C2 may include BGM in addition to dialogue sounds and sound effects. In this case, the production sound C2 may include at least one of dialogue sounds, sound effects, and BGM, or may not include any of dialogue sounds, sound effects, and BGM.

(18) In the above embodiment, when the effect sound C2 is played back and output, after the [first effect sound C2] "V" is scratch-processed and reproduced four times in a row, the [first effect sound C2] 1 effect sound C2] and [second effect sound C2] "Victory" are played back, but the format is not limited to this, and when the effect sound C2 is played back, the [first effect sound After the sound C2] "V" is scratch-processed and reproduced four times in a row, the [second effect sound C2] "Ctory" may be reproduced and output. In this case, when the second normal jackpot notification performance is executed, the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output "V, V, V, V, V, ctory".

(19) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the effect sound I1 when the operation promotion display BT is displayed before the second normal jackpot notification effect is not subjected to scratch processing. Not limited to this form, the effect sound I1 when the operation promotion display BT is displayed before the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed may be subjected to scratch processing.

(20) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot notification sound when hitting right is composed of a dialogue sound and a sound effect, but the jackpot notification sound when hitting right is not limited to such a form. However, it does not have to consist of dialogue sounds and sound effects. For example, the jackpot notification sound when hitting right may be composed only of dialogue sounds, or may be composed only of sound effects.

(21) In the above embodiment, the normal jackpot notification sound and the right hit jackpot notification sound are provided as the jackpot notification sound at the timing of the winning branch during the super reach performance, and at the start of variation and when the reach is established. Although an example has been shown in which a jackpot notification sound is suddenly provided as the jackpot notification sound, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a jackpot notification sound different from the jackpot notification sound described above may be provided.

For example, after the timing when the normal jackpot notification sound and the right-hand hit jackpot notification sound are played back and the display result is announced as a "jackpot", in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A symbol jackpot notification effect sound may be provided to notify that the display result is a "jackpot" by using a decorative symbol again at the timing when the ornamental symbol that the display result is a "jackpot" is stopped and displayed.

(22) In the above embodiment, an example is given in which a scratch-processed effect sound is played back and output in a change precursor effect that indicates whether or not a special change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes is to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and scratch-processed performance sound may be played back and output in a change precursor performance that suggests whether or not a performance in which information different from the active display changes will be executed. .

For example, assume that it is possible to perform a background change effect in which a background image, which is information related to a variable display, changes. In the background change effect, the background image is changed from a normal background image to a first background image or a second background image. The jackpot expectation level is usually set according to the relationship: background image < first background image < second background image. In the change precursor performance that suggests whether or not this background change performance will be executed, scratch-processed performance sound may be reproduced and output.

(23) In the above embodiment, when the change precursor performance: success pattern is executed, the characters “READY” and “GO” indicating that the special change performance will start are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and information different from the words "READY" and "GO" may be displayed when the success pattern is executed. .

For example, when the change precursor performance: success pattern is executed, the characters “Okay” and the words “Don!”, which suggest that the special change performance is to be started, may be displayed.

(24) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a time-saving rush effect is executed to notify that the time-saving state (rush mode) is being controlled. An entry performance may be performed to notify that the vehicle will be controlled.

For example, a jackpot entry effect may be executed to inform that the game is being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or a small winning entry effect may be executed to notify that the game is being controlled to a small winning gaming state.

For example, when a jackpot entry effect is executed, a jackpot explanation image is displayed on the image display device 5. The jackpot explanation image contains information explaining the playing method during the jackpot ("Keep hitting right until the final round of the bonus ends!") and the ball-hitting operation handle, which is not currently controlled in the jackpot game state. This is an image that includes a demo icon that suggests to the player that there is no need to operate 30, and character A. At this time, the effect sound F is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the third countdown image CDI3 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F3] "Three" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the second countdown image CDI2 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F2] "Two" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the first countdown image CDI1 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F1] "One" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the start image JSI is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the effect sound F [second effect sound F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second effect sound F and third effect sound F] "s, s, s, s, start" are heard from speakers 8L and 8R. It is played back and output.

Further, in the slot machine, an entry effect may be executed to notify that the slot machine will be controlled by a bonus (big bonus, regular bonus, pseudo bonus, etc.), RT, AT, ART, CZ, etc. In these rush effects, scratched effect sounds may be reproduced and output.

(25) In the above embodiment, in the time-saving effect, the word "START" on the image display device 5, the scratch-processed [second effect sound F] from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the [third effect] Sound F] An example is shown in which the production sound of "START" matches, but not limited to this type, in the time-saving production, the characters "START" on the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R It is not necessary that the performance sound from

For example, in a time-saving rush performance, when the word "START" is displayed on the image display device 5, the performance sounds "Ikuzo", "Go", and "Fire" are played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. may be done. Then, these performance sounds may be scratched and reproduced.

(26) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the start image is an image that includes an object with an arrow pointing to the right; however, the start image is not limited to this form. It may also be an image that includes. For example, the start image may include an effect display or a character. When the start image includes an effect display, the effect display may be in a golden form to excite the fact that a right-handed game is about to start. Furthermore, when the start image includes a character, the character may point to the right to indicate that a right-handed game is about to start.

(27) In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the time-saving rush performance is executed during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot gaming state, but the time-saving rush production is not limited to such a form. It may be executed at a timing other than the period. For example, the time-saving rush effect may be executed during the jackpot RD period of the jackpot game state, and the time-saving rush effect is assumed to be executed in the final round of the jackpot round game. In this case, a performance for selecting a performance mode in the rush mode may be performed in the round before the final round of the jackpot round game.

(28) In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the time-saving rush performance is always executed during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot gaming state, but the time-saving rush production is not limited to this type of form. It does not necessarily have to be executed during the ED period.

For example, the time-saving entry effect displays an operation promotion display for selecting whether or not to execute the time-saving entry effect during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot game state, and when this operation promotion display is operated, the time-saving entry effect is displayed. A performance may also be performed.

(29) In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the sound effect has a longer playback period than the dialogue sound in the scratch-processed sound that is normally played back and output in the jackpot notification performance. Not limited to such a form, in the scratch-processed performance sound that is normally reproduced and output in the jackpot notification performance, the dialogue sound may have a longer reproduction output period than the sound effect.

(30) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the character that mainly appears in the super reach performance and the character voice of the performance sound when the operation promotion display is displayed are the same. The present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character that mainly appears in the super reach performance and the character voice of the performance sound when the operation promotion display is displayed may not match. For example, if the character that mainly appears in the Super Reach performance and the character voice of the performance sound when the operation promotion display is displayed do not match, even if you adopt a configuration that guarantees a jackpot as a contradictory performance. good.

(31) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the player performs a pseudo scratch process at an arbitrary timing and reproduces and outputs the effect sound by repeatedly tapping the operation unit. Regardless of the form, the player may perform a pseudo scratch process at an arbitrary timing and reproduce and output the effect sound by operating the operating section in a manner different from continuous hitting. For example, by pressing and holding the operation unit for a long time, the effect sound may be reproduced and output by causing the effect sound to be scratched in a pseudo manner.

(32) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the character A is displayed inside the resurrection display (the first resurrection display, the second resurrection display) in the resurrection effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. An image different from the character A may be displayed within the resurrection display in the resurrection effect.

For example, a character different from character A may be displayed within the resurrection display in the resurrection effect. In this case, premium characters unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and characters that mainly appeared in the super reach are displayed.

(33) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are composed of characters related to the characters "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot". The first resurrection display and the second resurrection display may be configured with information different from the characters "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot".

For example, the characters ``BONUS'' and ``Blessing'' indicate a jackpot, the ``NEXT'' and ``Ren'' characters indicate V stock, and the ``Ren'' character indicates that the SP will develop into a specific SP. The characters ``CHALLENGE'' or ``BATTLE'' may also be used.

Further, the information may be information that is not related to the performance or gaming state that will be executed afterwards. For example, the word "dream" or the word "dream" may be used, although the jackpot occurs after the revival performance, but is not associated with the jackpot.

(34) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are composed of a part of the characters "FEVER" indicating a jackpot, but they are not limited to such a form. , the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display may be composed of all the characters "FEVER" indicating a jackpot.

(35) In addition, in the above embodiment, in the revival effect, the first revival display is composed of a white display color, and the second revival display is composed of a black display color that is complementary to white. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and in the revival effect, the display color of the first revival display and the display color of the second revival display do not have to be in a complementary color contrast relationship.

(36) In the above embodiment, (i) the display result of the variable display is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" [type jackpot], and (ii) the display result of the variable display Based on the fact that has become a "small win", the game medium is controlled to be in a small win gaming state so that the game medium can enter the V winning area in the V winning device, and based on the fact that the gaming medium has entered the V winning area. This is a gaming machine equipped with a [type 2 jackpot] that controls the jackpot game state. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is an example of a [type 1 + type 2 mixed machine] that has a pattern of [type 1 jackpot] and [type 2 jackpot] as a pattern for controlling the (i + ii) jackpot gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the various effects shown in the embodiments described above may be applied to gaming machines having different gaming properties.

(36-1) For example, the effect shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay of a [V-ST machine]. [V-ST machine] In the first round of the jackpot game state, after the game ball enters the variable V winning ball device (V lid) described later, the game ball enters the V winning hole, and after the jackpot game ends. This is a gaming machine that has a gaming feature in which probability change control, which will be described later, is executed over a maximum of 70 variable displays.

The gaming states include a "normal state" (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "probability change control is not executed (gaming state)") which is a low probability state and a non-time saving state, and a high probability state and a time saving state. A "probability variable state" (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "probability variable control is executed (gaming state)") shall be provided. For example, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/319.7, and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is set to 1/40.

In the [V-ST machine], the probability variable state is the end of either one of the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) or the start of the next jackpot game state. Continues until the condition is met first.

Further, as jackpot types, there are provided a "normal jackpot" in which probability variable control is not executed, and a "probability variable jackpot" in which probability variable control is executed.

In addition, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) shall be provided inside the big winning opening. The mechanism of the variable V winning ball device is the same as the V judgment winning ball device 87, so the explanation will be omitted. The open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state in which the open state is short (for example, 0.1 seconds) and a long open state in which the open state is long (for example, 15 seconds). ). "Normal jackpot" means that the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and "probable strange jackpot" is that the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot playing state. shall be taken as a thing. For example, the "normal jackpot" includes a "3R normal jackpot" in which the number of rounds is 3.

The jackpot game state due to the "normal jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that changes the jackpot into an open state advantageous to the player in the first to third rounds. In addition, in the "normal jackpot", the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, so it is extremely difficult to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can't expect much, it's essentially a "normal jackpot."

The jackpot game state due to the "probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which the jackpot is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the 1st to 3rd rounds/10th round. In addition, in the "probability variable jackpot", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot. For example, the "probable variable jackpot" includes a "3R variable probability jackpot" in which the number of rounds is 3, and a "10R variable variable jackpot" in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds.

When a jackpot occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined to be a "3R normal jackpot" at a rate of 50%, and a "3R time-saving jackpot" at a rate of 50%. Further, when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined to be a "10R probability variable jackpot" at a rate of 100%.

In such a [V-ST machine] gaming machine, various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied.

(36-2) Furthermore, the effect shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having the gaming property of [V-Probable Variable Machine]. [V-Probability Variable Machine] is provided with a normal state which is a low probability state and a probability variable state which is a high probability state (gaming state in which probability variable control is executed). There are two types of jackpots: "normal jackpot" in which probability variable control is not executed, and "variable probability jackpot" in which probability variable control is executed. [V-Probable Variable Machine] is a game ball that enters the variable V winning ball device (V lid) mentioned above in the first round of the jackpot game state, and then enters the V winning hole, so that after the jackpot game ends. This is a gaming machine that has a gaming feature in which probability variable control is executed over a period until the next jackpot occurs.

When a jackpot occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined to be a "3R normal jackpot" at a rate of 50%, and a "3R time-saving jackpot" at a rate of 50%. Further, when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined to be a ``10R normal jackpot'' at a rate of 20%, and a ``10R definite variable jackpot'' at a rate of 80%.

In such a [V-probability change machine] gaming machine, various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(37) In the above embodiment, when the special change effect is executed, the final display mode of the active display changes to the blue mode with low jackpot expectation rate at 0%. The present invention is not limited to such a form, and when the special change effect is executed, the rate at which the final display mode of the active display changes to the blue mode with low jackpot expectation may be other than 0%.

For example, when a special change effect is executed, the rate at which the final display mode of the active display changes to a blue mode with low expectations for a jackpot is set to 5%, and the final display mode of the active display changes to a red mode with high expectations for a jackpot. The rate of change to gold or golden color is set to 95%. At this time, when a special change effect is executed, the final display mode of the active display has a high rate of changing to a red mode or gold mode, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, but the final display mode of the active display has a low probability of a jackpot. Since there is a possibility that the color changes to blue, it is possible to draw the player's attention even more to the special change performance.

The feature section 05TM described above includes the following configurations.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (story SP development performance) that suggests whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled;
When the specific production (story SP development production) is executed, the specific production sound (scratch-processed production sound G) consisting of specially processed dialogue sounds and sound effects is output to the sound output means (speaker). 8L, 8R) can be output from
During the period in which the specific effect sound is being output, the display means (image display device 5) displays a first display (yellow character A) and a second display (purple character A) different from the first display. Each can be displayed multiple times (alternately twice),
The second display is a display color that is an inversion of the display color of the first display (the display colors of character A, yellow and purple, are complementary colors).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the specific performance, the first display and the second display color, which is a display color that is an inversion of the display color of the first display, are each displayed multiple times according to the output of the specific performance sound. By doing so, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the audio and video in the gaming machine, and by displaying each inverted display color multiple times, it is possible to make the display colors of the first display and the second display appear even more vivid. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform a variable display (fluctuating display) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
Suspended storage means (RAM 102) that stores information regarding variable display that has not been executed as suspended storage;
Before the variable display is executed, a determining means (CPU 103 that executes jackpot determination/small hit determination at the time of starting winning) determines whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
A first piece of music (song A) composed of a first singing sound and a first accompaniment sound, and a second piece of music that is different from the first music piece and composed of a second singing sound and a second accompaniment sound. 2 songs (song X) can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
The first music piece can be output from the sound output means when controlled to the advantageous state,
when the control is in the advantageous state, a predetermined effect that suggests that the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory that is the subject of the determination is to be controlled in the advantageous state based on the determination by the determination means; It is possible to execute the first holding series performance),
When the predetermined performance is executed, the second music piece can be output from the sound output means,
While the first singing sound is not specially processed, at least a part of the second singing sound is specially processed (music A is played back without being scratched, while music X is not scratched. (played out)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, the special feeling of the predetermined performance can be improved by outputting the second music when the predetermined performance is executed. Furthermore, at least a part of the second singing sound of the second music piece that is output when the predetermined performance is performed is specially processed, thereby giving an impression to the player of the second song when the predetermined performance is performed. be able to.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform a variable display (fluctuating display) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
Suspended storage means (RAM 102) that stores information regarding variable display that has not been executed as suspended storage;
Before the variable display is executed, a determining means (CPU 103 that executes jackpot determination/small hit determination at the time of starting winning) determines whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state and a special state (time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
When controlled in the advantageous state, the first music (music A, music B, music C) can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
when the control is in the advantageous state, a predetermined effect that suggests that the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory that is the subject of the determination is to be controlled in the advantageous state based on the determination by the determination means; It is possible to execute the first holding series performance),
When the predetermined performance is executed, a second song (song X) different from the first song can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
Suggesting that, in the special state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory that is the subject of the determination is controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination by the determination means. It is possible to perform a special performance (second hold continuous performance),
A gaming machine characterized in that the second music (song X) can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R) when the special performance (second continuous performance on hold) is executed.

According to such a configuration, when the predetermined performance is executed, the second music different from the first music is output, thereby making it possible to improve the special feeling of the predetermined performance. In addition, when the predetermined performance and special performance are executed, a common second music piece is output from the advantageous state to the special state, so that the music is changed when switching from the advantageous state to the special state. can prevent a decline in

The gaming machine of means 4 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform a variable display (fluctuating display) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
A benefit granting means (step S05TM3070 of the performance determination process at the start of jackpot) for granting a benefit (V stock (reserved series, next series));
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
comprising a music receiving means (special operation promotion display BT2) that allows the player to select at least one music from among multiple types of music (song A, music B, music C);
The performance control means is
The music selected by the player can be output from the sound output means when controlled to be in the advantageous state;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a special performance (first V stock performance (first pending continuous performance, first confirmed performance)) that suggests that the benefit will be granted,
When execution of the special performance is started, a special performance sound (scratch-processed performance sound A) consisting of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect can be output from the sound output means,
Restricting the selection of the music by the music receiving means during the period when the special effect sound is being output (the special operation promotion display BT2 is erased and the music cannot be selected).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the special performance is being performed, the selection of music by the music receiving means is restricted, so that the special feeling of the special performance can be improved and it is possible to select the music. By being able to do so, it is possible to prevent interest in the special performance from decreasing.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (battle SP performance) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific performance is composed of a first part (the first half of the battle SP) and a second part (the second half of the battle SP) that is executed after the first part,
In the first part and the second part, it is possible to perform a special performance that reduces the visibility of the display means (battle SP first half: CU performance, battle SP second half: second normal jackpot notification performance). can be,
When the special performance is executed in the first part, a first performance sound (performance sound B) can be output from the sound output means,
When the special performance is executed in the second part, a second performance sound (performance sound C2) different from the first performance sound can be output from the sound output means,
The second sound effect is composed of specially processed dialogue sounds and sound effects (the sound effect C2 has been subjected to scratch processing).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a performance that lowers the visibility of the display means in both the first part special performance and the second part special performance. On the other hand, by specially processing the second performance sound, it is possible to clarify the difference between the special performance of the first part and the special performance of the second part, while reducing the production cost of the performance and the processing burden of performance control.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state and a special state (time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
When the control is in the normal state, a first notification sound (normal jackpot notification sound (performance sound C1, performance sound C2, performance sound C3)) that notifies that the control is in the advantageous state is outputted as the sound. It is possible to output from means,
When being controlled to the special state, a second notification sound (a jackpot notification sound when hitting right (direction sound D1, performance sound D2, performance sound D3)) that notifies that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state is set to the sound. It can be output from an output means,
The first notification sound is composed of a specially processed special dialogue sound and a special effect sound, while the second notification sound is composed of a specific dialogue sound that has not been specially processed and a specific sound effect. (While the normal jackpot notification sound is scratch-processed, the right-hand jackpot notification sound is not scratch-processed).
The output period of the first notification sound is longer than the output period of the second notification sound (the reproduction output period of the jackpot notification sound when hitting right is 5.25S, and the reproduction output period of the jackpot notification sound during normal time is 6 seconds) .25S)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by outputting the first notification sound composed of a specially processed special dialogue sound and a special effect sound, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state when the control is in a normal state. It is possible to increase the impact when being notified of being controlled. In addition, the second notification sound, which is composed of a specific dialogue sound that has not been specially processed and a specific sound effect, and which has a shorter output period than the first notification sound, creates a sense of speed and exhilaration in a time-saving state. It is possible to prevent the feeling from decreasing.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform a variable display (fluctuating display) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
Display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
A specific display (pending display, active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
Depending on the display mode of the specific display, it is possible to execute a specific effect (changing effect) that suggests whether or not the control will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The specific display includes the specific display in a first mode (normal mode, blue mode) and the specific display in a second mode (red mode, golden mode) in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that in the first mode. There is a display and
The specific effects include a first specific effect (normal change effect) and a second specific effect (special change effect) in which the specific display of the second mode is displayed at a higher rate than the first specific effect. can be,
The performance control means is
When the first specific performance is executed, before the first specific performance is executed, the special performance sound consisting of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect is not output from the sound output means. (None of the production sounds are played back and output before the normal change production is executed),
When the second specific effect is executed, the special effect sound can be output from the sound output means before the second specific effect is executed (scratch processing is performed before the special change effect is executed). The produced sound EA is played back and output)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by outputting the special effect sound, it is possible to suggest that the second specific effect will be executed, which is more likely to be controlled to be in an advantageous state than the first specific effect, so that the player can It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special effect sound is output, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state, time saving state) that is advantageous for a player,
Display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
When the control of the advantageous state is started, it is possible to execute a specific performance (time-saving rush performance) that suggests that the control of the advantageous state is started,
The specific performance is a performance that causes the display means to display a specific display (start image JSI) that suggests that control of the advantageous state is started, and is related to the specific display and includes a specially processed specific line. A gaming machine characterized in that the performance is such that a specific performance sound (scratch-processed performance sound F) consisting of a sound and a sound effect is outputted from the sound output means.

According to such a configuration, when the advantageous state control is started, a specially processed specific effect sound is output, thereby appropriately informing the player of the timing at which the advantageous state control is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (story SP development performance) that suggests whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled;
When the specific production (story SP development production) is executed, the specific production sound (scratch-processed production sound G) consisting of specially processed dialogue sounds and sound effects is output to the sound output means (speaker). 8L, 8R) can be output from
During the period in which the specific effect sound is being output, the display means (image display device 5) displays a first display (yellow character A) and a second display (purple character A) different from the first display. Each can be displayed multiple times (alternately twice),
The second display is a display color that is an inversion of the display color of the first display (the display colors of character A, yellow and purple, are complementary colors).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the specific performance, the first display and the second display color, which is a display color that is an inversion of the display color of the first display, are each displayed multiple times according to the output of the specific performance sound. By doing so, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the audio and video in the gaming machine, and by displaying each inverted display color multiple times, it is possible to make the display colors of the first display and the second display appear even more vivid. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means 10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
A first notification performance (first normal jackpot notification performance) that notifies that the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state is a performance that is different from the first notification performance and that notifies that the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It is possible to perform a second notification performance (second normal jackpot notification performance),
When the first notification performance is executed, a first performance sound (performance sound C1) can be output from the sound output means,
When the second notification performance is executed, a second performance sound (performance sound C2) can be output from the sound output means,
The first effect sound is composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect (the first effect sound C1 of the effect sound C1 is composed of the first dialogue sound C1, the first sound effect C, ), the second performance sound is a dialogue sound different from the dialogue sound, and is composed of a specially processed specific dialogue sound and the sound effect ([ of the performance sound C2]). The first production sound C2] is composed of the first dialogue sound C2 and the first sound effect C.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, the first notification effect and the second notification effect are provided as effects to notify that the control is in an advantageous state, so that only either the first notification effect or the second notification effect is provided. The interest can be improved compared to when it is not provided. In addition, by setting only the dialogue sounds individually and using the same sound effects for the first notification performance and the second notification performance, the first notification performance and the second notification performance can be differentiated. It is possible to reduce production costs and storage capacity related to production.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (resurrection performance) that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the specific performance is executed, a special performance sound (scratch-processed performance sound J) consisting of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect can be output from the sound output means,
When the special effect sound is output, a specific display (a first revival display, a second revival display) related to the dialogue sound can be displayed on the display means,
During the period in which the special effect sound is output, the specific display of a first size and the specific display of a second size larger than the first size can each be displayed multiple times on the display means (scratch). When the processed sound effects J are played back and output, the first revival display and the second revival display are alternately displayed twice on the image display device 5.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the specific production, the first size specific display related to the special production sound and the second size specific display are displayed on the display means, thereby improving the player's visual and auditory sense. It is possible to create a performance that appeals to people. Furthermore, by switching the size of the specific display in accordance with the output timing of the special effect sound, it is possible to strengthen the sense of unity between video and audio, and to improve the interest of the specific effect.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a display means;
sound output means;
A production control means capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the specific production is executed, a specific production sound consisting of specially processed dialogue sounds and sound effects can be output from the sound output means,
A first display and a second display different from the first display can each be displayed multiple times on the display means during a period in which the specific effect sound is being output,
The second display is a display color that is an inversion of the display color of the first display,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
When the starting condition is satisfied, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the production identification information before the transmittance of the production identification information reaches the second value. A gaming machine characterized by displaying:

Images